JP2018175992A - System for game - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To avoid an inconvenience of becoming a state as much as possible where operation of a game machine becomes impossible, in a case in which an authentication to the effect that the game machine is genuine cannot be obtained on the basis of identification information from a management server.SOLUTION: A main control part of a card unit transmits, to an upper server, an authentication inquiry ATT as to whether or not game machine chip information is registered in the upper server. If an authentication result CMD informing a non-registration is sent back, the main control part performs a transmission, to a CU communication control unit, to the effect that the authentication result of the game machine is OK within a range of operation permission days to execute a card-insertion/cash credit enabling processing. Then, at a time when the upper server and the card unit are in an off-line state, the game machine chip information stored in an EEPROM of the card unit's main control part 323 is to be verified with the game machine chip information stored in an information storage part for verification.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 84

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming system including a management server, a gaming machine in which a player plays a game, and a gaming apparatus communicably connected to the management server and the gaming machine to enable predetermined processing. .

  Conventionally, a chip ID as an example of identification information for confirming the authenticity of a gaming machine is transmitted to a center management device via a card unit, and the transmitted chip ID is stored in advance in the center management device. There is one that checks whether or not it matches the regular chip ID (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2010-162425, A

  Although the center management device can authenticate the authenticity of the gaming machine in the one described in Patent Document 1, the authentication can not be performed when the center management device and the card unit are in the offline state. There is a risk that the gaming machine can not operate until authentication can be performed.

  That is, in the conventional system, the management server obtains genuine authentication of the gaming machine based on the identification information, such as in an offline state between a management server such as a center management device and a gaming device such as a card unit. There is a drawback that there is a risk that the game machine can not be operated if it can not.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the actual situation, and an object thereof is that the operation of the gaming machine can not be performed when the management server can not obtain authentication that the gaming machine based on the identification information is genuine. It is to prevent the inconvenience of becoming a state as much as possible.

(1) The present invention is connected communicably to a management server (host server 801), a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, the management server and the gaming machine, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables predetermined processing,
The management server includes identification information registration means (authentication information storage unit) for registering management server side identification information (main chip ID, payout chip ID) for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine.
The gaming device is
Registration confirmation means (a game machine chip information shown in FIGS. 83 and 84) for performing a confirmation process to confirm whether or not the management server side identification information corresponding to the identification information of the gaming machine has been registered in the management server. Inquiry),
Game permission means (card insertion / payment enable process in FIG. 83) for permitting a game by the gaming machine when the result of confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is already registered,
The identification information of the gaming machine when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed is stored as the gaming apparatus side identification information regardless of the result of the confirmation processing, and the identification information already registered by the management server or Identification information storage means (storage processing of gaming machine chip information in FIGS. 83 and 84) that also stores information as to whether it is unregistered identification information or not;
After the gaming apparatus side identification information is stored in the identification information storage means, the identification information storage means can not communicate with the management server when performing confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means. Off-line storage to determine whether the gaming apparatus side identification information stored in the storage device matches the identification information of the gaming machine and whether the identification information has been registered or not registered by the management server Determining means (verifying the gaming machine chip information stored in the EEPROM of the main control unit 323 at off-line time with the gaming machine chip information stored in the authentication information storage unit);
The game allowance means is
When the off-line storage determination unit determines that the identification information matches and the identification information is registered by the management server, the game is permitted,
When it is determined by the off-line storage determination unit that the identification information matches and the identification information is not registered by the management server, the game by the gaming machine is permitted within a predetermined limited period.

  According to such a configuration, when it is registered as a result of confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the identification information of the gaming machine is registered in the management server, while the game by the gaming machine is permitted, the management server As a result, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the inconvenience that the gaming machine can not be operated when the gaming machine based on the identification information can not obtain authentication to the effect that the gaming machine is authentic.

  Furthermore, the identification information that is the object of the confirmation when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed is stored in the gaming device, and thereafter, when the registration confirmation processing is performed, the management server and the management server are offline. Sometimes, the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus and the identification information of the gaming machine are collated to enable off-line confirmation processing, and security deterioration can be prevented as much as possible.

(2) In the gaming system according to (1), when the identification information storage means stores the identification information to be confirmed, it may be identification information registered by the management server or unregistered identification information. (Also, the communication control IC information is stored in association with the registered information in the authentication information storage unit of the main control unit 323),
When it is determined that the gaming machine corresponds to unregistered identification information as a result of confirmation processing by the off-line confirmation unit, the gaming apparatus may play the game within a predetermined limited period. Limited permission means to allow the game by the game machine (If the communication control IC information of the verification target is stored in the authentication information storage unit and it is not registered information, it is judged that there is no communication control IC information, CU Execution of the communication control IC authentication sequence is permitted within the range of operation permission days at the time of authentication NG).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming apparatus stores the identification information to be confirmed, the identification information as registered or unregistered identification information by the management server is also stored and stored. When it is determined that it corresponds to the unregistered identification information as a result of the confirmation processing in the gaming device in, in order to allow the game within the limited period, it is limited within the limited period even when offline The game can be realized, and a drop in security when off-line can be prevented as much as possible.

(3) Another aspect of the present invention is a management server (upper server 801) for registering management server side identification information (main chip ID, payout chip ID) for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine and the above-mentioned gaming machine (pachinko machine) A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that includes a communication unit capable of communicating with a game machine 2 and a slot machine 2S, and enables predetermined processing,
Registration confirmation means (a game machine chip information shown in FIGS. 83 and 84) for performing a confirmation process to confirm whether or not the management server side identification information corresponding to the identification information of the gaming machine has been registered in the management server. Inquiry),
Game permission means (card insertion / payment enable process in FIG. 83) for permitting a game by the gaming machine when the result of confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is already registered,
The identification information of the gaming machine when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed is stored as the gaming apparatus side identification information regardless of the result of the confirmation processing, and the identification information already registered by the management server or Identification information storage means (storage processing of gaming machine chip information in FIGS. 83 and 84) that also stores information as to whether it is unregistered identification information or not;
After the gaming apparatus side identification information is stored in the identification information storage means, the identification information storage means can not communicate with the management server when performing confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means. Off-line storage to determine whether the gaming apparatus side identification information stored in the storage device matches the identification information of the gaming machine and whether the identification information has been registered or not registered by the management server Determining means (verifying the gaming machine chip information stored in the EEPROM of the main control unit 323 at off-line time with the gaming machine chip information stored in the authentication information storage unit);
The game allowance means is
When the off-line storage determination unit determines that the identification information matches and the identification information is registered by the management server, the game is permitted,
When it is determined by the off-line storage determination unit that the identification information matches and the identification information is not registered by the management server, the game by the gaming machine is permitted within a predetermined limited period.

  According to such a configuration, when the result of confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the identification information of the gaming machine is registered in the management server is registered, while the game by the gaming machine is permitted, the confirmation processing is performed. Even if the result of registration has not been confirmed, the gaming server based on the identification information is genuine by the management server, because the gaming machine is permitted to play the game within the predetermined limited period. It is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the inconvenience that the gaming machine can not be operated when it is not possible to obtain the certification.

  Furthermore, the identification information that is the object of the confirmation when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed is stored in the gaming device, and thereafter, when the registration confirmation processing is performed, the management server and the management server are offline. Sometimes, the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus and the identification information of the gaming machine are collated to enable off-line confirmation processing, and security deterioration can be prevented as much as possible.

(4) In the gaming apparatus of (3), when the identification information storage means stores the identification information to be confirmed, the identification information may be registered identification information by the management server or unregistered identification information. (Also, the communication control IC information is stored in association with the registered information in the authentication information storage unit of the main control unit 323),
When it is determined that the gaming machine corresponds to unregistered identification information as a result of confirmation processing by the off-line confirmation unit, the restriction allowance unit is configured to play the game within a predetermined limited period. Limiting permission means that allows the player to play a game is included. (If the communication control IC information to be collated is stored in the authentication information storage unit and there is no registration information, it is judged that the communication control IC information is absent. , Execution of the communication control IC authentication sequence is permitted within the range of operation permission days at the time of CU authentication NG).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming apparatus stores the identification information to be confirmed, the identification information as registered or unregistered identification information by the management server is also stored and stored. When it is determined that it corresponds to the unregistered identification information as a result of the confirmation processing in the gaming device in, in order to allow the game within the limited period, it is limited within the limited period even when offline The game can be realized, and a drop in security when off-line can be prevented as much as possible.

It is a front view showing a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining various data memorized in the card unit side and a pachinko machine side and its transmission and reception. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a control mode of storing game history data on each of the CU side and the P base side. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process at the time of detecting abnormality as a result of mutual authentication. It is a figure which shows the frame structure used by communication. It is a figure showing an example of processing with a card unit and a pachinko machine at the time of power supply starting. (A) (b) is a figure which shows an example of a process of the subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown by FIG. 6, (a) is an authentication sequence at the time of CU power activation, (b) is at the time of game machine power activation Authentication sequence. It is a figure which shows an example of a process of the subroutine program of the chip | tip ID authentication sequence shown by FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program at the time of the authentication key update of a serial ID authentication sequence. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the chip | tip ID authentication sequence shown to FIG. 7 (a) (b). It is a flowchart for demonstrating the case where there exists abnormality in the update of an authentication key by a serial ID authentication sequence. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the case where the authentication result of CU communication control part is abnormal by a serial ID authentication sequence. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the case where the effective key of CU communication control part is abnormal in a serial ID authentication sequence. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the serial ID attestation sequence at the time of normal. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a chip | tip ID authentication sequence in case a delivery control authentication result is abnormal. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of CU communication-control part serial ID attestation sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the apparatus authentication sequence shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the memory | storage setting to EEPROM of an authentication key. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a process of the operation | work message | telegram sequence at the time of normality, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a process of the operation | work message | telegram sequence at the time of abnormality. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when reconnecting a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process of CU and P base when a card | curd is inserted. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of an insertion process shown in FIG. 16; It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine at the time of consuming the balance of a prepaid card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine at the time of a replay. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case of performing subtraction of the number of game balls by the instruction | indication of the card unit side. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the number of game balls in a pachinko machine runs out during a game. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning a card. It is a figure showing an example of processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when interrupting a game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking and opening the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the modification of a process of a card unit and a pachinko machine at the time of unlocking and opening the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when releasing and unlocking the cell (front frame) of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine is not connected when starting a power supply in the state in which a card unit is holding card | curd. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the operation instruction | command (non-request | requirement operation | movement) from a card unit does not reach a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response (response with respect to request | requirement absence) from a pachinko machine does not reach a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction | command (response with respect to an addition request | requirement) from a card unit does not reach a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response (response with respect to an addition request | requirement) from a pachinko machine does not arrive at a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction | command (subtraction request | requirement) from a card unit does not reach a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response (response to a subtraction request | requirement) from a pachinko machine does not reach a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of addition refusal with respect to the addition request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of subtraction refusal with respect to the subtraction request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns a clear refusal response with respect to a clear instruction | indication request | requirement of a card unit. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where the pachinko machine returns a permission denial response to the game permission request of the card unit. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine in the case where the pachinko machine responds to the gaming prohibition request of the card unit in response to the prohibition refusal. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of glass door open refusal to the glass door open request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of cell (front frame) open refusal with respect to the cell (front frame) open request | requirement of a card unit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating about a payment process. It is a flow chart for explaining mode change (test hitting mode). It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when power failure in a card unit after the operation response arrival about addition / subtraction data arrival occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before reach | attainment of operation instruction | indication. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before the addition request | requirement arrival. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case a power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before the operation response with respect to an addition request | requirement arrival. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before reach | attainment of a subtraction request | requirement. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before the operation response with respect to a subtraction request | requirement arrival. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before clearing request | requirement arrival. It is a figure which shows an example of a recovery process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the power supply interruption generate | occur | produces in a card unit before reaching the operation response with respect to a clear request | requirement. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the operation state displayed interlockingly with processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between a card unit and a delivery control part. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between a card unit and a delivery control part. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between LSI and the presentation control board for displays. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between LSI and the presentation control board for displays. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between LSI and the presentation control board for displays. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between LSI and the presentation control board for displays. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in a display. (A) is a figure which shows the counter used for encryption and decoding of SE2 mode, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the structure of the encryption of the block encryption by SE2 mode. It is explanatory drawing explaining the decoding system of the block encryption by SE2 mode. It is a figure which shows encryption communication at the time of normal times when the receiving side which received encryption communication text is decoded appropriately. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of abnormality when the operation | movement response from CU communication control part to a main control part does not arrive. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of abnormality when the operation instruction | indication to CU communication control part from a main control part does not arrive. It is a figure which shows the process of the modification at the time of abnormality at the time of the operation response non-attainment shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the process at the time of the abnormal time of an operation instruction | indication not reaching. (A) is a flowchart which shows the encryption processing by SE2 mode, (b) is a flowchart which shows the decoding processing by SE2 mode. (A) is a flowchart showing the specific control contents of the counter repair processing shown in FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, (b) shows the specific control contents of the repair processing in the modification shown in FIG. 72 and FIG. It is a flowchart. It is an explanatory view for explaining communication data, such as a command and a response, which are communicated between the upper server 801 and CU3. It is an explanatory view for explaining contents of authentication inquiry ATT. It is an explanatory view for explaining contents of authentication result CMD. It is an explanatory view for explaining contents of authentication control information CMD. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of an authentication operation specification CMD. It is a figure which shows the process of the start-up sequence as a sequence from a power-on of CU until it becomes an on-run state. It is a figure which shows the process of a setting value change sequence as a sequence when information, such as a change of the setting value of security relevant information, is changed after CU and the main control part were in an online state. It is a figure which shows the example in which operation | use permission was carried out by the authentication sequence when authentication between a main control part and CU communication control part is not implemented when it is an online state. It is a figure which shows the example in which the time-limited operation permission was permitted by the authentication sequence when authentication between a main control part and CU communication control part is not implemented when it is an online state. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example in which operation is disabled in the authentication sequence when authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit is not performed when in the online state. It is a figure which shows an error notification sequence when base abnormality is detected based on base abnormality detection setting value. It is a block diagram showing the main composition in the case of performing control which records point on CU failure on a card owned by a player using POS via a host server. It is a flowchart which shows the process performed by each of CU, a high-order server, and POS when control at the time of CU failure is performed. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the front door of the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining various data stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission and reception mode. It is a figure showing storage control of game history data in S unit and CU. It is a front view showing a card unit and a pachinko machine in another example. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for describing a control mode of storing gaming history data on each of the CU side and the P base side in a modification. It is a figure which shows storage control of the game history data in S unit and CU in a modification. It is a flowchart figure which shows the subroutine program in the modification of the process at the time of insertion shown in FIG.

  Hereinafter, embodiments according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, as a concept of the term used in the present embodiment, "game machine" is a game machine (pachinko machine, slot machine, etc.), card unit, Z counter, card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange It is a concept including all devices installed in a game arcade such as a device, and the “game device” is a concept in which only the game machine is excluded from the “game device”.

  First, referring to FIG. 1, a plurality of enclosed circulation type pachinko machines (abbreviated as pachinko machines or P units hereinafter) 2 as an example of a game machine are juxtaposed to each game island (not shown) arranged in plurality in the game arcade The card unit (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as CU) 3 of one example of the gaming apparatus is installed at a side position on the predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2 in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 There is. This card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who is not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member in the game arcade. A pachinko machine that accepts a membership card, which is a game storage medium to be played, and uses the gaming value (eg, card balance, number of balls held, number of balls stored, etc.) owned by the player specified by the recorded information on those cards It has a function to make the enclosed ball in 2 be bombarded and to be able to play a game. The visitor card and the membership card are constituted by an IC card. The pachinko machine 2 is provided with a pachinko ball enclosing unit as an example of a game medium enclosing unit, and pachinko balls enclosed in the pachinko ball enclosing unit are circulated and shot into the gaming area, and collected from the gaming area The ball is reduced again to the pachinko ball enclosure.

  The pachinko machine 2 has a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium enclosed therein, and the player operates the bat operating handle 25 to drive a bat firing motor (not shown) to drive the ball one shot. It is configured to be able to play a game by driving into the game area 27 on the front of the game board 26 one by one.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first-class pachinko machine, which is not shown, but a pachinko ball driven into the game area 27 can be won with a starting opening (1) and a starting hole A variable display device is provided which is provided with a mouth (2) and is variably displayed based on a detection signal of a start winning ball in each of the starting holes, and a display result of the variable display device is predetermined. A variable winning ball device (also referred to as a big winning opening) or the like which is opened by being a combination of specific identification information (for example, every second) is provided. The starting opening (2) is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed to a first state (for example, the open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, the closed state) disadvantageous to the player.

  It becomes big hit state by the variable winning a prize ball device opening. In addition, the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of odd variation symbols such as 777) of the combination (all eyes) of the big hit symbol, the probability variation big hit state is A probability fluctuation state (probability state) occurs with an increase in the probability of occurrence of the jackpot following the end of the jackpot state. There are two large winning openings, a large winning opening (1) and a large winning opening (2). For example, when a big hit occurs based on the winning opening in the starting opening (1), the big winning opening (1) is in the first state, and when a big hitting occurs based on the winning in the starting opening (2), the big winning opening (2) is in the first state. Furthermore, the game area 27 is provided with four normal winning openings (1) to (4).

  The pachinko balls thrown into the game area 27 are paid to any winning opening or are collected to an out port (not shown) without winning. The pachinko ball that has won the winning opening and the pachinko ball collected at the out port (not shown) are reduced again to the striking position through the recovery path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is hit again into the game area 27.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting a bill, a projecting portion 305 which is formed to project forward from the device front, and a card insertion / ejection slot for inserting a membership card or visitor card 309 and the like are provided. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / ejection slot 309 is accepted by a card reader / writer (not shown), and the information recorded in the card is read. In the above-mentioned projecting portion 305, the display card and the number of balls specified by the member card ID and the member ID recorded on the member card are accepted on the side facing the player when the member card is received. Replay button 319 for carrying out a replay game and an IR light receiving unit (not shown) for receiving an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a staff at the game arcade, converting it into an electronic signal and outputting it. It is provided.

  Furthermore, a loan button 321, a return button 322, and a call button 798 are provided between the display 312 and the replay button 319. The lending button 321 is a button operated to withdraw the prepaid balance specified by the inserted card and use it for gaming. The return button 322 is a button operated when the card inserted in the card insertion / ejection slot 309 is returned. The call button 798 is a button operated by the player when calling an attendant at the game arcade.

  The display unit 312 displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded in the inserted game recording medium (card), but the number of game balls to be described later and various other information While being displayable, the surface is configured of a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display unit 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if the number of balls acquired by the player is recorded in the inserted card, it is possible to withdraw from the number of balls and play a game with a pachinko machine, When the played card is a membership card and the number of balls is not recorded and the balls are recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, the pachinko machine 2 can play a game by withdrawing from the balls.

  The "reserved balls" are game media deposited in the game arcade, and are generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game arcade. On the other hand, the "number of balls held" is the number of game balls owned by the player as a result of the player playing a game with the gaming machine recorded on the card and has not been deposited in the game arcade yet It is the number of balls. Generally, the number of balls the player has acquired on the day at the game arcade is referred to as "bearing ball", and the number of balls acquired by the player before the previous day is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade "pool ball". Say.

  The number of balls held may be managed by a management device for number of balls management set in the game arcade. In short, the difference between "balls" and "balls" is the number of balls deposited in the game arcade after the operation for depositing the ball in the game arcade, or is still deposited in the game arcade It is a point of whether it is the number of balls of the stage not

  In this embodiment, the ball storage data is not directly recorded in the member card but is stored in the higher-level server such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the member card number, and the corresponding ball can be searched based on the member card number. It is done. On the other hand, balls are recorded directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the upper server in association with the card number.

  The bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 302 is taken in by a money discriminator (not shown), and the authenticity or the bill type is identified.

  At the lower position of the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2, a display 54, a chance button 56 and a jog dial 57 are provided. The display 54 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and displays a display screen as described later with reference to FIG. 59 to the player. The jog dial 57 is used to select and designate various display items (icons) and the like on the display screen displayed on the display 54 when the player rotates. When the player turns the jog dial 57, the various display items on the display screen displayed on the display 54 are sequentially moved and displayed, and the jog dial 57 is turned. When the player presses the chance button 56 after designating the display item which the player desires to select, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is decided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 2, main ones of various data stored in each of the CU side and the P base side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CU side manages the current number of game balls by calculating the fluctuation of the number of game balls on the P-unit side. The P game side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls. However, when the number of game balls on the P side becomes 0, the P ball controls to stop the firing of ball by itself quickly. It is a secondary thing used only to Since the main control of the number of game balls is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of game balls on the side of P, and the cost of P can be minimized.

  In particular, compared with CU, the P unit has a short replacement cycle in the game arcade and replacement is performed early. In relation to that, by giving the main management function regarding the number of game balls on P side to CU side and suppressing the cost of P side, it is possible to reduce the running cost of the game arcade introducing the enclosed type game machine It has the advantage of

  FIG. 2 shows stored data of the RAM provided in the main control unit 323 on the CU side and stored data of the RAM mounted on the payout control unit 17 on the P side. First, when the P unit (pachinko machine 2) and the CU (card unit 3) are installed in the game arcade for the first time and the power is turned on in the electrically connected state, the payout control unit 17 (P unit side) 4) transmits the main chip ID from the main control board 16 and transmits the main chip ID to the CU side, and transmits the payout chip ID stored by the payout control unit 17 itself to the CU side. Do.

  The CU side stores the transmitted main chip ID and the payout chip ID. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time when the CU side and the P side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the P side, and the P side stores the transmitted connection time .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the P base side. After that, when the power is turned on, those three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data, are transmitted from the P side to the CU side.

  The CU side collates the transmitted data with the already stored data, and determines whether the same P unit as the previous time is connected. As for connection time data, new connection time data for which communication between the CU side and P unit side is started every time the power is raised is transmitted from the CU side to the P unit side, and the new connection time data Is stored on the P platform side.

  Also, each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted on the CU side and P side, the sequence number (SQN) is added and updated by one each, and the sequence number is stored on the CU side and the P side. Ru. This SQN is a communication number for checking whether the number is updated and communication is properly performed every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and P units. The SQN is the last updated number of the updated communication number.

  A specific aspect of backup of SQN in CU and P in this embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the P units in the operation instruction, and then, upon receiving the SQN from the P units, rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup into the received SQN. Then, when transmitting the next operation instruction, SQN stored in the backup storage is updated by 1 and transmitted to P units, and the transmitted SQN is backed up and stored. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the P unit, the SQN received from the CU is backed up by the operation instruction, and next, when the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 addition and transmitted Backup and store sent SQN. Then, when the next operation response is received, the backup SQN is rewritten to the received SQN and stored. Such processing is repeated on the P unit.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 50 to 58, which will be described later, when communication disconnection occurs in the middle of communication, SQN is backed up until communication reconnection, but on P side, communication disconnection occurs. Since the operation response is always sent regardless of the occurrence time of (see Figure 41, Figure 50-Figure 58), the SQN that has been backed up until communication reconnection is always sent the last SQN It has become. On the other hand, the CU side transmits the operation instruction or receives the operation instruction according to the time of occurrence of communication disconnection (see FIG. 41, FIG. 50 to FIG. 58). The SQN which has been stored for an interval is either the one transmitted last or the one received last.

  For example, the CU side transmits a certain operation instruction to the P side, and transmits the sequence number n at that time, and the P side stores the transmitted sequence number n. Then, when an operation response is returned from the P base side to the CU side, the one (n + 1) obtained by adding 1 to the stored sequence number n is also transmitted. On the CU side, it is judged that data communication has been normally performed because 1 is added to the already-stored sequence number n + 1, and the sequence number is incremented by one when the operation instruction is sent next time. Then, the n + 2 sequence number is sent to the P base.

  Next, the ball related information (ball related information being counted) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. The current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM. Specifically, when a pachinko ball thrown into the game area 27 wins and the added ball number information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, the added ball number counter is counted by the added ball number counter. The counting is performed, and the value of the addition ball number counter (number of addition balls) is transmitted from the P-unit side to the CU side. Further, if a pachinko ball is shot into the game area 27 and the shot ball is detected by the shot ball detection switch, the subtraction ball number counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the detection signal, and subtraction thereof The value of the ball number counter (subtracted ball number) is transmitted from the P base side to the CU side.

  Furthermore, pachinko balls are won in the starting opening (1) or starting opening (2) and the starting opening (1) winning signal or starting opening (2) winning signal is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 In such a case, the payout control unit 17 counts those winning numbers on the P-unit side with the starting opening 1 winning number counter or the starting opening 2 winning number counter, and transmits the count value from the P side to the CU side. Furthermore, the payout control unit 17 counts the number of gaming balls at the current time with the number of gaming balls counter based on the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls, and the count value of the gaming ball number counter is from P to CU side Send to

  On the P side, the values of the additional ball counter, the subtract ball counter, the starting opening 1 winning number counter, the starting opening 2 winning number counter, and the gaming ball number counter are sent to the CU every time they are transmitted to the CU side After storing (rewriting) as backup data in the ball related information storage area last time, the values of the added ball number counter, the subtracted ball number counter, the starting opening 1 winning number counter and the starting opening 2 winning number counter as current ball related information are 0 clear. In the present embodiment, "clear" has the same meaning as "initialization".

  As a result, in the storage area of the last ball related information (the current ball related information transmitted immediately before), the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting opening 1 wins, which are the current ball related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before And, data of the starting opening 2 winning number is stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each current counter at the time of the next transmission but also the value of each previous counter which was not transmitted when the ball related information is not currently transmitted from the P base to the CU. It is for enabling transmission.

  On the CU side, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), total number of subtracted balls (total number of reduced balls), starting opening (1) total winning number (starting opening (1) Accumulated number of times), starting opening (2) total number of winnings (starting opening (2) accumulated number of times), the number of game balls is stored.

  The total additional balls number and the number of gaming balls are updated based on the value of the additional ball number counter (number of additional balls) transmitted from the P-unit side. In addition, the total number of subtracted balls and the number of gaming balls are updated based on the value of the number-of-subtracted ball counter (number of subtracted balls) transmitted from the P-base side. Furthermore, based on the value of the starting opening 1 winning number counter transmitted from P units, the starting opening (1) total winning number is updated and the value of the starting opening 2 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit side Based on the starting opening (2) to update the total number of winning. As described above, the CU can manage the latest number of game balls by updating the number of game balls according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from the P-unit. Similarly, the CU updates the total additional number of balls, the total number of subtractive balls, the starting opening (1), (2) the total number of winnings according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from P units. It becomes possible to manage information.

  In addition, the breakdown of the "number of added balls" is the game ball obtained number information and the back ball added information. A back ball is a foul ball. In addition, "subtractive ball number" is also referred to as gaming ball firing number information.

  In addition to the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, the CU receives the count value of the gaming ball number counter (also referred to as the number of gaming balls or the total number of gaming balls) in addition to the values of the addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number counter. The number of game balls stored by itself is updated based on the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, and the count value of the game ball number counter sent from the P base is not used. For this reason, even if the number of game balls sent from the P-unit side does not match the number of game balls managed by the CU side, the game in which the number of game balls on the CU side has been sent from the P-unit side It will not be updated with the number of balls.

  Furthermore, the CU collates the value of the gaming ball number counter transmitted from the P-unit side with the current gaming ball number updated on the CU side, and determines the consistency as to whether or not they match.

  The CU sends normal (normal) operation request (command) and normal (normal) operation response with P units on condition that determination (match confirmation) is made to match (match). Continue receiving the response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to an error state, the CU performs recovery processing and transmits a command of communication start request to P units, and the number of game balls of P units is calculated according to data of bit 1 of data correction request included in the command The game ball total number information is corrected to the number of game balls after correction (game ball total number information) on the CU side. In addition, although it correct | amends to the number of game balls managed by CU side as a process to correct | amend, it replaces with it and the number of game balls managed by CU side and the game memorized by P stand side It may be corrected to an average value with the number of balls.

  Further, instead of such correction processing, for example, an error notification is performed by the display unit 312, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management The error notification may be performed by the computer 1), and a predetermined notification may be performed to urge an artificial response by a person in charge.

  As described above, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the P-unit side, and calculates and manages the number of gaming balls at the current time based on the value of the addition / subtraction ball number counter. It has a main management function. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function on the P unit. By that amount, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the side of P for the purpose of prohibiting the game immediately when the number of game balls reaches zero. However, the game ball number counter for storing the number of game balls may not be provided on the P platform side.

  The CU performs a game ball number match determination process of checking whether the calculated game ball number at the current point in time and the value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P base side match or not. And a function to perform control to shift to an error state when there is no match (error control at the time of mismatch).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the number of gaming balls is stored also on the P side, it is determined whether the number of gaming balls matches the number of gaming balls managed and stored on the CU side. It is possible to do it (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of gaming balls stored on the gaming machine side does not match the number of gaming balls managed and stored on the CU side due to improper behavior or other circumstances, that effect can be checked. Although the determination function is provided on the CU side here, for example, the number of game balls stored on the CU side and the game stored on the P base side are stored by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. The number of balls may be received and it may be determined whether or not both match.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the CU further includes a storage area for storing balls (pooled balls) and a storage area for storing the card balance of the accepted (inserted) card. The main control unit 323 of the CU (see FIG. 4) responds to an input requesting use of balls (for example, pressing input of a replay button (also referred to as replay button) 319 provided on the CU). A predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area to be stored. In addition, the main control unit 323 of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to use for a game by debiting the value from the gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls held, or the number of balls stored) owned by the player, The number of requested addition balls for adding the number to the gaming ball number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the P base side. In response to that, on the P side, the game ball counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation is performed to order a so-called wagon service or the like in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink etc., the number of balls requested for subtraction of gaming value owned by the player is CU side Transmitted to the P platform side. On the P side, in response to that, the game ball counter is decremented and updated.

  FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control mode of storing game history data on each of the CU side and the P base side. The game history data is data indicating the history of the gaming state generated by the player playing a game with the P platform 2. For example, the number of times of start which is the number of times of variable display of the variable display device (variable The number of start of fluctuation of the display device), the number of occurrences of the big hit, the number of starts from the previous big hit to the present big hit, the value of the base, and the like. The game history data includes game history data throughout the day in the P units and game history data collected for each player in the P units. Then, although the details will be described later, the former game history data is stored in the corresponding P game history data storage unit provided on both the P side and the CU side, and the latter game history data is stored on the P side and the CU side Are stored in the current player game history data storage section provided on both sides or the backup storage section provided only on the P-unit side. That is, game history data throughout the day in the P units and game history data collected for each player in the P units are stored in both the CU 3 and the P unit 2.

  Referring to FIG. 3, various types of game data such as a big hit and start (variation start of variable display device) are generated by the player playing a game with P platform 2 and the game data is input to game history data management portion 291 Be done. For example, normal game data generated as a result of the player playing a game on P units is counted by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17 and the collected game history The data is input to a display effect control unit 292 provided on a display effect control board (not shown), and the game history data is accumulated and stored in the P game history data storage unit. The current P game history data storage unit can store 10 days of game history data including today's game history data. When the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 to select and operate the game history data of the day to be displayed, the game history data of the selected day is displayed by the display 54. The communication between the display effect control unit 292 and the game history data management unit 291 is one-way communication from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292.

  On the other hand, the aforementioned game data input to the game history data management unit 291 is also transmitted to, for example, the game history data management unit 391 provided in the main control unit 323 via the CU communication control unit 80 of CU3. The game data is summarized by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. The counted game history data is stored in the corresponding P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. The unit P game history data storage unit on the CU 3 side is configured to be able to store only the game history data of the day. Then, when the player performs touch operation on the display 312 configured by the touch panel to display the P game history data, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data is recorded. Under the control of the management unit 391, the game history data of the day stored in the current P game history data storage unit is displayed by the display 312.

  On the other hand, CU3 is configured to be able to display game history data of the other P units 2 installed in the game arcade by means of the display 312. Specifically, when the player touches the operation button icon of the other P unit information display displayed on the display unit 312, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the other P unit information is displayed. Due to the operation of the processing unit, the other game history data request request is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the hall management computer 1. The hall management computer 1 receives the game history data of the other P's 2 via the other CU 3 and returns the received other P's game history data to the game history data management unit 391. The game history data management unit 391 processes the other P unit game history data sent back by the other P unit information processing unit and the processed other P unit game history data is processed by the data storage unit 392 other P unit game It is stored in the history data storage unit. Then, the stored other P game history data is displayed by the display 312.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to totalize the game history data for each player who has played a game in the P-unit 2 and to display the game history data for each player by the display 54, 312. In order to count the game history data for each player, it is necessary to distinguish the player who is playing a game on the P platform 2. As player identification information for identifying the player, C-ID (card ID) stored in a member card owned by a player who is a member is used. The C-ID is an ID that is stored in the card and identifies the cards. The member card is issued to the player who has become a member in the game arcade, and the member and the member card have a one-to-one correspondence relationship. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card can identify not only the member card but also the member player. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card functions as player identification information for identifying the player.

  As will be described in detail later, when a player who is a member inserts a member card into the CU3, the C-ID stored in the inserted member card is read and the C-ID is stored in the data storage unit 392. It is stored in the player game history data storage unit. On the other hand, the read C-ID is transmitted from the CU3 to the P platform 2. In the P platform 2, the received C-ID is transmitted from the game history data management section 291 to the effect control section 292 for display, and the effect for display The current player gaming history data storage unit of the control unit 292 is stored.

  In this state, the game history data from when the C-ID is stored in the current player game history data storage unit by the player playing a game with the P platform 2 is the current player of the effect control unit 292 for display It is accumulated and stored in the game history data storage unit. Then, when the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 described above to display his / her game history data, the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed as an indicator. 54 is displayed. Also in the game history data management unit 391, the normal mode processing unit tabulates the game history data based on the game data transmitted from the P-base 2, and the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 is The gaming history data accumulated by the normal mode processing unit from the stage when A is stored as the ID is accumulated and stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit. Then, when the player performs an operation to display his / her game history data by touching the display 312 which is a touch panel, the operation detection signal is inputted to the game history data management unit 391 and the game history data management unit 391 Controls the display 312 to display the gaming history a stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392.

  As described above, the game history data throughout the day in the P units and the game history data collected for each player in the P units are displayed and switched on both the P unit side and the CU side. One game history data and the other game history data are switched and displayed.

  By pressing the return button 322 in order to return the membership card inserted by the player playing a game by the P-table 2, the membership card is discharged from the CU3. Then, the game history data management unit 391 erases the C-ID and the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. As a result, even if an operation for displaying the gaming history a stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit is performed by operating the display 312, the gaming history a is not displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, when the membership card is ejected from the CU3, the CU sends a card return notification to the P platform 2 and the gaming history data management unit 291 that has received the card return notification returns the card to the effect controller for display unit 292 Send a notification Receiving that, the indicator effect control unit 292 stores the A as the C-ID stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit and the gaming history data a in the backup data storage unit, and the current player game The C-ID of the history data storage unit and the game history data are erased. As a result, even if an operation to display the game history data a on the display 54 is performed, the game history data a is not displayed on the display 54.

  The return button 322 is normally operated when ending the game by the P unit 2, but the player temporarily interrupts the game and completes the small use, and returns to the P unit 2 where the game is being played again, and the game is performed. May resume. In such a case, the player usually discharges the card after carrying out the game interruption operation described later, brings the card, and the player completes the small use, and returns to the same P-unit 2 again and transfers the card to CU3. Although the player inserts the card, the player may press the return button 322 to remove the card and leave the P platform 2 without performing the game interruption operation.

  In such a case, if the same player who has left the seat without playing a game in the P platform 2 returns to the P platform 2 and inserts the member card into the CU 3 again, the player leaves the seat. It is desirable to take over the game history data of the previous player and add, update and accumulate the game history data after game restart to the game history data. In order to realize that, the C-ID and the game history data are backed up and stored in the backup data storage unit provided in the display effect control unit 292 described above. Then, when the player returned to P platform 2 inserts the membership card into CU3, the card information of the membership card is read, and the inserted card information including the C-ID of the membership card is transferred from CU3 to P platform 2 Will be sent. In the P platform 2, the C-ID contained in the inserted card information is received by the gaming history data management unit 291, and the received C-ID is transmitted to the effect controller for display unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 collates the transmitted C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit, and determines whether or not they match. If the two match, it is determined that the same player as the player who left the seat has resumed the game again, and A as the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and a as the game history data are currently played It is returned to the player game history data storage unit and stored in the current player game history data storage unit. Then, the storage data of the backup data storage unit is deleted. A game history data generated thereafter by the player playing a game with P platform 2 in a state where the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is stored in the current player game history data storage unit and taken over. Are added to and updated and stored with respect to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the comparison result of the C-ID contained in the inserted card information sent from CU3 and the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit does not match, the backup data A as C-ID stored in the storage unit and a as gaming history data are erased.

  As a modification, the following control may be performed after communication between the game history data management unit 291 and the effect control unit for display unit 292 is bi-directional communication.

  As a result of comparing the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit by the display effect control unit 292 with the C-ID transmitted from the CU 3, it is determined whether the two match or not the display control unit 292, transmitted to the gaming history data management unit 391 of CU3 via the gaming history data management unit 291. In the game history data management unit 391, in the case of the determination result indicating that the transmitted C-ID determination result matches, the C-ID determined to match the current player gaming history of the data storage unit 392 It is stored in the data storage unit. Further, in the case of the determination result that the C-ID determination result matches, the game history data a is also included in the C-ID determination result. The game history data management unit 391 that has received the game history data a stores the game history data a in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. After that, if the player plays a game with the P platform 2, the game data is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391, and is counted by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391 and the game history data collected. Are added to and updated and stored in the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit. In this state, if the player performs an operation to touch the display 312 to display his game history data, the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed as described above. Displayed by the display 312.

  The backup data storage unit of the effect control unit for display 292 may control to delete the stored backup data when a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a test hitting mode (test mode) processing function is provided. This test mode is a mode for carrying out shipping inspection at the time of manufacture of a gaming machine at a gaming machine manufacturer, operation check at the time of installation of the gaming machine in the game arcade, ball number display such as safe / out, base confirmation at nail adjustment, etc. . When the staff at the game arcade performs an operation to shift to an example non-operating mode trial run mode to the CU 3 by remote control, the trial run mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391 performs processing for shifting to the trial run mode. Specifically, the game mode data management unit 291 transmits the trial run mode notification to the P-unit 2 and receives the trial run mode notification, and transmits the trial run mode notification to the effect controller for display unit 292 by the function of the trial run mode processing unit. . In the display effect control unit 292 that has received it, game history data based on the game data generated thereafter is stored in the trial game history data storage unit. The trial game history data storage unit is constituted by a storage area different from the above-mentioned player table game history data storage unit, the current player game history data storage unit, and the backup data storage unit, and this trial game history data storage unit The game history data in the trial hitting mode is stored in the unit.

  Then, the game history data stored in the trial game history data storage unit is displayed by the display 54.

  In CU3 as well, by the function of the trial run mode processing unit of the gaming history data management unit 391, control is performed to cause the display 312 to display P gaming history data transmitted from the P platform 2 as gaming history data in trial running mode. Be The game history data based on the game data is aggregated, and the aggregated game history data is displayed by the display 312 as the game history data in the trial hitting mode.

  In this trial mode, the number of added balls and subtracted balls as current ball related information, the number of added and reduced balls as previous ball related information, and the number of game balls are transmitted from P 2 to CU 3 In CU3, the total number of additional balls, the total number of subtractive balls, and the number of gaming balls described in FIG. 2 are not updated. Then, when managing the addition / subtraction of the number of gaming balls on the side of the P during the trial hitting mode, the following control is performed.

  The P unit 2 having received the trial hitting mode notification from the CU 3 normally saves the number of game balls shown in FIG. 2 stored in the normal mode in which the player is playing a game in the trial hitting mode memory area, Clear the number of game balls in mode. Then, the number of game balls in the trial hitting mode is stored in the memory area in the cleared normal mode and added / subtracted. When the release operation of the trial run mode is performed by the remote control and the normal mode return notification is transmitted from the CU3, the P-base 2 clears the number of game balls added / subtracted during the trial run mode, and then the above-mentioned trial run mode. The number of game balls evacuated to the storage area is returned to the memory area for the number of game balls in the normal mode, and the returned number of game balls is taken over to resume the game by the player. When the game by the player is resumed, as described based on FIG. 2, the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls as current ball related information, the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls as previous ball related information, The number of gaming balls is transmitted from the P platform 2 to CU3. In CU3, the updating of the number of new balls is resumed from the total number of additional balls immediately before the trial hitting mode, the total number of subtracted balls, and the number of gaming balls.

  As another control method, even in the trial hitting mode, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls and the number of gaming balls as the current ball related information, and the number of added balls and the reduced balls as the last ball related information May be transmitted to CU3. In that case, the P-table 2 which has received the trial hitting mode notification from the CU 3 adds the number of added balls as current ball related information shown in FIG. 2 stored in the normal mode in which the player is playing a game, the number of subtracted balls After the number of game balls, the number of added balls as ball-related information and the number of subtracted balls are evacuated to the trial hitting mode memory area, the ball number information in the normal mode is cleared. Then, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls and the number of gaming balls in the trial hitting mode, and the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls as the ball related information in the previous time are stored in the memory area in the cleared normal mode. . In CU3, after shifting the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls, and the number of gaming balls to the trial hitting mode memory area at the transition to the trial hitting mode, the ball number information in the normal mode is cleared. Then, based on the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls and the number of gaming balls as the current ball related information in the trial hitting mode transmitted from the P stand 2 and the number of added balls and the reduced balls as the last ball related information. The total number of additional balls, the total number of subtractive balls, and the number of game balls in the trial run mode are calculated and stored. On the other hand, at the end of the trial hitting mode, on the P-unit, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls and the number of gaming balls as current ball related information added / subtracted in the test hitting mode, the number of added balls as the previous ball related information And the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls and the number of game balls as current ball related information saved in the above-mentioned trial run mode memory area, and the number of added balls and subtraction as the previous ball related information. The number of balls is returned to the memory area for the number of gaming balls in the normal mode, and the returned number-of-balls information is taken over to resume the game by the player. Furthermore, in CU3 as well, at the end of the trial run mode, the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls, and the number of game balls in the trial run mode are cleared, and then the trial run is saved in the above trial run mode memory area. At the time of mode transition, the total additional number of balls, the total number of subtractive balls, and the number of gaming balls are returned to the storage area of the number of gaming balls in the normal mode, and the recovered ball number information is taken over and the game is resumed.

  In the case of transmitting the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls and the number of gaming balls as the current ball related information, and the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls as the last ball related information from P2 to CU3 also in the trial hitting mode As still another example of the above, the operation command for correcting the ball number information may be transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2 when the mode is changed. Specifically, the CU 3 transmits, to the P-base 2, an operation command for clearing the ball number information together with the trial hitting mode notification. P station 2 which received it after transmitting the number of added balls as current ball related information, the number of subtracted balls and the number of game balls, and the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls as the last ball related information to CU3, Clear the ball number information. CU3 is the total number of added balls on the basis of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls and the number of game balls as current ball related information transmitted from P platform 2 and the number of added balls and reduced balls as the last ball related information. After calculating the total subtraction ball number and the game ball number and evacuating the ball number information in the trial hitting mode memory area, the ball number information in the normal mode is cleared. Then, based on the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls and the number of gaming balls as the current ball related information in the trial hitting mode transmitted from the P stand 2 and the number of added balls and the reduced balls as the last ball related information. The total number of additional balls, the total number of subtractive balls, and the number of game balls in the trial run mode are calculated and stored. On the other hand, at the end of the trial run mode, CU3 clears the total number of added balls in the trial mode, the total number of subtracted balls, and the number of gaming balls and the total number of added balls saved in the memory area for trial mode time, total subtraction The number of balls and the number of game balls are returned to the storage area in the normal mode. Then, the CU 3 transmits an operation command for clearing the ball number information to the P-base 2 together with the notification of the number of returned game balls and the notification of the return to the normal mode. The P stand 2 which received it clears the number of addition balls, the number of subtraction balls and the number of game balls as the current ball related information calculated in the trial hitting mode, and the number of addition balls and the number of subtraction balls as the last ball related information. At the same time, the number of received game balls is stored, and the number of game balls is taken over to resume the game.

  As described above, when managing the addition / subtraction of the number of gaming balls on the side of the P during the trial run mode, the control of displaying the number of gaming balls added / subtracted during the trial run mode on the display 54 of the P platform 2 is performed. . Further, even in the trial hitting mode, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls and the number of game balls as current ball related information, and the number of added balls and the reduced balls as previous ball related information are transmitted from P 2 to CU3. If it is set, control may be performed to display the number of game balls also on the display unit 312 of CU3.

  In addition, when returning from the trial hitting mode to the normal mode, the setting information (high probability state or the like) on the side of the P base 2 that affects the balls may not be saved. That is, when the high probability state or the like is entered during the trial hitting mode and the test hitting mode is ended in that state, the normal mode may be started with the high probability state or the like.

  The display 312 also displays an operation button icon such as a retabulation button, and the nailer who has seen the game history data in the trial display mode displayed on the tabulation adjusts the nail based on it, and then the game in the trial mode is performed again. You may want to aggregate historical data and view it to see the results of nail adjustments. In such a case, the icon of the retabulation button is touch-operated. Then, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data management unit 391 transmits a recount notification to the game history data management unit 291 of the P-base 2. Having received it, the game history data management unit 291 transmits a recounting instruction to the display effect control unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 receives it, temporarily erases the game history data stored in the trial game history data storage unit, and stores the game data based on the game data generated thereafter from the trial game history data storage again Control to be stored in the unit is performed. Then, the game data of the trial hit game history data storage unit, which has been tabulated again, is displayed by the display 54. On the other hand, also on the CU 3 side, based on the game data transmitted from the P-unit 2 after the detection signal of the touch operation of the icon of the recount button is input to the game history data management unit 391, the trial hitting mode processing unit The display unit 312 displays the trial hit mode game history data in which the data is aggregated and re-aggregated.

  Then, when the remote control is operated to release the trial run mode, a notification to release the trial run mode is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the P-base 2, and the game history data management unit 291 that received the notification The notification is sent to the effect controller for display unit 292, and the effect controller for display device 292 that has received the notification erases the game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit.

  When the game ball runs out in the trial hitting mode, the game ball addition command is sent from the CU side to the P-unit to perform the addition of the game ball to enable the game. It should be noted that, when the game ball runs out in the trial hitting mode, the game ball side may automatically add the game ball without sending the game ball addition command from the CU side to the P base to enable the game. Furthermore, instead of automatically adding the game balls on the side of the gaming machine, control may be performed so that the game can be continued even if the game balls become zero.

  Similarly, in the case of the slot machine 2S described later, when the number of points is lost in the trial hitting mode, the CU side sends a holding point addition command to the S-unit to perform addition of the number of points, thereby enabling the game.

  A RAM clear switch 293 is provided in the P-unit 2. The RAM clear switch 293 is operated to perform a switch operation to output a signal of RAM clear to the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 described above to clear stored data of the RAM. When the RAM clear output signal is input to the gaming history data management unit 291, the RAM clear signal is input to the display effect control unit 292, and the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 is While being erased, the oldest stored data among the stored data for 10 days of the P game history data storage unit is erased, and the remaining 9 days of stored data is shifted to the storage area of the older day one by one. It is memorized. As a result, the newest storage area (storage area on the current day) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this vacant area (storage area on the day). In addition, according to the output of the RAM clear signal, the game history data (game history data before shifting to the old day) of the latest day of the P game history data storage unit is the indicator effect control unit 292, the game history The data may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1 via the data management unit 291 and the game history data management unit 391, and the hall management computer 1 may control such data to be backed up.

  Also, the game history data management unit 291 that has received the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 293 transmits a clear notification to the CU 3, and the game history data management unit 391 that has received the clear notification Control is performed to delete the game history data stored in the game history data storage unit. As a result, the display of the current P game history data by the display unit 312 is erased (cleared).

  It should be noted that, while holding the card inserted in the CU3, even if the RAM clear signal is output from the RAM clear switch 293, the game history data clear process is not performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality as a result of mutual authentication is detected.

  Referring to FIG. 4, when an abnormality occurs in main control unit 323, CU communication control unit 80, P-unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 17, or main control board 16, it is indicated by an arrow in FIG. 4. Notification is made. The abnormality referred to here is to replace the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80, the P unit communication control unit 81, the payout control unit 17, or the main control board 16 with another improperly manufactured one or noise etc. This includes the case of malfunction or failure, or an off-line state due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 illustrated in FIG. 4 is a key management server that stores the SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key in association with each SID of the main control unit. The key management server 803 is a key management server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3, as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 described above, the main control unit 323 has an abnormality. Detect In this mutual authentication, in addition to the above-described serial ID authentication and device authentication, device authentication using a session key described later (see FIG. 6) is also included.

  The serial ID (also referred to as SID) includes the serial ID of the main control unit 323 (also referred to as BB serial ID) and the serial ID of the CU communication control unit 80, and at the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM of the CU communication control unit 80, The SID 80 (unique ID) of the CU communication control unit is stored. In addition, at the manufacturing stage of CU3, the serial ID of the main control unit is written in the EEPROM 808 by the ROM writer or the like. The serial ID authentication includes BB serial ID authentication and CU communication control unit serial ID authentication, which will be described later.

  When the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 to that effect, and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3. In addition to causing the display control unit 797 to perform control to display the occurrence of an abnormality on the display unit 312, the abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinks to perform abnormality notification. Further, the main control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer 1.

  Further, the occurrence of an abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is also detected by the P-unit communication control unit 81. When the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of an abnormality, the fact is notified to the payout control unit 17, and the payout control unit 17 further notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. In response to the abnormality occurrence signal, the main control board 16 outputs a signal to light or blink the abnormality notification lamp provided on the membrane plate or the like, and a signal to the effect that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1 Send

  When an abnormality occurs by the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the CU communication control unit 80 detects the occurrence of an abnormality by the mutual authentication described above, and a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that is detected by the P communication control unit. Notify 81 In response to that, the P communication control unit 81 notifies the payout control unit 17 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the payout control unit 17 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and sends a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the P communication control unit 81, the main control unit 323 notifies that effect to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 notifies that to the upper server 801.

  As described above, when the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the main control unit 323 and notifies the P unit communication control unit 81 to that effect, the CU communication control unit 80 detects that there is an abnormality in the P unit communication control unit 81. Is notified to the main control unit 323, and notification destinations of occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 are different from each other. The reason is that even if the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred is notified that the abnormality has occurred, control for notifying an abnormality is not performed at all, and no countermeasure against the abnormality is taken. Moreover, although the CU communication control unit 80 has a communication control function, it does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, it is not possible to control the abnormality notification by itself, and therefore, it is always notified that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The P communication control unit 81 notified of the occurrence of the abnormality from the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 notifies the main control board 16 that the abnormality has occurred. To notify. In response to the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for reporting an abnormality as described above.

  If an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80 detects that an abnormality has occurred, and the main control unit 323 is notified that an abnormality has occurred, and the main control unit 323 reports the abnormality described above. It performs control and notifies the upper server 801 that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81 and no abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17, the payout control unit 17 detects that the abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality is mainly generated. The control board 16 is notified. In response to the notification, the main control board 16 performs control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 detects the abnormality and performs control for notifying the abnormality occurrence described above. When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17 and no abnormality occurs in the P communication control unit 81, the P communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of the abnormality, and CU communication indicates that the abnormality has occurred. The control unit 80 is notified. In response to the notification, CU communication control unit 80 notifies main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. Upon receiving the notification, the main control unit 323 performs the control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality as described above, and notifies the upper server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in both of the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and the CU communication control unit 80 also detects that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 detects the abnormality and notifies the P-unit communication control unit 81 that the abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the P communication control unit 81 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 that the abnormality has occurred, and upon receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 that the abnormality has occurred. . In response to that, the main control unit 323 performs control of the above-mentioned abnormality occurrence notification, and notifies the upper server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80, the LSI 799 detects it and notifies it to the main control board 16, while it detects it when the abnormality occurs in the main control board 16. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. As with the above-described CU communication control unit 80, even when the LSI 799 detects that an abnormality has occurred, control for notifying an abnormality is not performed even if a notification is given to the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the control unit or control board on the opposite side to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred is notified. Note that the CU communication control unit 80 and the LSIs 799, 999 do not have an abnormality notification unit such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification indicator connected, and have a function to perform abnormality notification control by itself even if an abnormality is detected. Not.

  Although the pachinko machine 2 is shown as an example of the gaming machine in the control of FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 described above, a slot machine 2S described later may be used as an example of the gaming machine.

  FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the structure of a frame used for communication in the gaming machine. In FIG. 5, transmission data (business draft) is always transmitted in units of one frame. Transmission data of one frame includes data length, command code, command size, command data, random number, MAC, and CRC.

  “Data length” indicates the data length of transmission data (command code to MAC). The "command code" is a command code of a business proposal statement. The “command size” is a data size of command data. The "command data" is data of a business proposal sentence. The "random number" is a random number for the padding character for encryption. Padding characters for encryption add encryption padding characters of a specified data length to a message (plaintext) so that the message (plaintext) to be encrypted can be encrypted using a 16-byte data encryption key To match the data length of the encryption key.

  "MAC" is a message authentication code (Message Authentication Code). "CRC" is a CRC-ITU-T system, and is used for error detection of a communication frame.

  Command size, command data, and random numbers are MAC target ranges. The command size, command data, random numbers, and MAC are encryption target ranges. The calculation target range of the CRC is command code to MAC. The data length of each of the data length, command code and command size is 1 byte. The data length of MAC is 16 bytes, and the data length of CRC is 2 bytes. The random number and the MAC are added only at the time of encryption.

  Next, although not shown, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the pachinko machine will be described.

  Data in the transmission direction from CU to P is a command, and data in the transmission direction from P to CU is a response.

  The main control unit 323 transmits a recovery request command to the CU communication control unit 80. This recovery request command is for requesting transmission of recovery information to P units.

  A response of a recovery response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information held by P units to the CU.

  A communication start request is sent from the CU to the P units. At this time, in the communication from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, the encrypted text encrypted using the session key in the second security mode (hereinafter, referred to as the SE2 mode) is transmitted. The SE2 mode is a high security mode in which the count value (key) which is the source of data for exclusive OR (exclusive OR) of plaintext is added and updated. This communication start request is for requesting the P units to clear the recovery information and back up the connection ID (communication start time).

  A communication start response is sent from the P units to the CU. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using a session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. This communication start response is to notify the CU that the recovery information has been cleared and the connection ID (communication start time) has been backed up.

  An operation instruction is sent from the CU to the P unit. At this time, in the communication from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, the encrypted text encrypted using the session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. This operation instruction instructs the P units to perform a game operation, and also requests transmission of gaming machine information such as game balls.

  An operation response is sent from the P units to the CU. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using a session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. This operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the game operation instruction and to notify the game machine information such as the game ball and the like.

  A communication disconnection request is sent from the CU to the P units. At this time, in the communication from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, the encrypted text encrypted using the session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. The communication disconnection request is for requesting the P units to disconnect the communication connection.

  A communication disconnection response is sent from the P units to the CU. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using a session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. The communication disconnection response is to notify the CU that the communication disconnection request command has been received.

  A card insertion request is sent from the CU to the P unit. At this time, in the communication from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, the encrypted text encrypted using the session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. This card insertion request is to notify the ID and the type of the inserted card to P units. Types of cards include general cards and membership cards.

  A card insertion response is sent from the P unit to the CU. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using a session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. The card insertion response is to transmit a response to the card insertion request to the CU. Specifically, OK or NG is transmitted as a processing result of the card insertion request. However, there is no NG response at present.

  The CU sends a card return request to P units. At this time, in the communication from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, the encrypted text encrypted using the session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. This card return request is to transmit a card return request to P units.

  A card return response is sent from the P unit to the CU. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using a session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. This card return response is to send a response to the card return request to the CU. Specifically, OK or NG is transmitted as the processing result of the card return request. However, there is no NG response at present. In addition, the ID and type of the returned card are also transmitted.

  A mode change request is sent from the CU to the P unit. At this time, in the communication from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, the encrypted text encrypted using the session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. This mode change request is for requesting the P units to shift their operation mode. Specifically, the type of operation mode and the detailed contents at the time of mode transition are transmitted. The types of operation mode include a sales mode, a test hitting mode, a maintenance mode, and a test mode. When the mode transition destination is the maintenance mode or the test mode, the details are notified by the transition additional information. Also, the test mode may not be requested from the CU.

  A mode change response is sent from the P units to the CU. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using a session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. The mode change response is to send a response to the mode change request to the CU. Specifically, OK or NG is transmitted as the processing result of the mode change request. If the P unit is already in the designated operation mode, it responds OK as a processing result.

  Also, an outline of commands and responses performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 will be described. Although not shown, the transmission direction is from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, and the data from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 is a response.

  The BB serial ID authentication request 1 requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The BB serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The BB serial ID is the SID of the main control unit 323 described above. This command is not transmitted up to P, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  The second BB serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80.

  The CU communication control unit 80 transmits a second BB serial ID authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323.

  Next, a CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the CU communication control unit serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The CU communication control unit serial ID is the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 described above.

  The CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying the authentication information of the CU communication control unit serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A second CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80.

  The CU communication control unit 80 transmits a second CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323. The CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 2 includes an authentication result of OK or NG. However, NG does not notify. This is to collectively notify NG of a plurality of authentication results later.

  A writer management information request for requesting writer management information is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80.

  A writer management information response for notifying writer management information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. At this time, in the communication from CU communication control unit 80 to main control unit 323, the encrypted text encrypted using the main authentication key (or temporary authentication key) in the first security mode (hereinafter referred to as the SE1 mode) is Will be sent. The SE1 mode is a low security mode encryption method in which encryption is always performed using a fixed key without updating and updating the key. The main authentication key and the temporary authentication key will be described later.

  The writer management information request and the writer management information response will be described based on FIGS. 8 and 9 described later. The data included in the writer management information response is a command code, command size, writer ID (ID of ROM writer), version of authentication key, random number (padding character for encryption), MAC or the like.

  A command (device authentication request 1) for requesting device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The device authentication is for authenticating whether the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response 1) for notifying a device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 using the authentication key in the SE1 mode. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, a ciphertext encrypted using the main authentication key (or temporary authentication key) in the SE1 mode is transmitted. Details of the content of this response will be described later. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  A command (device authentication request 2) for requesting a second device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80 using the authentication key in the SE1 mode. This command contains the authentication result of OK or NG. However, NG does not notify. This is to collectively notify NG of a plurality of authentication results later.

  The CU communication control unit 80 transmits, to the main control unit 323, a response (device authentication response 2) for notifying the second device authentication result. In communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using the main authentication key (or temporary authentication key) in the SE1 mode is transmitted. This response contains the authentication result of OK or NG. However, NG does not notify. This is to collectively notify NG of a plurality of authentication results later.

  The device authentication requests 1 and 2 and the device authentication responses 1 and 2 will be described based on FIGS. 8 and 18 described later.

  The main control unit 323 transmits, to the CU communication control unit 80, counter information notification for notifying counter information. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, a ciphertext encrypted using the main authentication key (or temporary authentication key) in the SE1 mode is transmitted.

  A counter information notification response for notifying a counter information notification result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, a ciphertext encrypted using the main authentication key (or temporary authentication key) in the SE1 mode is transmitted.

  The counter information notification and the counter information notification response will be described based on FIGS. 8 and 9 described later.

  The main control unit 323 transmits, to the CU communication control unit 80, an authentication key update request for requesting an authentication key update using the authentication key in the SE1 mode. At this time, in the communication from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, the encrypted text encrypted using the main authentication key (or the temporary authentication key) in the SE1 mode is transmitted.

  Data included in the authentication key update request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping maker code, a writer ID (ID of a ROM writer), a version of an authentication key, an authentication key, a MAC key that is an H-MAC key, MAC, It contains random numbers (padding characters for encryption).

  The authentication key update response for notifying the authentication key update result is sent from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, a ciphertext encrypted using the main authentication key (or temporary authentication key) in the SE1 mode is transmitted. Data included in the authentication key update response includes a command code, a command size, an update result, a random number (padding character for encryption), and a MAC. The authentication key update request and the authentication key update response will be described based on FIG. 9 described later.

  A command (time notification) for notifying the current time is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using a session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted.

  The CU communication control unit 80 transmits, to the main control unit 323, a response (time response) indicating that the command for time notification has been received. At this time, in the communication from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, the encrypted text encrypted using the session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted.

  A command (P-unit communication control unit authentication request) for requesting authentication with the P-unit communication control unit 81 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81. The main control unit 323 requests the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit 81 by the CU communication control unit 80, which is the result of the mutual authentication. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  The CU communication control unit 80 transmits, to the main control unit 323, a response (P unit communication control unit authentication response) for notifying the authentication result with the P unit communication control unit 81. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using a session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception. The CU communication control unit 80 sends the authentication result to the main control unit 323 after acquiring information such as the chip ID of the main control board 16 and the LSI 799. The authentication results include authentication OK, authentication NG, authentication processing, disconnection detection.

  A device information request for requesting device information is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80.

  A device information response for notifying device information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using a session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. This response includes a command code, a command size, an acquisition result, a chip ID, and a MAC. As acquisition results, there are OK (device information present), NG (device information not present), disconnection processing during acquisition processing, and detection.

  A command (communication state request) for requesting the communication (transmission) state to the CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The communication (transmission) state is a command for requesting whether the communication state between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is normal. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A response (communication state response) for notifying a communication (transmission) state is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using a session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. In this response, the CU communication control unit 80 determines whether the communication state between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is appropriate, and a response in which the determination result is sent back to the main control unit 323. It is. The determination results include OK, NG, disconnection detection, and the like. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  A command (P unit communication control unit reauthentication request) for requesting re-authentication with the P unit communication control unit 81 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81. The main control unit 323 requests the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit 81 by the CU communication control unit 80, which is the result of the mutual authentication. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  The CU communication control unit 80 transmits, to the main control unit 323, a response (P unit communication control unit reauthentication response) for notifying a response to the P unit communication control unit re-authentication request message. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using a session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. The CU communication control unit 80 executes the authentication between the P-unit communication control units 81 again, and the main control unit 323 acquires the authentication result by receiving the P-unit communication control unit 81 re-authentication response. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  The main control unit 323 transmits, to the CU communication control unit 80, a gaming machine authentication result notification notifying the authentication result of the gaming machine using the authentication key in the SE2 mode. This notification includes a command code, a command size, an authentication result of OK or NG, and a MAC.

  The response of the gaming machine authentication result notification message is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 using the authentication key in the SE2 mode. This response includes a command code, a command size, a notification result (OK), and a MAC.

  A CU communication control unit authentication result notification for notifying an authentication result between main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted from main control unit 323 to CU communication control unit 80 using the authentication key in the SE1 mode. Ru. This notification includes a command code, a command size, an authentication result of OK or NG, a random number (padding character for encryption), and a MAC.

  CU communication control unit authentication result response for notifying the authentication result between main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted from CU communication control unit 80 to main control unit 323 using the authentication key in SE1 mode Ru. This response includes a command code, a command size, an authentication result of OK or NG, a random number (padding character for encryption), and a MAC.

  The main control unit 323 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 of the valid key of the CU communication control unit 80 using the authentication key in the SE1 mode. This notification includes a command code, a command size, a valid key, a random number (padding character for encryption), and a MAC.

  The response of the valid key notification of the CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 using the authentication key in the SE1 mode. This response includes a command code, a command size, a notification result of OK or NG, a random number (padding character for encryption), and a MAC.

  A BB serial ID authentication request A for requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The BB serial ID authentication request A will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P, but is exceptional.

  The BB serial ID authentication response A for notifying the authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A BB serial ID authentication request B for requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This command is not transmitted up to P, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response B for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323.

  The BB serial ID authentication requests A and B, and the BB serial ID authentication responses A and B will be described later based on FIG. The device authentication requests A and B and the device authentication responses A and B will be described later based on FIG.

  A command (device authentication request A) for requesting device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The device authentication is for authenticating whether the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response A) for notifying a device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. Details of the content of this response will be described later. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  A command (device authentication request B) for requesting device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The device authentication is for authenticating whether the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is the same key, and will be described in detail later. Note that this command is not sent up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A response (device authentication response B) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. Details of the content of this response will be described later. Note that this response is not sent from P units, and is an exception.

  An authentication key setting request for requesting an authentication key update is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 using the BB serial ID in the SE1 mode. The authentication key setting request is a response for notifying the main control unit 323 of authentication key setting information, and is stored in authentication key information (EEPROM not shown) written from a dedicated IC writer (ROM writer). It is a response that transmits an authentication key) from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. Information included in the authentication key setting request includes command code, command size, shipping maker code, writer ID (ID of ROM writer), version of authentication key, authentication key, MAC key as H-MAC key, for encryption Padding character (random number), MAC. These code information is encrypted and transmitted using the BB serial ID as an encryption key using the block encryption mode of SE1 except for the command code.

  The main control unit 323 transmits, to the CU communication control unit 80, an authentication key setting response notifying an authentication key update result using the BB serial ID in the SE1 mode. The authentication key setting response is a command for notifying the CU communication control unit 80 of the authentication key information setting result. The information included in the authentication key setting response includes a command code, a command size, an update result, an encryption padding character (random number), and a MAC. Except for the command code, the block encryption mode of SE1 is used to encrypt and transmit using the BB serial ID as the encryption key.

  Next, among the commands / responses, the contents of the recovery response, the communication start request, the operation instruction, and the operation response will be described in detail.

  Transmission of recovery information is requested from the CU to the P units. At this time, in the communication from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, the encrypted text encrypted using the session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. A response of the cover response is sent from the P unit to the CU. At this time, in communication from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, an encrypted text encrypted using a session key in the SE2 mode is transmitted. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information (also referred to as recovery data) held in P units to the CU. This “recovery information” is the data of backup storage for the P unit to transmit as a recovery response to the CU when the CU transmits a recovery request command to the P unit with the execution of recovery processing. It is. The recovery information transmitted from the P unit to the CU includes the connection time, the final sequence number, the C-ID, the previous ball related information, and the current ball related information.

  As a key used for this encryption, a session key (also called a message key or a communication key) is used, which will be described later.

  The connection time is the connection time backed up on P units (data of the connection time received from the CU at the start of communication). The final sequence number is the sequence number backed up by P units. C-ID is C-ID which was backed up by P units. The last ball related information is the ball related information notified last time. Specifically, the game ball acquisition number information notified last time, back ball addition information notified last time, game ball launch number information notified last time, symbol decision number 1 notified last time, symbol decision frequency 2 notified last time, notified last time The number of starting openings 1 number, the number 2 of starting openings notified last time, the number 1 of large winning openings notified last time, the number 2 of large winning openings notified last time, the number 1 to 4 times of winning openings notified last time. Thus, although the symbol determination frequency 1 and the symbol determination frequency 2 are divided by Bit, they may be divided by bytes and transmitted.

  The “playing ball acquisition number information” is information on the number of added balls added to the playing balls by winning. The “back ball addition information” is addition information in which a foul ball detected by a foul ball detection switch (not shown) is added to a game ball. The "playing ball launch number information" is information on the number of pachinko balls shot by the launch unit (not shown). The “out ball passing information” is information indicating that the out ball has been detected by the out ball detection switch.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 2 and FIG. 6 to FIG. 59, “playing ball acquisition number information” and “back ball addition information” are collectively referred to as “additional ball number”. In addition, "the game ball firing number information" is expressed as "subtract ball number".

  The "symbol determination number 1" is the symbol determination number 1 notified last time. "The number of times of symbol determination 2" is the number of times of symbol determination 2 notified last time.

  The “starting opening number of times 1” is the number of wins of pachinko balls to the starting opening 1. The “starting opening number of times 2” refers to the number of wins of pachinko balls to the starting opening 2.

  The “one big winning opening” is the opening number (round number) of the big winning opening 1. The “big winning opening 2 times” is the opening number (round number) of the big winning hole 2.

  The "number of winning openings 1 to 4" is the number of winnings of pachinko balls for each winning opening of the winning openings 1 to 4.

  Furthermore, as information on the recovery response transmitted from the P unit to the CU, there is current ball related information as the latest ball related information. The current ball related information is, specifically, the game ball total number information (also referred to as the number of game balls) currently held in P, the game ball acquired number information currently held in P, currently P Back ball addition information held, gaming ball firing number information currently held in P units, symbol decision number 1 currently held in P units, symbol decision number 2 currently held in P units, present One start opening held by P units, 2 start openings currently held by P units, 1 number of large winning openings currently held by P units, Large winning opening currently held by P units Two times, it is a winning opening 1 to 4 times currently held in P units.

  Information other than the ball-related information at the previous time is data to be backed up in P units, and is set to ALL 0 at the time of factory shipment and when the backup data is indeterminate.

  The meaning of the number of balls and the content of the final points will be described in detail later, but will be briefly described below.

  The game ball total number information is the number of game balls held by P units. In addition, the CU checks whether the number of gaming balls in P units matches the number of gaming balls after correction in CU, and in the case of incoincidence, the CU transmits a command of communication disconnection request to the P units. While the communication is disconnected, the game of P units is stopped (see FIG. 41 etc.). Then, the CU executes recovery processing, and transmits a communication start request to the P units (see FIG. 21), thereby changing the game ball correction request to the P units according to the data correction request included in the command of the communication start request. A process of transmitting and correcting P game balls to the number of game balls after correction on the CU side is performed.

  The symbol determination frequency 1 and the symbol determination frequency 2 refer to the symbol determination information for the winning of pachinko balls to the starting opening 1 and the starting opening 2, respectively. Use

  The number of times of starting opening 1 and the number of starting openings 2 are the number of winning of pachinko balls to starting openings 1 and 2 of P units, and the CU uses this data to check the operating status of the game console.

  The number of large winning a prize opening and the number of large winning a prize opening 2 times are the number (number) of winning of pachinko balls to P large winning opening 1 and large winning opening 2, CU is the operation of the game stand (P) Use this data to check the status.

  The number of winning openings 1 to 4 is the number of winnings (numbers) of pachinko balls to regular winning openings 1 to 4 of P, and CU uses this data to check the operating status of the game console Do.

  The command of the communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P units requests the P units to correct the game ball and the sequence number and back up the new communication ID (communication start time). This command is encrypted and transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80 using the session key in the SE2 mode.

  Specific data of the communication start request include connection time, data correction request, sequence number, and game ball data. The connection time is a time when communication between the CU and the P units is started, which is held by the CU and transmitted from the CU to the P units. And this connection time is used as a connection ID of communication.

  In the data correction request, the CU requests the P units to correct the data, and is configured by 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7. Bit 0 is a bit for specifying the presence or absence of a clear request. When the bit is "0", no clear request is specified, and when "1", the clear request is specified. When there is a clear request, a request to clear the backup data held by the P-unit such as "game ball", "sequence number", "number of added balls", "number of subtracted balls" etc. to 0 is made to the P-unit.

  Bit 1 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a request for correction of the sequence number. In the case of "0", no request for correction of the sequence number is specified, and in the case of "1", the request for correction for the sequence number is specified.

  Bit 2 is a bit for specifying the presence or absence of the game ball correction request. When "0", the game ball correction request is present, and when it is "1", no game ball correction request is specified.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 6 and the following figures, when a bit designating the presence or absence of a request is “0”, it is expressed as “no request”, and when it is “1”, it is expressed as “request exists”. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request present”, and when it is “0”, it is expressed as “clear request no”. In addition, as shown in parenthesis in the data correction request column, "Clear request" is "Recovery clear", "Sequence number correction request" is "SQN correction", "Game ball correction request" is "Game ball correction" It is expressed as ".

  The sequence number (also referred to as SQN) is the sequence number stored in the CU. The game ball is the number of game balls stored in the CU.

  The CU backs up the connection time and backs up the “main chip ID” and the “payout chip ID” when transmitting the command for the communication start request.

  When P receives this communication start request, it performs the following processing. In the case of the clear request ON, the backup data held on the P-unit side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of reduced balls” etc. is cleared to 0.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the sequence number held by the P unit is overwritten on the notified sequence number.

  In the case of the game ball correction request ON, the game ball held in P is overwritten on the notified game ball.

  Backup connection time. In addition, each process performed by said P base is performed in an order from the top.

  The command of the operation instruction transmitted from the CU to the P units is the "addition of game balls", "subtraction of game balls", "game permission / prohibition", and "clearing the game balls and sequence number" operation to the P units And request transmission of various types of game table information. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of P units. This command is encrypted and transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80 using the session key in the SE2 mode.

  As the operation request, 8-bit data of Bit 0 to Bit 7 are transmitted from the CU to the P units. For Bit 0, when "1", the game ball count addition request is instructed, and when "0", the game ball count addition request no is instructed. For Bit 1, when “1”, the game ball subtraction request is instructed, and when “0”, the game ball subtraction request is instructed. With regard to Bit 2, when “1” is set, a game permission request is instructed, and when “0”, a game permission request is instructed.

  For Bit 3, when “1” is set, a game prohibition request is instructed, and when “0”, no game prohibition request is instructed. For Bit 4, when “1” is set, a request for clearing the number of game balls and the sequence number is given, and when “0”, no request for clearing the number of game balls and the sequence number is given.

  Bit 5 is used for a glass door open request, and Bit 6 is used for a cell (front frame) open request. Bit 7 is a spare.

  It should be noted that "game ball number addition request" is simply referred to as "addition", "game ball number subtraction request" is simply referred to as "subtraction", and "game prohibition request" is also simply referred to as "prohibition request". And the clear request of the sequence number is simply referred to as the "clear request", and the "glass door open request" is also referred to as the "glass open request".

  When a plurality of bits among Bit0 to Bit7 are "1", P units are sequentially executed from Bit0.

  The state of the CU corresponding to each bit of the operation request is that the card is being held when Bit 0 is “1”, the card insertion process is in progress when Bit 1 is “1”, and Bit 2 is “1” Sometimes, addition display is in progress, subtraction display is in progress when Bit 3 is “1”, clear display is in progress when Bit 4 is “1”, and trial run mode is in progress when Bit 5 is “1”.

  The CU state is configured by 6 bits of Bit0 to Bit5, but may be configured by 16 bits of Bit0 to Bit15, and the following information may be transmitted by each bit.

  When Bit 0 is “1”, a card insertion processing indication is instructed. This indicates a state from when the card is inserted into the CU until the balance is determined (inquiring state to upper device).

  When Bit 1 is "1", a card return processing in-progress display is instructed. This shows the state from when the card return button is pressed until the card is returned.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, a display is made during deposit processing. This indicates the state from when cash is inserted into CU until it is confirmed.

  When Bit 3 is “1”, addition display (card insertion) is transmitted. This shows a state in which the game ball addition (card insertion) is expressed after the card is inserted into the CU.

  When Bit 4 is “1”, addition display (prepaid lending) is transmitted. This indicates that CU represents the game ball addition (prepaid lending).

  When Bit 5 is “1”, addition display (replay payout) is transmitted. This indicates that CU represents the game ball addition (replay payout).

  When Bit 6 is “1”, the subtractive display (with ball division) is transmitted. This indicates a state in which the game ball addition (ball division) is expressed by CU.

  When Bit 7 is “1”, subtraction display (wagon service) is transmitted. This indicates that CU represents the game ball addition (wagon service).

  When Bit 8 is "1", clear display is transmitted. This indicates a state in which the CU represents clear after a request for clearing the gaming ball and the sequence number.

  When Bit 9 is "1", a break display is transmitted. This indicates a state in which a break is expressed in CU.

Bits 15 to 10 are unused.
Further, data of the number of addition request balls, which becomes effective only when the operation request Bit 0 is “1”, is transmitted from the CU to the P unit. The data of the number of requested addition balls is a value to be added to the number of game balls.

  The data of the subtraction request ball number that is valid only when the operation request Bit 1 is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the P unit. The data of the subtraction required ball number indicates a value to be subtracted from the gaming ball number.

  Also, data of card balance indicating the balance of the card inserted in the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P unit. In addition, C-ID transmitted from the CU to the P units has the following data set according to the state. When no card is inserted, "ALL 00h" is set. While holding the card, the C-ID of the card is set. "ALLFFh" is set during the trial run mode.

  It should be noted that the holding of this card may be data in which both can be distinguished depending on whether the card inserted in the CU is a membership card or a visitor card. For example, "holding card" is configured by 2 bits, 1 bit is held while holding a membership card, and 2 bits are held "1" while holding a visitor card. Furthermore, in the case of a visitor card, basically, the card is always held in the CU, and in the case of a visitor card, the card is held only when the visitor card has a remaining amount. It may be controlled to transmit C-ID as (with Bit set to 1). Also, the C-ID may be stored only in the membership card without storing the C-ID in the visitor card.

  In addition, an error code currently displayed on the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P units. As the CU error, there are a ball abnormality, a base abnormality, a subtraction ball abnormality, an addition ball abnormality, a minus ball abnormality, and a game stop time excess. A ball-bearing abnormality means that a difference of one or more balls has occurred in the CU and P balls. The base abnormality means that the ratio of safe balls to launch balls in the low base and high base states exceeds a threshold. The subtractive ball abnormality means that a prize is detected continuously for five or more balls without a launch ball. Negative ball generation means that the number of balls in CU is negative in the calculation of the number of added / subtracted balls received from the P unit. The game stop time excess means that there is no change in the ball of the card being inserted for a predetermined time or more. Note that "ALL00h" is transmitted as data of a CU error code in which an error has not occurred.

  The response of the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU. The response of the operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the instruction operation and gaming machine information such as the number of game balls. This response is encrypted and transmitted between the CU communication control unit 80 and the main control unit 323 using the session key in the SE2 mode.

  As an execution result, data is transmitted from the P unit to the CU as 7-bit data of Bit 0 to Bit 6. For Bit 0, when "1", the execution result of the game ball count addition rejection is shown, and when it is "0," the execution result of not rejecting the addition of the game ball count is shown. For Bit 1, the execution result of the game ball number subtraction refusal is shown when “1”, and the execution result of not rejecting the subtraction of the game ball number is shown when “0”. For Bit 2, the execution result of gaming permission denial is indicated when “1”, and the execution result indicating that the gaming permission is not rejected is indicated when “0”.

  With regard to Bit 3, when “1”, the execution result of the game prohibition refusal is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result of the effect that the game prohibition is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 4, "1" indicates that the number of game balls and the execution result of sequence number clear rejection are shown, and if "0", the result that the number of game balls and sequence number clear have not been rejected is shown.

  For Bit 5, when “1” is shown, the execution result that the opening of the glass door is refused is shown, and when “0”, the execution result that the opening of the glass door is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 6, "1" indicates that the execution result of refusing the release of the cell is displayed, and "0" indicates that the execution result of not rejecting the cell release.

  In addition, "game ball number addition refusal" is simply referred to as "addition refusal", "game ball number subtraction refusal" is simply referred to as "subtraction refusal", "game permission refusal" is simply referred to as "permission refusal", "Prohibition rejection" is simply referred to as "prohibition rejection", "playing ball number and sequence number clear rejection" is also simply referred to as "clear rejection", and "glass door open rejection" is also simply referred to as "glass open rejection".

  The “playing ball total number information” is the current number of playing balls (the number of playing balls as a result of calculation of addition and subtraction). The “playing ball obtained number information” is the number of obtained game balls, and when there is a plurality of winnings at the time of transmission, it is the number information added up. The CU 3 adds the data of the game ball obtained number information to the currently held number of game balls, but does not add the number of game balls when the main data is received without holding the card.

  "Back ball addition information" refers to the number of back balls (fall balls) when fired by the firing unit (not shown), and when there are multiple back balls at the time of transmission, this is the information of the number added is there. The CU 3 adds data of back ball addition information to the currently held number of gaming balls, but does not add the number of gaming balls when the main data is received without holding the card. The “playing ball number information” refers to the number of balls fired by the firing unit (not shown), and is the information of the combined number when there is a plurality of fired balls at the time of transmission. The CU 3 subtracts the data of the number-of-played-balls-playing number information from the currently held number of gaming balls, but does not subtract the number of gaming balls when the main data is received without holding the card. In addition, CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls when the number of game balls held by itself is zero. The “out ball passing information” is the number of out balls detected by the out ball detection switch, and is the number obtained by adding the number of out balls at the time of transmission. The “symbol determination number 1” is symbol determination information for the winning of the starting opening 1, and “1” is added when symbol variation is stopped. The “symbol determination number 2” is symbol determination information for the winning of the starting opening 2, and “1” is added when symbol variation is stopped.

  The CU performs a game ball correction process using “game ball gain number information”, “back ball addition information”, and “game ball launch number information”. Specifically, the game ball number + the game ball obtained number information + the back ball addition information−the game ball fired number information is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new game ball number (game ball total number). Then, it is checked whether the game ball total number information transmitted from P units and the number of game balls after correction (game ball total number information) match or not, and if they do not match, recovery processing is performed. A command for communication start request is transmitted to P units, and the data correction request data (Bit 2 is “1” data) included in the command and the data for the number of game balls stored in the CU are for P units. A process of correcting the number of game balls (game ball total number information) to the number of game balls after correction on the CU side (game ball total number information) is performed.

  Each bit of Bit0 to Bit3 is prepared as error state 2 of the game table, but this is provided as a spare, to cope with error information specific to a maker which is not used for specifying an actual error state. It is a thing.

The contents of each bit of gaming machine state 1 will be described in detail later, but will be briefly described below.
The game permission state / game prohibition state in Bit 0 of the game state 1 indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and the P units which have received an instruction by the command from the CU are instructed Transition to the When a communication error occurs, the P unit itself shifts to the game prohibited state.

  While waiting / playing in Bit 1, it is data indicating whether the fan (player) is playing (is firing a ball) and the fan (player) is not firing a ball while waiting The game is in progress with the fan (player) firing a ball. The game completion of Bit 3 indicates whether or not the balls have stopped firing at P, and then all the pachinko balls thrown into the game area 27 have been collected and the destinations of all the fired balls have been determined. It is. The state in which all balls are undecided is game incompletion (Bit3 = 0), and the state in which all balls are undecided is game completion (Bit3 = 1). In addition, if it is not possible to confirm 15 seconds or more after stopping the firing of the ball, the game is timed out and the game is completed.

  If you can not confirm completion of the game for more than 15 seconds, you will time out and complete the game, and if the ball clogged up in the game area is eliminated and the ball wins, etc. A display for prompting reinsertion may be displayed by the display 312 or the display 54, and control may be performed so as not to receive another card until the previous card is reinserted. Then, after the previous card is reinserted, manual correction (manual correction) of the number of game balls by a game clerk or the like is performed.

  The gaming machine reset in Bit 4 indicates an initial reset signal of the gaming machine (P units), and sets “1” for 30 seconds after activation of the P units. With game machine history information in Bit5, it is data indicating whether or not the game machine history information such as the number of starts and the number of big hits is held at P, and when it is "0", no game machine history information is available. In the case of "1", the presence of gaming machine history information is indicated. When the game machine history information is cleared by RAM clear, the P unit turns off this data. Also, after clearing the RAM, this data is turned ON at the timing of adding data such as "number of start" and "number of big hit". It should be noted that, in order to match the gaming machine history data with P units, the CU 3 clears the gaming machine history data held by the CU 3 upon detection of this data OFF.

The contents of each bit of the game state 2 will be detailed later, but will be briefly described below.
The big hit 1 of Bit 0 is set to “1” in the big hit middle and the small hit. The big hit 2 of Bit 1 is set to “1” in the big hit medium, small hit medium and high base. The big hit 3 of Bit 2 is set to "1" at the big hit middle (only the high hit big hit).

  The big hit 4 of Bit 3 is set to '1' in the big hit (big hit only on high base) and high base. The big hit end indication of Bit 4 is set to “1” during the big hit end indication. The high base of Bit 5 is set to "1" in the high base. The high probability of Bit 6 is set to “1” in the high probability. “1” is set in waiting for a customer (during demonstration) for waiting for a customer in Bit 7.

  In addition, there are the following P errors. As an error of the main control unit 323, there are an incorrect winning error, a radio wave sensor error, and a magnet sensor error. As an error of the payout control unit 17, a card unit non-connection error, main control unit power off 1, main control unit power off 2, ID control error of payout control unit, card unit authentication error, CU communication control unit authentication error, anti card Unit communication line disconnection to main control unit communication line disconnection 1 to main control unit reception command abnormality 1 to main control unit communication line disconnection 2 to main control unit reception command abnormality 2 frame body / glass door open error firing motor Operation error, Launch motor origin detection error, Game ball shortage error 1, Game ball transport error 1, Game ball fault error 2, Game ball transport error 2, Game ball transport error 3, Game ball excess error, Game end detection error 1 , Game end detection error 2, game ball number under error, game board ball clogging error, foul ball detection error 1, foul ball detection error 2, out Detecting errors 1, out ball detection error 2, ball ejecting switch error, ball ejecting motor origin sensor errors, there is a ball ejecting error.

  The response (communication state response) transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 is indicated by a hexadecimal number sequence, and 0x00 indicates that the communication state is OK (appropriate). In the case other than this, that is, in the case of 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, 0x10, it is indicated that it is abnormal. CRC-NG means that the result of parity check is NG, that is, it is abnormal. Moreover, MAC-NG is NG of Message Authentication Code. Decryption NG means that the data transmitted after being encrypted and transmitted is abnormal as it is not correct data. The data length NG means that the length of the received data is not a normal length. The disconnection detection means that it is an abnormality that has detected the occurrence of a disconnection between the P unit and the CU.

  The response of the device information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 is command code, command size, acquisition result, main control chip ID, maker code, format code, payout control chip ID, maker code, format Code, and MAC.

  A response of the device information response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the CU. The response of the device information response is to transmit information of the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID to the CU. The command code identifies the code of the command. The code size specifies the data size of the command. Depending on the acquisition result, any one of OK (with collected information), NG (with no collected information), or not collected is specified. The main control chip ID is a chip ID recorded on P main control boards 16, and the payout control chip ID is a P payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 17. It is.

  Next, processing executed by the CPU in the main control unit 323 of the CU and processing executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control unit 17 will be described based on FIGS.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, processing of the connection sequence at the time of power activation will be described. The process of the connection sequence of FIG. 6 is a process executed at the time of resuming communication after the communication between the CU and the P units is completed normally. Specifically, it is executed at the time of resuming communication after the power of the CU is turned off, in a standby state in which no card is inserted. A typical example is the case where the business day of the game arcade is ended and the power is turned off, and the power is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, at the time of power activation, the ball hitting and firing motor (not shown) is stopped on the P-unit to stop the game and then the communication is started. In the CU, first, processing of an authentication sequence is performed. The specific control content of the process of the authentication sequence is shown in the flowchart of the subroutine program shown in FIGS. By the processing of this authentication sequence, a command of device information request is transmitted from the CU to P units. In response to that, the P unit returns a response of the device information response. The response of the device information response includes the main chip ID and the payout chip ID.

  The CU, which has received the device information response, stores the information included in the device information response, and makes an authentication request to P devices that have received a response (P devices specified by the received main chip ID and payout chip ID) Send the data of to P units.

The P that has received the authentication request sends an authentication response back to the CU.
Next, the specific control contents of the process of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 6 will be described based on FIGS.

  (A) and (b) of FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. The authentication sequence shown in FIG. 6 has two types, an authentication sequence when the power of the CU is activated and an authentication sequence when the power of the P (game machine) is activated. The authentication sequence when the power of the CU is turned on is shown in FIG. 7 (a). Referring to FIG. 7A, the main control unit 323 completes authentication with the host server 801 and acquires CU communication control unit information (for example, chip ID of CU communication control unit information) before communication. Start. The CU communication control unit 80 performs authentication with the P-unit communication control unit 81. After that, communication is started. Then, the serial ID authentication sequence is first executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and then the chip ID authentication sequence is executed. After that, communication with P units becomes possible. The main control unit 323 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 of the time. This time notification is encrypted and transmitted in the SE2 mode using the main authentication key as an encryption key. Next, a time response is made from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323. This time response is encrypted and transmitted in the SE2 mode using the main authentication key as an encryption key. Thereafter, the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 perform encrypted communication using a session key (communication key). The session key (communication key) is generated from the random number and the real authentication key. A session key (communication key) may be generated from time data shared by time notification and the main authentication key.

  The authentication sequence when the power of P units (game machines) is activated is shown in FIG. 7 (b). Referring to FIG. 7B, after CU communication control unit 80 detects a communication break with P units, main control unit 323 instructs CU communication control unit 80 to operate with the communication key in the SE2 mode. Encrypt and send. Further, the communication state request is encrypted and transmitted by the communication key in the SE2 mode. After that, the CU communication control unit 80 encrypts the communication state response (disconnection detection) with the communication key in the SE2 mode and transmits it to the main control unit 323. After that, the main control unit 323 detects communication disconnection with P units, and the CU communication control unit 80 authenticates the payout control chip. Thereafter, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 7 (a). Referring to FIG. 8, main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with higher-level server 801. When the main authentication key is not acquired, the temporary authentication key is encrypted. The temporary authentication key is a key from which an appropriate authentication result can be obtained as a result of the device authentication sequence described later with reference to FIG. The temporary authentication key is subsequently updated as the real authentication key. Then, a BB serial ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Authentication of the SID of the main control unit stored in the BB serial ID, that is, the EEPROM (not shown) is performed by the BB serial ID authentication sequence. Next, the main control unit 323 executes the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence only when the serial ID of the CU communication control unit is acquired from the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit serial ID is authenticated by the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence.

  Next, a command of a writer management information request is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The writer management information is information on the ROM writer used when writing the authentication information to the EEPROM (not shown). For example, it is data such as the ID of the ROM writer, the maker code of the ROM writer, and the version of the key stored in the ROM writer.

  The main control unit 323 receives, from the CU communication control unit 80, the writer management information response encrypted with the main authentication key in the SE1 mode, and the writer control information included in the writer management information response and the main control unit 323 The stored writer management information is collated to check whether or not both are consistent. Even if the authentication keys of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 coincide with each other as a result of the collation check based on the writer management information, a certain degree of security is ensured and the security is improved.

  Next, a device authentication sequence (main authentication key) with an authentication key is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80.

  A command from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80 is sent from the main control unit 323 a command of the CU communication control unit authentication result notification for collectively notifying the abnormality from the BB serial ID authentication sequence to the device authentication sequence. That is, even if each authentication result from the BB serial ID authentication to the device authentication is abnormal, no abnormality notification is performed when notifying each authentication result, and any authentication from the BB serial ID authentication to the device authentication is performed. If there is an abnormality at any of the above, it is comprehensively notified that the abnormality has occurred as a whole without notifying which authentication has occurred. As a result, even if the encrypted communication is intercepted, security is improved without being aware of which type of authentication has occurred. After that, the command of the CU communication control unit result response is similarly notified of the abnormality from the BB serial ID authentication sequence to the device authentication sequence as described above.

  Next, a command of CU communication control unit effective key notification is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. When the CU communication control unit effective key has been set, the main control unit 323 does not transmit a command of CU communication control unit effective key notification. Thereafter, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the response of the CU communication control unit valid key response.

  Next, a command of counter information notification is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This command is to notify an initial vector R of a counter used in the SE2 mode described later in FIG. 67 (a), and is encrypted and transmitted by the real authentication key in the SE1 mode. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received it transmits a counter information notification response encrypted with the main authentication key to the main control unit 323 in the SE1 mode.

  When using the SE1 mode, which is a simple block encryption usage mode, if the same plaintext is encrypted with a certain key, the part of the plaintext to be encrypted becomes another because it becomes the same ciphertext. There is a disadvantage that it can be judged by comparison of ciphertext whether or not it is the same as the part, and in order to eliminate it, the initial vector of SE2 mode is notified to CU communication control unit 80, and main control unit 323 and CU The counter value is shared with the communication control unit 80. The mode setting of encryption is performed by notification of this counter information. Since the mode setting of this encryption is reset at each daily power on in the game arcade, security is improved.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program at the time of updating the authentication key of the serial ID authentication sequence. Referring to FIG. 9, an authentication key update sequence is executed between main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80 only when main control unit 323 acquires update information from higher-level server 801. By this authentication key update sequence, the authentication key can be changed to a new one.

  A command of an authentication key update request encrypted with the temporary authentication key in the SE1 mode is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This command transmission is executed only when the main control unit 323 acquires update information from the upper server. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received it updates the authentication key and the key version, and transmits a response of the authentication key update response (OK) to the main control unit 323. This response is encrypted by the temporary authentication key in the SE1 mode and transmitted. Thereafter, the BB serial ID authentication sequence and the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence are executed.

  Next, a command of a writer management information request is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The writer management information is information on the ROM writer used when writing the authentication information to the EEPROM (not shown). For example, it is data such as the ID of the ROM writer, the maker code of the ROM writer, and the version of the key stored in the ROM writer.

  The CU communication control unit 80 that has received this command returns a response of the latest writer management information stored and held to the main control unit 323. This response is encrypted by the temporary authentication key in the SE1 mode and transmitted.

  The main control unit 323 collates the writer management information included in the writer management information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 with the writer management information stored in the main control unit 323, Check if it is not. Even if the authentication keys of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 coincide with each other as a result of the collation check based on the writer management information, a certain degree of security is ensured and the security is improved.

  Thereafter, the device authentication sequence is performed. Next, a command of CU communication control unit authentication result notification is transmitted from the main control unit 323 as the CU communication control unit authentication result is suitable (OK). With this command, the main control section 323 notifies the CU communication control section 80 of the abnormality in the authentication result from the BB serial ID authentication to the device authentication as a whole. That is, even if each authentication result from the BB serial ID authentication to the device authentication is abnormal, no abnormality notification is performed when notifying each authentication result, and any authentication from the BB serial ID authentication to the device authentication is performed. If there is an abnormality at any of the above, it is comprehensively notified that the abnormality has occurred as a whole without notifying which authentication has occurred. As a result, even if the encrypted communication is intercepted, security is improved without being aware of which type of authentication has occurred.

  Further, the CU communication control unit 80 also transmits a response of the CU communication control unit authentication result notification as the CU communication control unit authentication result is suitable (OK). Also in this response, if an abnormality occurs in any of the authentications from the BB serial ID authentication to the device authentication, it is comprehensive that the abnormality has occurred as a whole without notifying which authentication has occurred. To notify. Thereafter, cryptographic communication is performed using the main authentication key.

  Next, the CU communication control unit effective key notification is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The main control unit 323 does not notify when the CU communication control unit effective key has been set. On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits a CU communication control unit valid key response (OK) to the main control unit 323.

  Next, a command of counter information notification is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The counter information notification includes the value of the initial vector in the above-described SE2 mode. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 returns a counter information notification response to the main control unit 323.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b). Referring to FIG. 10, main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with CU communication control unit 80, and encrypts the temporary authentication key when the main authentication key is not obtained. Then, a command of payout control authentication result request is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The command of the payout control authentication result request requests the authentication result of the CU communication control unit 80 authenticating the P unit communication control unit 81 provided in the LSI 799 of the P unit 2. During authentication processing between the CU communication control unit 80 and the P communication control unit 81 of the payout control chip (LSI), the command of this payout control authentication result request is repeatedly transmitted until the authentication between both is completed. The main control unit 323 stands by. When the authentication is completed, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits, to the main control unit 323, a response of the payment control authentication result response for notifying the authentication result of the payout control chip (LSI) with the P communication control unit 81. Do. The response of the payout control authentication result response is encrypted by the main authentication key in the SE2 mode and transmitted.

  Next, the device information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The device information request command requests the chip ID of the CU communication control unit. The command of the device information request is repeatedly transmitted until the CU communication control unit 80 acquires the device information, and the main control unit 323 waits until the acquisition of the device information is completed. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits chip information (chip ID and the like) of the payout control chip and the main control chip to the main control unit 323 as a device information response. The main control unit 323 having received it inquires the host server 801 to collate the device information (chip ID). The main control unit 323 transmits, to the CU communication control unit 80, a command (playing machine authentication result notification) of an authentication result (operation availability) according to the result of the inquiry to the upper server 801. In the case of NG (at the time of operation non-use), P unit reset is awaited. If not NG, it becomes possible to transmit business telegrams to P units thereafter, and between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, a command for recovery request, recovery response, operation instruction, operation response Transmission and reception is performed.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining the case where there is an abnormality in updating the authentication key in the serial ID authentication sequence.

  A command of an authentication key update request is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This command is encrypted by the temporary authentication key in the SE1 mode and transmitted. The authentication key update response is encrypted by the temporary authentication key in the SE1 mode from the CU communication control unit 80 that has received it, and is transmitted to the main control unit 323. If the authentication key update response is NG (if, for example, the CU communication control unit 80 can not update the response), the main control unit 323 retries at most twice. If the result of the second retry is NG, the main control unit 323 performs processing for CU communication control unit authentication abnormality.

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart for explaining the case where the authentication result of the CU communication control unit in the serial ID authentication sequence is abnormal.

  Referring to FIG. 12, a command of an authentication key update request is encrypted and transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80 using the temporary authentication key in the SE1 mode. The authentication key update response (OK) is encrypted and transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 with the temporary authentication key in the SE1 mode. Thereafter, the BB serial ID authentication sequence and the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence are executed.

  Next, a command of a writer management information request is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The writer management information is information on the ROM writer used when writing the authentication information to the EEPROM (not shown). For example, it is data such as the ID of the ROM writer, the maker code of the ROM writer, and the version of the key stored in the ROM writer. The writer management information response is encrypted and transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 with the temporary authentication key in the SE1 mode.

  The main control unit 323 collates the writer management information included in the writer management information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 with the writer management information stored in the main control unit 323, Check if it is not. Even if the authentication keys of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 coincide with each other as a result of the collation check based on the writer management information, a certain degree of security is ensured and the security is improved.

  Thereafter, the device authentication sequence is performed. Next, a command of CU communication control unit authentication result notification is transmitted from the main control unit 323 as the CU communication control unit authentication result is nonconforming (NG). Even if each authentication result from the BB serial ID authentication to the device authentication is abnormal, no notification of abnormality is made when notifying each authentication result, and any of the authentication from the BB serial ID authentication to the device authentication is abnormal. If there is a problem, it is comprehensively notified that the failure has occurred as a whole without notifying which authentication the failure has occurred. As a result, even if the encrypted communication is intercepted, security is improved without being aware of which type of authentication has occurred. Similarly, the abnormality from the BB serial ID authentication sequence to the device authentication sequence is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 as a command of CU communication control unit authentication result notification (NG).

  Note that if both parties thus determine non-conformity (NG), it returns to the BB serial ID authentication sequence, and retries from the BB serial ID authentication sequence. However, it will retry only up to two times at most. If the result of the second retry is NG, the main control unit 323 performs processing for CU communication control unit authentication abnormality.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart for explaining the case where the valid key of the CU communication control unit is abnormal in the serial ID authentication sequence. Since the steps up to the device authentication sequence of FIG. 12 are the same, the description will not be repeated. Therefore, description will be made from the step of the CU communication control unit authentication result notification.

  Here, a command of CU communication control unit authentication result notification is transmitted from the main control unit 323 as the CU communication control unit authentication result is suitable (OK). On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 also transmits a response of the CU communication control unit authentication result notification as the CU communication control unit authentication result is suitable (OK).

  Next, the CU communication control unit effective key notification is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits a CU communication control unit valid key response to the main control unit 323 as nonconforming (NG). When the main control unit 323 receives this nonconformity, the main control unit 323 retransmits the CU communication control unit effective key notification to the CU communication control unit 80 up to twice. If the result of the second retry is NG, the main control unit 323 performs processing for CU communication control unit authentication abnormality.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining the serial ID authentication sequence in the normal state. Here, the following requests and responses are encrypted by the main authentication key in the SE1 mode and transmitted.

  After the BB serial ID authentication sequence and the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence are executed, a command of a writer management information request is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The latest writer management information held by the CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted as a writer management information response. The main control unit confirms the own writer management information and the writer management information response. Thereafter, the device authentication sequence is performed.

  Next, a command of CU communication control unit authentication result notification for which the steps from the BB serial ID authentication sequence to the device authentication sequence are suitable (OK) is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. On the other hand, a response of a CU communication control unit authentication result response in which the BB serial ID authentication sequence to the device authentication sequence are suitable (OK) is transmitted to the main control unit 323.

  Next, a command for notifying the CU communication control unit effective key is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, while the CU communication control unit effective key conforms to the main control unit 323 from the CU communication control unit 80 (OK The response of the CU communication control unit effective key response, which is) is transmitted.

  Next, a command of counter information notification is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This command is to notify an initial vector R of a counter used in the SE2 mode described later in FIG. 67 (a), and is encrypted and transmitted by the real authentication key in the SE1 mode. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received it transmits a counter information notification response encrypted with the main authentication key to the main control unit 323 in the SE1 mode.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart for explaining the chip ID authentication sequence when the payout control authentication result is abnormal. Referring to FIG. 15, a command of payout control authentication result request is transmitted from main control unit 323 to CU communication control unit 80.

  Next, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits a payout control authentication result response in which the authentication result with the payout control chip (the payout control unit 17) is nonconforming (NG). The main control unit 323 that has received it performs authentication abnormality processing between the payout control chip (the payout control unit 17) and the CU communication control unit 80.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 8, in which challenge response authentication is performed. Challenge-response authentication generally refers to an authentication method that prevents eavesdropping on an ID or the like during communication by performing special processing on a character string or the like. For example, the authenticating side performs authentication. A random numeric string (called a "challenge code") is sent to the party that wants to receive it, and the party that received the challenge code combines the ID etc. and the received challenge code according to a predetermined algorithm, and a response code Generate and reply. Whether the response code has been received, the response code is similarly generated from the transmitted challenge code and the ID stored in advance, and the received response code is compared with the generated response code to match Perform authentication to determine whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, first, a command of BB serial ID request 1 is transmitted from main control unit 323 to CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 having received it transmits a response requesting a challenge code as a BB serial ID authentication response 1. The main control unit 323 that has received it generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and CU communication using the challenge code as a BB serial ID authentication request Transmit to control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 having received it generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and sets the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response 2 It transmits to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 having received it checks the response code to determine whether or not it is appropriate. It controls so that subsequent communication is not performed at the time of improperness (NG).

  The algorithm for generating the challenge code and generating the response code may be any algorithm, an example of which will be described below. As a challenge code, a random number (binary number) with the same data length is generated for the code data (binary number) of the BB serial ID, and an exclusive OR (exclusive OR) of the BB serial ID and the random number is calculated. Then, the calculation result is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as a challenge code. On the other hand, as the generation of the response code in the CU communication control unit 80, the exclusive OR of the BB serial ID (binary number) is calculated for the received challenge code. If the BB serial ID on the main control unit 323 and the BB serial ID on the CU communication control unit 80 match, it means that the exclusive OR of the same BB serial ID has been calculated twice for the random number, The result is the original random number. Then, the original random number is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as a response code. The main control unit 323 determines whether or not the generated random number matches the random number sent as the response code, and determines that it is appropriate if it matches, but it is determined to be incorrect (NG) if it does not match. judge.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. First, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. CU communication control unit 80 having received it generates a challenge code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in ROM 809 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as a CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 1. The main control unit 323 that has received it generates a response code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and transmits the response code A to the CU communication. It transmits to the CU communication control unit 80 as a control unit serial ID authentication request 2. The communication control unit 80 that has received it checks the response code A and determines whether or not it is appropriate. Then, a CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 2 including the determination result (check result) and the request for the challenge code B is transmitted to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 that has received it controls so that the subsequent communication is not performed when the check result is improper (NG).

  The algorithm of the generation of the challenge code and the generation of the response code shown in FIG. 23 may be any algorithm, but an algorithm using the exclusive OR described in FIG. 16 can be used, for example.

  The challenge response type authentication algorithm is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. For example, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random number R1, and encrypts the random number R1 using the SID (called SIDM) of the CU communication control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80 as a key to generate a challenge code A. If it shows by a formula, it will become challenge code A = ESIDM (R1). This is sent to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 generates a response code A by decoding with SIDM stored. In the equation, response code A = DSIDM (challenge code A) = DSIDM (ESIDM (R1)) = R1. This is sent back to the communication control unit 80, and the communication control unit 80 collates whether the random number R1 generated earlier and the response code A (= R1) sent back match or not, and the condition is met. To be successful.

  Further, the main control unit 323 generates a random number R2 and encrypts the random number R2 using the SID (referred to as SIDT) of the main control unit stored in the main control unit 323 as a key to generate a challenge code B. If it shows by a formula, it will become challenge code B = ESIDT (R2). The communication control unit 80 transmits this to the communication control unit 80 and decodes it with the SIDT stored therein to generate a response code B. In the equation, response code B = DSIDT (challenge code B) = DSIDT (ESIDT (R2)) = R2. This is sent back to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 checks whether the random number R2 generated earlier and the response code B (= R2) sent back match or not, and matches the condition To be successful.

  FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing a subroutine program of the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. The device authentication sequence is an encryption / decryption authentication sequence using an encryption key (authentication key), and uses the SE1 mode as a block encryption mode. First, the main control unit 323 transmits the device authentication request 1 to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received it generates a random number A and encrypts the random number A using an authentication key stored in an EEPROM (not shown). Also create a MAC. This MAC is the Message Authentication Code. For example, let MAC be a value obtained by computing the generated random number A using a predetermined hash function. That is, the message digest of the generated random number A is MAC. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the encrypted random number A and the MAC as the device authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323.

  The main control unit 323 that has received it decrypts the received encrypted random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) to generate the original plaintext random number A, and the predetermined random number A is generated. Calculate MAC using hash function. Then, it is checked whether the calculated MAC and the MAC transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 match. If the two match, it is determined that it is appropriate. If the two do not match, it is determined that it is inappropriate (NG).

  Next, the main control unit 323 generates a random number B and encrypts the random number B using an authentication key stored in an EEPROM (not shown). Further, a random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to create a MAC. Then, the encrypted random number B and the MAC are transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as the device authentication request 2 as well as the authentication result based on the device authentication response 1. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received it decrypts the received encrypted random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) and converts it into the original plaintext random number B. Then, the random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to calculate MAC. It is checked whether the calculated MAC and the received MAC match or not, and if they match, it is determined that they are appropriate, and if they are not, they are determined to be incorrect (NG). Then, the determination result is transmitted as the device authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323. If the determination result is improper (NG), control is performed so that the subsequent communication is not performed.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the storage setting of the authentication key in the EEPROM (not shown). The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the authentication key to the main control unit 323, and the EEPROM of the main control unit 323 (not shown). Store the authentication key in).

  Referring to FIG. 19, this authentication key setting sequence is an authentication key writing sequence when manufacturing a card unit (CU). First, the main control unit 323 waits for transmission of the authentication key information from the CU communication control unit 80 on the condition that the authentication key with the CU communication control unit 80 is not written. The CU communication control unit 80 starts communication in response to a request from a dedicated IC writer (ROM writer). Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits an authentication request A of the SID of the main control unit stored in the BB serial ID, that is, the EEPROM (not shown) to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 that has received it transmits a BB serial ID authentication response A for requesting the challenge code to the CU communication control unit 80 to the CU communication control unit 80. The communication control unit 80 that has received it generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and sets the challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication request B. It transmits to the control part 323.

  The main control unit 323 that has received it generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and the response code is used as the CU serial ID authentication response B as a CU. It transmits to the communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received it determines whether the response code is correct, and transmits authentication key information to be described later only when the response code is correct (OK). The challenge response authentication shown in FIG. 19 can also use the same algorithm (for example, exclusive OR) as the challenge response authentication shown in FIGS. 16 and 17.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 determines that the authentication result is appropriate, the authentication key information written from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer), that is, the information on the authentication key stored in the EEPROM (not shown) Are sent to the main control unit 323 as an authentication key setting request. Having received it, the main control unit 323 causes the transmitted authentication key to be stored in the EEPROM (not shown), and transmits an authentication key setting response indicating that it has been stored to the CU communication control unit 80.

  As a result, a common authentication key (common key) is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 performs device authentication thereafter using the common authentication key. This device authentication is the same as the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. When it is determined that the result of the device authentication is appropriate, the subsequent communication is not performed, and a state of waiting for reset is made.

  Next, returning to FIG. 6, the CU that has received the authentication response next transmits a recovery request to P units. In the P unit that has received it, the recovery data backed up in the P unit (specifically, the payout control unit 17) is returned to the CU as a response. The recovery data includes connection time, final SQN (sequence number), C-ID, previous ball related information, and current ball related information. The term "recovery data" in the following flowcharts refers to the various data mentioned above. In the present embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is, as described above, the SQN transmitted last by P units.

  The CU that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process to recover the integrity of each other's data between CU and P, and it is not only executed at the time of power supply start, but also trouble occurred and recovered as described later Sometimes it is also done.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) each time it transmits an "operation instruction". However, it does not count up when resending the operation instruction. The CU backs up the SQN and its request content upon transmission of the “operation request”. The P unit stores the SQN received by the “operation instruction” and sends it back to the CU by the “operation response”. When the P unit receives the operation instruction of the same SQN as the SQN received last time, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU re-sends the operation instruction as the re-transmission statement.

  After the recovery processing is completed, the CU updates the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time to the values received from P, and updates the SQN to "0", and the communication start request (recovery clear ON) As a command, a command of SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 0, and game ball = 0 is transmitted to the P-unit. In the P unit, the “sequence number” and the “game ball” backed up in the P unit are matched with the information of the CU in response to that (SQN = 0, game ball = 0). It also backs up the notified "connection time". Then, the P unit returns a communication start response to the CU. After this, between the CU and the P, transmission and reception of the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are performed.

  As described above, the CU increments the sequence number (SQN) by one each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request and SQN = 0 is transmitted to the P-unit. In the P unit, the data of SQN = 1, pre-addition ball number = 0, pre-subtraction ball number = 0, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 0, pre-start opening (2) number of times = 0 is backed up Do. Further, the P unit clears the value of each counter of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1), and the number of starting openings (2), which are current ball related information. And as for the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = 1, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, the number of starting openings (2) = 0, And, the response of game prohibition (game stop state) is transmitted to CU.

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 based on the operation response, and calculates the current number of gaming balls 0 + the number of received additional balls 0-the number of received subtraction balls 0. While backing up 0, it backs up addition ball number accumulation = 0, subtraction ball number accumulation = 0, starting opening (1) frequency accumulation 0 =, and starting opening (2) frequency accumulation 0 = 0.

  Next, at the end of the activation process on the CU side, the CU transmits an operation instruction of game permission request, SQN = n to P units, and the P units that receive them have game permission rejection OFF as an operation response. , SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings (1) = 0, number of starting openings (2) = 0, and response to gaming permission is returned to CU Do.

  When an appropriate authentication result is obtained as a result of the authentication sequence using the session key of FIG. 7, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 20 is executed. FIG. 20 (a) shows the case where the business message sequence is normal, and FIG. 20 (b) shows the case where the business message sequence is abnormal.

  First, referring to FIG. 20A, after the command of the operation instruction is transmitted from main control unit 323 to CU communication control unit 80, a request for confirmation of the communication state of the operation instruction message (communication state request) Is sent to the CU communication control unit 80. CU communication control unit 80 notifies main control unit 323 of the reception status of the operation instruction message (MAC abnormality, CRC abnormality, decoding abnormality, data length abnormality, disconnection detection) as a communication state response (not shown).

  The main control unit 323 confirms the communication state based on the received communication state response, and determines that it is normal if it is normal.

  On the other hand, CU communication control unit 80 transmits a command of the operation instruction to P units (specifically, P unit communication control unit 81) based on the reception of the command of the above-mentioned operation instruction. In the unit P that has received it, the operation response is sent back to the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives it and transmits the response of the operation response to the main control unit 323.

  On the other hand, FIG. 20B shows the case where the business message sequence is abnormal. The main difference with FIG. 20A is that the main control unit 323 that has received the communication status response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 checks the communication status based on the communication status response, and determines that it is abnormal. It is a point to do. This is determined to be abnormal if the response of the transmitted communication status response is numeric data other than 0x00. If the main control unit 323 determines that there is an abnormality, the main control unit 323 executes retry of confirmation of the communication state. Specifically, after transmitting the command of the operation instruction to the CU communication control unit 80 again, the communication state request is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, and based on the communication state response sent back from the CU communication control unit 80. It is determined whether an abnormality in the communication state has occurred. If the main control unit 323 determines that the communication status is abnormal as a result of execution of the retry, the notification of the communication status abnormality is controlled. As the abnormality notification control of the communication state, for example, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 797 and the display 312 gives notification of the abnormality of the communication state, or turns on or blinks an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Alternatively, it is conceivable to transmit a signal to the effect that an abnormality in the communication state has occurred to the hall management computer 1. Although the number of times of execution of this retry is shown once in FIG. 20 (b), it may be executed twice or more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the process of the connection sequence when the CU and P are reconnected will be described. Here, "at the time of reconnection" is at the time of resuming communication after the communication between the CU and the P unit abnormally ends. This “abnormal end” is described later, when the power is activated while holding the card in FIG. 34, and when the CU itself disconnects communication when the P unit in FIG. 41 refuses addition, the CU side in FIGS. When the power is cut off. As will be described later, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, it is a. Resumption of the connection sequence in a state other than standby, b. A connection sequence after sending its own communication disconnect request and disconnecting communication (See FIG. 41) or c. It is judged whether the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN sent from P are inconsistent or not, and it is judged as any of a to c. When it is determined, it is determined that the normal communication is not terminated (abnormal termination), and the connection sequence at the time of reconnection of FIG. 21 is executed instead of FIG.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation described with reference to FIG. 6, and the differences will be mainly described here.

  First, the time to start communication after the game machine P is prohibited is immediately after the device information request command from the CU is received. This is because the P unit can recognize that the P unit has received the device information request from the CU and is reconnected for the first time.

  Next, since the connection sequence in FIG. 6 is at power on, the CU transmits a communication start request command of recovery clear ON to P units, and the P unit receives it and clears the recovery data. At the same time, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 in accordance with SQN = 0 sent in the first operation instruction, and all previous ball related information and current ball related information etc. are cleared to "0".

  However, in the case of the connection sequence of FIG. 21, since it is at the time of reconnection, there are cases where the recovery information backed up inside P unit and the information stored on the CU side do not match. Therefore, after starting the recovery processing, the CU corrects the game ball, etc., in accordance with the contents of the P-unit-side recovery data (previous ball related information, current ball related information, etc.) included in the recovery response. Execute the process Specifically, based on the game ball acquisition number information, the back ball addition information, and the game ball launch number information included in the recovery data sent from P units, the number of game balls + the number of game ball acquisition number + back Ball addition information-A game ball number-of-plays information is calculated, the stored game ball number is corrected to the calculated new number of game balls, and the corrected number of game balls and recovery data from P are calculated. The game ball total number information sent as is compared with, and it is judged whether it corresponds or not. In the case of non-coincidence, a command in which the game ball correction ON, that is, the bit 2 of the data correction request is set to "1" is transmitted to the P-unit as the communication start request. Also, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from P units and the final SQN stored in the CU are compared to determine whether they match, and if they do not match, a communication start request is issued. SQN correction ON, that is, a command in which Bit 1 of the data correction request is set to “1” is transmitted to P units. Also, the correct number of gaming balls to be corrected = 300 and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the P-unit.

  The P unit receives the communication start request command, and performs correction processing to match the “sequence number” and the “game ball” backed up by the P unit with the information of the CU. Specifically, SQN = 3 and gaming ball = 300 are corrected, and processing for backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  Then, the CU backs up the main chip ID and the payout chip ID transmitted from the P-units at the stage when the recovery processing is completed, and backs up the connection time which is the time of reconnection. Then, as for the sequence number, if the final SQN transmitted from P units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, after starting the recovery processing in the CU, if it is determined that the P units that are the communication partners do not match, or if it is determined that the SQN is abnormal, the recovery response sent from the P units The current number of game balls included in is converted into a ball at one end. The number of balls is the number of game balls recorded on a game recording medium (card or the like) owned by a player. Then, after balls are recorded on the recording medium, the replay button 319 is operated to use the balls of the recording medium, and the balls are converted into game balls, and then re-playing becomes possible. At that time, as in the connection sequence at power on shown in FIG. 6, as the communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P unit, the recovery clear ON is transmitted, and the P unit receives it and recovers data clear. Further, in the CU, the sequence number is set to “0”, SQN = 1 is transmitted to the P unit in the first operation instruction, and in the P unit, the SQN = 1 is backed up. In addition, in P unit, the number of pre-additional ball = 0, pre-subtraction ball number = 0, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 0, pre-start opening (2) number of times = 0 is backed up Clear each counter value of number, start opening (1) times, start opening (2) times to 0.

The processing of the CU and P when the card is inserted will be described with reference to FIG.
In the CU, when the card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card, and the card reader / writer reads the information recorded on the taken card and receives the read information, etc. The process at the time of card insertion is executed.

  In the insertion process, a command for a card insertion request is sent to the P unit, in which the CU reads the C-ID recorded on the inserted card and transmits the C-ID to the P unit. In the unit P that has received it, a response of a card insertion response notifying that the reception of the C-ID is completed is sent back to the CU. Further, as this insertion process, control as shown in FIG. 23 described later is executed.

  The CU is in a card balance inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is to verify whether the inserted card is appropriate or not, whether it is a member card registered in the game arcade, or inquires of a higher level server such as the hall management computer 1 etc. This means that the process of displaying on the display unit 312 and displaying on the display 54 on the side of P is being performed is being performed. As described later in FIG. 59 and the like, the CU displays that it is in the process of inquiring about the card inserted in the display unit 312, and also provides an operation instruction including ON during card holding, C-ID, and ON during card insertion processing. Send to P units. In the P unit, by receiving the command of the operation instruction, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display control command including ON during card holding and ON during card insertion processing to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and effect for display Control is performed to display that the control board 53 is in the process of inquiring the card inserted in the display 54 (see FIG. 59).

  After that, P units have SQN = n + 3, game ball number = 0, added ball number = 0, subtraction ball number = 0, start opening 1 count = 0, start opening 2 count = 0, game prohibition and special prize as operation response Send a response including a definite change and OFF to the CU. Specifically, all the Bits 0 to 4 in the gaming state 2 are 0 when the special prize and the definite variation are OFF.

  In the CU, the balance and balls are confirmed when the balance and balls of the inserted card are confirmed as a result of the card balance inquiry. The CU performs control to display the prepaid balance of the determined card on the display unit 312, and adds the determined ball being sent (5000) to the gaming machine (P units) as a game ball. The display inside is displayed on the display 312 (see FIG. 59).

  Then, SQN = n + 4, gaming balls = 0 (number of gaming balls before update) +5000 (number of required addition balls) = 5000 and balls having balls = 0 are backed up. At this point, the consumption of balls is decided.

  Next, as an operation instruction, a command including addition being performed, card holding ON, card insertion processing being OFF, addition indication ON, SQN = n + 4, addition required ball number = 5000 and card balance = 7000 is transmitted to P unit . The operation instruction during card holding and card insertion processing is divided into a member card and a visitor card, and the operation instruction is transmitted separately by type of these cards, and operation is performed separately by type of card in P unit May be displayed. In the P unit, the payout control section 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during addition display and the number of requested balls for addition = 5000, thereby performing display control including ON during addition display and the number of requested balls for addition = 5000. The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display. In response to that, the effect control board for display 53 displays (in the addition display) that it is in the process of adding 5,000 balls as a game ball to the display 54 (see FIG. 59).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the insertion process shown in FIG. The steps shown by broken lines in the present embodiment indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the arrows of the two-dot chain line indicate the flow of transmitted information. In FIG. 23, the CU executes each step of S1 to S7. In addition, P units execute S8 to S10 and S12 to S15. More specifically, the display effect control board 53 provided in the P-unit executes the deletion process of S8 to S10, S12, S13 and S15, and the transmission process of S14 and S15 is a display effect control board 53 transmits to the payout control unit 17, and the payout control unit 17 transmits to the CU.

  First, the CU determines in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 whether or not interruption is in progress. Whether or not this interruption is in progress is determined based on whether or not the interruption operation shown in FIG. 30 described later has been performed and the game interruption sequence has been executed. If interruption is in progress, it is determined whether or not the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the interrupted card in S2, and if it is not in agreement, the insertion is performed in S5. Eject the card and move to standby.

  On the other hand, when the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the interrupted card, it is determined that the interrupted player returns to the gaming machine again to start the game. For this purpose, the control proceeds to step S4 to cancel the suspended state and a process to restart the game is executed in step S6.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1 that the interruption is not in progress, a process of transmitting the C-ID of the inserted card to the P unit is performed in S3. The P-units receive the C-ID, and compare the received C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit shown in FIG. 3) (S8). Then, it is determined in S9 whether or not the comparison results match, and if not, it is determined that a player different from the player who left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program of this insertion process is ended. .

  Thus, the player identification information storage unit (current player gaming history data storage unit) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination unit (S8, S9) for performing the same determination process are the gaming machines. And a gaming machine having display control means, provided that the same determination processing function is not provided on the communication means side (payout control unit 17 side). A common communication means can be used with a gaming machine that does not have a display control means, and it becomes possible to mass-produce a small variety of communication means.

  The processes of S15 and S7 may be performed as control contents of the modification. After the game history data and C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU by S15, they are deleted. The CU receives it and transmits the received data to the upper server 801. The upper server 801 backs up and stores the received game history data and C-ID.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S9 that the two match, the process proceeds to S12, and the gaming history data of the backup area (backup data storage) is returned to the current area (player gaming history data storage unit shown in FIG. 3). Start adding and updating the game history data anew.

  In addition, you may process S10, S13, S14 as control content of a modification. If YES in S9, the control proceeds to S10, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was discharged, and a predetermined time has elapsed according to S10 which has not elapsed. If it is determined that the game history data and the C-ID in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted, processing is performed in S13. Also, after S12, in S15, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU. As the control content of the modification, control may be performed so that all of the processes of S10, S13, and S14 and the processes of S15 and S7 are performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a process of consuming the prepaid balance recorded in the inserted recording medium (card) will be described. In the process of FIG. 24, the prepaid balance is “1000”, and the gaming ball at the current point is “50”. First, a command of no addition, addition display OFF, SQN = n, number of requested addition balls = 0, and required number of subtraction requested balls = 0 is transmitted from the CU to the P unit as an operation instruction. In the P unit that received it, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 50, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, the number of starting openings (2) as operation response Responses of 0, game available, special award OFF, and definite variation OFF are sent back.

  On the other hand, in the CU, the lending of 500 yen, ie, 125 balls is performed by one lending operation (ball lending operation). When the lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed in the CU, SQN = n + 2, the number of gaming balls = 50 (the number of gaming balls before updating) +125 (the number of requested addition balls) = 175 and the balance = 500 are backed up. In this way, the balance consumption is decided by the CU alone when the lending operation is performed. Next, CU is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, it is displayed on the display 312 that it is in the process of deducting 125 balls from the balance and adding to the game balls.

  Then, the CU transmits a command of presence of addition, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, number of requested addition balls = 125, and number of required subtraction balls = 0 to the P-unit as an operation instruction. In P units that have received it, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display control command including display ON and add required ball number = 125 included in the command of the operation instruction to the effect control board 53 for display Do. In response to that, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen in which the number of gaming balls = 125 is being added.

  Next, the P unit backs up SQN = n + 2, the number of pre-addition balls = 0, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 0, the number of front start openings (1) = 0, and the number of front start openings (2) = 0. After creating the response, clear each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) to 0 The number of gaming balls is updated to the value of 175 which is added by = 125.

  Then, as an operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, number of game balls = 175, balance = 500, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings (1) number of times = 0, starting opening (2) Responses of the number of times = 0, game available, prize off, and definite off are returned.

  In the CU that received it, SQN = n + 3, gaming ball number = 175 (pre-update gaming ball number) + 0 (addition required ball number)-0 (subtracted ball number) = 175 to calculate and backup Cumulative total = 0, Subtractive ball number cumulative = 0, starting opening (1) totaling = 0, and starting opening (2) totaling = 0 backup.

  As described above, unlike the determination of the balance consumption, the determination of the number of game balls is made to wait for the response of the operation response from the P's.

  In addition, in the P unit, when the command of the operation instruction including the addition presence and the number of requested addition balls is received, the addition is the same without distinguishing the consumption of balls (replay of balls) and the consumption of the prepaid balance. Execute the subsequent processing in the sequence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the process at the time of the replay which consumes a ball will be described. In FIG. 25, the stored balls identified by the inserted recording medium (member's card etc.) are “1000”, and the initial game balls are in the “0” state. The process of replaying in FIG. 25 is similar to the process of consuming the balance shown in FIG. On the CU side, SQN = n + 2 when the replay button 319 is pressed in a state where a game recording medium (member's card etc.) owned by the player is inserted and there is a ball identified by the card. , The number of game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) + 125 (number of required addition balls) = 125, and the balls = 875 are backed up. Reservoir ball = 875 becomes 875 at 1000-125, because the initial ball storage ball = 1000 to 125 (number of required addition balls) is withdrawn. This is because while the balance in the case of FIG. 24 is data of money unit, since the balls of FIG. 25 are data of ball number, it is sufficient to simply subtract 1000-125.

  Then, the CU transmits a command including “with addition”, “in addition display ON”, “SQN = n + 2”, “number of requested addition balls” = 125, “stored balls” = 875, and “required number of subtraction balls” = 0 to P as operation instructions. In P units that have received it, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display control command including display ON and add required ball number = 125 included in the command of the operation instruction to the effect control board 53 for display Do. In response to that, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen in which the number of gaming balls = 125 is being added.

  The other processes are similar to the process of FIG. As described above, the consumption of balls is determined on the CU side alone when the re-play button 319 is pressed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P-unit, and the number of balls (also the number of balls) The same) waits for the response of the operation response from P units to determine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the process of subtracting the number of gaming balls (wagon service etc.) according to the instruction on the CU side will be described. In the game arcade, a wagon service of consuming game balls owned by a player and providing drinks and the like to the player is performed. When the player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display 312 and makes a wagon order, whereby the order content ordered by the player is infrared rays from the IR photosensitive unit 320 of the card unit 3 It is input as a signal to the remote control possessed by the store clerk at the game arcade.

  The salesclerk of the game arcade performs the wagon service according to the order contents input to the remote control. FIG. 26 shows a case in which a wagon order that consumes the number of used game balls "300" occurs with "1000" of game balls owned by the player. When a wagon order occurs, the CU performs processing to back up “300”, which is the number of used balls of the game ball accompanying the wagon order occurrence, as SQN = n + 2, the required number of added balls = 0, and the required number of subtraction balls. At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the game balls, but merely backs up "300" as the required number of balls for subtraction. Then, from the CU to the P unit, the commands of presence of subtraction, ON during subtraction, SQN = n + 2, number of requested addition balls = 0, and required number of subtraction request balls = 300 are transmitted as operation instructions. Then, the CU causes the display 312 to display a display (during display) indicating that subtraction is in progress (not shown).

  Upon receiving the command, the P unit determines whether the value of the game ball counter stored in itself is equal to or greater than the number required for subtraction. This determination is performed by the payout control unit 17. In FIG. 26, it is assumed that the value of the game ball counter is greater than or equal to the number required for subtraction. In the P unit, the payout control section 17 receives a command of operation instruction including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, thereby controlling display including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300. The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display. In response to that, the effect control substrate for display 53 displays (under subtraction display) on the display 54 that 300 balls are being subtracted as a game ball.

  Next, the P unit backs up SQN = n + 3, number of pre-addition balls = 0, number of pre-subtraction balls = 0, number of previous start openings (1) = 0 and number of previous start openings (2) = 0 and addition The value of each counter of the number of balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0. Then, the number of gaming balls is updated to “700” obtained by subtracting the number of subtraction balls = 300 from the current number of gaming balls 1000 according to the number of subtraction required balls = 300.

  Then, from P unit to CU, as operation response, subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, current number of game balls = 700, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, starting opening (1) number of times = 0, starting opening (2) The number of times = 0, the game is possible, the special award OFF, and the definite variation OFF response are sent back.

  Then, in the CU, SQN = n + 3, gaming ball number = 1000 (pre-update gaming ball number) −300 (subtraction required ball number) +0 (additional ball number) −0 (subtraction ball number) = 700, and gaming ball Correct the number to "700" and back up. As described above, the subtraction of the number of game balls is decided only after waiting for the response of the operation response from P units.

  In addition, the CU backs up the total addition ball number = 0, the subtraction total ball number = 0, the starting opening (1) totaling = 0, and the starting opening (2) totaling = 0.

  On the other hand, when the P unit determines that the value of the game ball counter stored in itself is less than the subtraction request number, the P unit does not execute the subtraction of the game ball number according to the subtraction request number. . Also, in this case, the P-unit sends back an operation response of subtraction refusal ON as an operation response to the CU. Thereby, the CU is notified that the subtraction of the game ball based on the subtraction request has not been performed because the P unit has refused the subtraction request.

  As described above, as described with reference to FIG. 25, the subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU is determined only after waiting for the response of the operation response from P units. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 24, the storage (ball-bearing) consumption based on the instruction of the CU is determined when the CU receives the ball-consumption consumption.

  As described above, the reason why the settling time is made different between “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of CU” and “consumption of balls (balls having balls) based on the instruction of CU” is as follows.

  At the stage when CU received subtraction processing of the number of game balls such as wagon order etc, although there was allowance in the number of game balls, although the subtraction instruction was sent, the game ball is used for the game when P unit received the subtraction instruction As a result, the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction instruction may not be left.

  In such a case, if the subtraction is determined based on the number of gaming balls stored in the CU when the CU accepts the subtraction processing, the number of gaming balls actually remains on the gaming machine side. Nevertheless, the subtraction will be determined and a contradiction will occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of CU" is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P-unit.

  On the other hand, "consumed ball (consumed ball) consumption based on the instruction of CU" is an instruction to add the number of game balls, so when the instruction reaches P, P stores Even if the number of game balls fluctuates, there is no problem in adding the game balls corresponding to the addition instruction. For this reason, from the viewpoint of speeding up the processing, the “conserved ball (ball-bearing) consumption based on the instruction of the CU” is determined when the CU receives the ball (congested ball) consumption.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, processing when a big hit occurs during the game will be described. In FIG. 27, the initial number of game balls is 1010, and while an operation instruction and an operation response are being transmitted / received between P units and CUs in a game, a definite variation big hit occurs, and the said big hit It is shown that the probability change occurrence probability has improved and the probability change started after the end of the control.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n is backed up, and a command of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to P units. In the P unit that received it, SQN = n + 1, pre-additional ball number = 3, pre-subtraction ball number = 13, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 1, and pre-start opening (2) number of times = 1 The game ball number is calculated as 1010 + 3 (additional ball number) -13 (subtractive ball number) = 1000, and the number of game balls is updated to 1000. Furthermore, after creating the response, each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0.

  And, P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 1000, the number of addition balls = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, the number of starting openings (2) = 1, Send responses to the CU that the game is possible, the special award OFF, and the definite variation OFF. Thus, the P unit transmits not only the number of subtracted balls and the number of added balls but also the number of game balls to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether the number of gaming balls stored in the P unit matches the number of gaming balls managed in the CU.

  In the P unit in the present embodiment, as described above, since 100 pachinko balls are shot into the game area 27 in one minute, one pachinko ball is hit in the game area in 0.6 seconds. It will Then, since the command / response is transmitted at an interval of 200 ms, the subtraction ball number from the transmission of the previous response to the transmission of the current response is 0 or 1. Therefore, the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P unit to the CU is also 0 or 1. However, if the number of subtraction balls is set to such a small value, the number of gaming balls does not change so much, resulting in a processing flow that is difficult to understand. Therefore, in the drawing of the processing flow in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the number of subtraction balls and the change in the number of addition balls as needed are largely described.

  In the CU that receives the response of the operation response, calculate the number of game balls = 10 10 + 3-13 = 1000 and back up that 1000 as the number of game balls, and add the total number of added balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 13, start opening Back up (1) Cumulative = 1 and Start opening (2) Cumulative = 1

  While repeatedly executing transmission and reception of the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response, a probability change big hit occurs in the P unit, and the ball related information is the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, The number of subtracted balls = 20, the number of start openings (1) = 2, and the number of start openings (2) = 2. And a definite change starts after the big hit ends in P units. In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, back up SQN = n + 3 and back up the number of pre-addition balls = 120, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 20, the number of front start openings (1) = 2 and the number of front start openings (2) = 2 At the same time, the number of gaming balls = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100 is calculated, and the number of gaming balls is updated to 1100. Furthermore, after creating a response, each counter value of the number of addition balls, the number of subtraction balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0.

  And as for the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 1100, the number of added balls = 120, the number of subtracted balls = 20, the number of starting openings (1) = 2 the number of starting openings (2) = 2 Send the response of the game available, the special award ON, and the special award ON to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3 and the number of gaming balls = 1000 + 120-20 = 1100, corrects the number of gaming balls to its 1100 and backs up, and adds the number of added balls = 120, total number of subtracted balls Back up = 20, start port (1) cumulative = 2 and start port (2) cumulative = 2 Also, the CU detects that the "special award" has started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a process in the case where it is detected that a game ball is lost while playing a game on P units will be described. Assuming that the initial game ball number is 20, the CU backs up SQN = n, and transmits commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n to the P units as operation instructions. In the P unit, SQN = n + 1, number of pre-addition balls = 3, number of pre-subtraction balls = 18, number of front start openings (1) = 1, and number of front start openings (2) = 1. Then, after creating the response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) are cleared to 0.

  And, P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 5, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 18, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, the number of starting openings (2) = 1, Send responses to the CU that the game is possible, the special award OFF, and the definite variation OFF. In the CU, SQN = n + 1, game ball number = 20 + 3-18 = 5 is calculated, and then the game ball number is corrected and backed up, and addition ball number cumulative total = 3, subtraction ball number total accumulation = 18, starting opening ( 1) Back up the cumulative total = 0 and the starting opening (2) cumulative total = 0. After that, in the P unit, the number of subtraction balls = 5, so the number of gaming balls = 5-5 = 0 is calculated and the number of gaming balls = 0, so the number of addition balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0 , The number of start openings (2) changes to 0. At the stage when the number of game balls becomes 0, in the P-unit, no ball is detected, and the payout control unit 17 automatically stops the driving of the ball firing motor to prohibit the game from being able to hit the balls in the game area. Control to the state. It should be noted that the variable display is continued if the variable display device is already displaying the variable display only at the stage where the batting launch is stopped. Further, when the start stop (1) or the start opening (2) has a start memory at the stage of performing the firing stop control, the variable display control of the variable display device based on the memory is continued.

  In the CU, SQN = n + 2 is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2 are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, back up SQN = n + 3 and back up the number of pre-addition balls = 0, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 5, the number of front start openings (1) = 0, and the number of front start openings (2) = 0, After creating the response, each counter value of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1) and the number of starting openings (2) is cleared to 0.

  And as for the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 0, the number of addition balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 5, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, the number of starting openings (2) = 0 Send responses to the CU that the game is possible, the special award OFF, and the definite variation OFF.

  The CU receives it, calculates the number of gaming balls = 5 + 0-5 = 0, corrects the number of gaming balls to 0 and backs up, and adds up the number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 5, start opening (1) Correct the total number to 1 and the starting opening (2) Total number to 0.

  As described above, the main control of the number of game balls is performed by CU, but only when performing game prohibition control (fire stop control) accompanying the fact that the number of game balls has become 0 in P, It is determined that the number of game balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (fire stop control) is performed. Thereafter, as an operation response, final ball related information is transmitted to the CU, and the final game ball number “0” is determined on the CU side. The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to carry out the hitting and firing stop control at the moment when the number of gaming balls becomes zero on the P-unit side.

  For example, on the CU side which mainly manages the number of game balls, the reception of the response of the operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from P side becomes 0 becomes Wait, the final game ball number is calculated on the CU side and it becomes 0, thereby transmitting the command of the operation instruction with the prohibition request for prohibiting the game to the P side, and receiving it In the case where the ball launch stop control is performed on the P platform side for the first time, there is a possibility that the pachinko ball is fired and fired during response and command transmission and reception, and a new subtraction ball number may be generated during that time. On the side, despite the fact that the number of game balls has already become “0”, there arises a disadvantage that a new number of subtraction balls is generated and eventually the number of game balls becomes negative. In order to prevent such an inconvenience, control is performed based on the number of game balls on the P-unit side only when hitting ball firing stop control is performed when the number of game balls becomes zero.

  As described above, since the game control represented by the hit firing stop control is performed based on the number of game balls stored in the P unit itself, this is performed based on the number of game balls managed and stored in the CU. Compared to the case where such game control is performed, game control in accordance with the fluctuation of the number of game balls can be performed in real time.

  Here, although an example is shown in which the payout control unit 17 performs the hitting and firing stop control, the main control board 16 may be configured to perform the hitting and firing stop control.

  In this case, for example, the payout control unit 17 transmits, to the main control board 16, a signal indicating that the number of gaming balls is zero when the number of gaming balls is determined to be zero. In response to this signal, the main control board 16 prohibits driving of the hitting and firing motor (not shown).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the process when there is a card return operation will be described. In the state where the number of gaming balls is initially 500, the operation instruction from CU to P, and in response to the operation response from P to CU in response, CU is pressed when return button 322 is pressed, CU is As a next operation instruction, a command of prohibition request existence for inhibiting the game, clear request nothing, clear display OFF, SQN = n + 2 is transmitted to the P-unit. In the P-unit, in accordance with the instruction of the prohibition request included in the command, the driving of the hitting and firing motor (not shown) is stopped to control the hitting and firing state. Thereafter, a weight of 15 seconds is provided in consideration of the time until the already fired balls flow down in the game area 27 and flow to all out balls, that is, the floating ball processing waiting time. Polling is continued between the P unit and the CU during the 15-second wait time. As the operation response during the wait time, the P unit is prohibited refusal OFF, SQN = n + N, number of gaming balls = 500, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings (1) number of times = 0, starting opening ( 2) Send the response of the number of times = 0, game prohibited, game completed OFF, special award OFF, and definite variation OFF to the CU. As an operation instruction during the wait time, the CU transmits no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, and SQN = n + N + 1 to P units.

  Then, as a response after 15 seconds, P is SQN = n + N + 2, the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, the starting opening (2 ) Send the operation response of the number of times = 0, game prohibited, game completed ON, premium OFF, and definite variation OFF to the CU. The "game completion ON" has a role as initialization enable information indicating that information for instructing initialization of the number of game balls can be received in P units. In addition, the number of game balls transmitted at this time is the final number of game balls at the end of the game. Note that this sequence example shows the case where neither the number of added balls nor the number of subtracted balls change due to the floating balls. If a prize is generated by a floating ball or if a foul ball is generated, the number of payouts or the number of balls according to the prize is transmitted to the CU as the “number of additional balls”.

  Upon receiving the response of the operation response, the CU detects game completion, and backs up SQN = n + N + 3 and the data with clear request. Furthermore, according to "the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of starting openings (1), the number of starting openings (2)" included in the operation response, the stored "number of gaming balls, total number of added balls, total number stored" The data on the number of balls subtracted, the starting opening (1) total winning number, the starting opening (2) total winning number are updated. By this, the number of game balls at the end of the game is decided on the CU side. As described above, since the final number of game balls is determined on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the P base side, and the cost of the P base can be suppressed as much as possible.

  Then, the CU transmits a command including the clear request present, the clear display ON, and the SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units as the operation instruction. Thereafter, the CU causes the display 312 to display a display (during clear display) indicating that the display is being cleared (not shown). The "clear request" is data for instructing initialization of the number of game balls on P units.

  In the P unit, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display control command including ON during clear display included in the command transmitted from the CU to the effect control substrate 53 for display. In response to that, the effect control board 53 for a display causes the display 54 to display a display screen (screen in clear display) which is being cleared.

  In this example, the CU determines the number of game balls at the end of the game in response to the input of the “signal requesting the end of the game” based on the operation of the return button 322. However, the “signal requesting the end of the game” is not limited to the signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, the CU is provided with a fingerprint authentication unit that authenticates the player's fingerprint. At the start of the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is mandatory, and that the fingerprint information specified by the gaming card inserted in the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit. Allow the game as a condition. Furthermore, at the end of the game, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal requesting the end of the game” is fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

  In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire gaming machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, the “game end request” is configured by the game end request signal input from the server.

  It returns to the explanation of FIG. The P units receiving the command of clear request existence, clear display, and SQN = n + N + 3 shift and store the game history data currently updated and stored in the storage area to the backup area.

  Next, the P unit, as an operation response, clear rejection of not rejecting the clear request OFF, SQN = 0, number of gaming balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of starting openings (1) = 0, start opening (2) number of times 0, game prohibited, game completed ON, special prize OFF, and a response of definite variation OFF to the CU. Then, the CU backs up SQN = 0, game ball = 0, and ball = 500. The number of balls = 500 is a value obtained by adding 500, which is the number of gaming balls received immediately before the clearing request, to the balls.

  Thereafter, the CU records ball = 500 on the inserted card, discharges it, and returns it to the player. Then, a command including SQN = m is transmitted to the P-unit as the operation instruction, including no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, and SQN = m. After that, the P unit has SQN = m + 1, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, the number of starting openings (2) = 0 as operation response. Send the response of the game prohibition, the game completion ON, the special award OFF and the definite variation OFF to the CU. The points of the card may not be recorded directly on the card, but the upper server may store the points in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored by the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server, and the points stored in association with the card number received by the upper server Is searched, and the point is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. After that, the CU ejects the card. As described above, both recording the points of the card directly on the card and storing the points in correspondence with the card number in the upper-level server are collectively referred to as “correlating” the points to the card. Do. Also, a configuration may be employed in which the upper server stores the points in association with the card number of the card and records the points of the card directly on the card.

  In FIG. 23, although the thing which provided the weight of 15 seconds for floating ball processing waiting time was shown by P stand side, in addition to that in P stand side, the number of firing balls-number of balls-number of balls out-winning The number of balls may be determined to be 0, or the number of fired balls-number of far balls-number of detected balls by the out ball detection switch may be determined to be 0, and it may be determined that the processing of floating balls is completed. It may be determined that the processing of the floating balls is finished when the earlier condition of such determination and the lapse of 15 seconds is satisfied, and the game completion may be turned on. Furthermore, when the game completion is turned ON based on the lapse of 15 seconds, the CU receiving the game completion ON will time out when, for example, 20 seconds have elapsed from the card return operation etc., and the card ejection process is executed. Good. In addition, when the game completion is turned on based on the passage of 15 seconds, or when the card ejection process is performed when 20 seconds have elapsed, the number of fired balls-number of balls-number of balls-number of prize balls 所 定 predetermined threshold value Or, it may be executed on condition that the number of fired balls−the number of far balls−the number of balls detected by the out ball detection switch ≦ predetermined threshold value.

  FIG. 30 is a view showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when interrupting the game.

  Similar to the processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when returning the card in FIG. 23, the difference is that an interruption operation is performed instead of pressing the return button. This interruption operation is an operation for temporarily interrupting the game in order for the player to finish the small use, and the player calls a store clerk in the game arcade to have the store clerk perform remote control operation for the game interruption. Then, the IR light receiving unit 315 receives an infrared signal output from the remote control, converts it into an electronic signal, and inputs it to the main control unit 323. Further, in the case of this game interruption processing, even if the CU detects the game completion, the clear request is not transmitted to the P-unit. As a result, in the P unit, data (C-ID, the number of game balls, etc.) regarding the interrupted player is stored and held. When the CU ejects a card, the CU ejects the point 0 card and returns it to the player. Thereafter, while the game is suspended, the other players are prohibited from playing games (see FIG. 23).

  A process when the lock of the glass door 6 is released and opened will be described with reference to FIG. First, as the first operation instruction, a command including an instruction of no glass open request without a glass door open request is transmitted from the CU to the P unit. Upon receiving it, the P unit returns a normal response including the number of gaming balls = 500 to the CU as an operation response. At this stage, for example, when a problem such as pachinko balls thrown into the game area 27 in P units is caught on the game board surface, and the player calls a staff in the game arcade, the staff in the game arcade holds The remote controller is operated to release the lock of the glass door 6 and transmit an infrared signal to the IR photosensitive unit 320 for opening it. The IR photosensitive unit 320 having received the signal inputs a glass door open instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the main control unit 323. Upon receiving the instruction to open the glass door, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a prohibition request existence for stopping the game, no glass opening request, and a command of SQN = n + 2 to P units. In other words, in order to perform the shot-off control on the P-unit before actually opening the glass door 6, an operation instruction with prohibition request and no glass-opening request is sent to the P-unit.

  In response to that, the P-unit stops driving of the hitting and firing motor (not shown) to control to be in the firing and non-shot state. Next, the P unit sends back to the CU a response including the prohibition refusal OFF indicating that the gaming prohibition is not rejected and the gaming prohibition data indicating that the gaming prohibition state has been made as the operation response.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after transmitting the command of the operation instruction including the above-mentioned prohibition request to the P car, the time until all the balls fired to the game area 27 in the P car flow to the out ball and are collected In consideration of the ball processing waiting time, a weight of 10 seconds is provided, and during this time, the CU transmits a command including an instruction of game prohibition, that is, prohibition request existence to the P unit to continue polling.

  Then, when a wait time of 10 seconds has elapsed, a command including an instruction to open the glass door 6 for releasing the lock of the glass door 6 and to open the door as an operation instruction is transmitted to the P-unit.

  In P which received it, while exciting the glass door open solenoid, the lock of the glass door 6 is released and the glass door 6 is opened, the bit in the glass door development life is turned ON, and thereafter the glass door 6 It remains on (until a detection signal from the glass door closure detector 12 is input) until it is closed. Then, the P unit sends back to the CU a response including a response such as glass open rejection OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, game prohibition, and glass development in progress as an operation response.

  The CU determines that the glass door 6 has been opened if it is not rejected for the command of the glass open request, that is, if a response including a response of glass open rejection ON is not returned. After that, a command including no glass open request is transmitted to the P-unit as an operation instruction.

  FIG. 32 shows a modification of the glass door opening process shown in FIG. The difference compared to the process of FIG. 31 is that when the instruction input to open the glass door is detected in the CU, not only there is a prohibition request to instruct the game prohibition request but also the lock of the glass door 6 is released It is a point that a command of glass open request having a release request is transmitted to the P-unit. In response to this command, the P unit stops driving of the hit ball firing motor (not shown) to control to stop hitting ball, and until all balls fired to the game area 27 flow to the out ball and are collected. The weight of 10 seconds is provided in consideration of the time of floating ball processing, ie, floating ball processing waiting time. During the wait time of 10 seconds, the CU and the P unit continue to transmit and receive the operation instruction / operation response. Then, when the weight time of 10 seconds has elapsed, the glass door opening solenoid is excited to release the lock of the glass door 6 and the glass door 6 is opened. Then, the bit under development of the glass door is turned on, and thereafter it is kept on until the glass door 6 is closed (until a detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is input).

  And as for the operation response, the P unit has a glass open refusal OFF that does not refuse the opening of the glass door, a game prohibition indicating that the ball is in the ball shooting suspension state, and the lock is released and the glass door is open. Send a response to the CU that includes data on glass development and so on.

  The CU determines that the glass door 6 has been opened by receiving the operation response of the glass open rejection OFF.

  As described above, the modification shown in FIG. 32 is characterized in that the weight process of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball process waiting time is executed not on the CU side but on the P side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the process of releasing and releasing the lock of the cell (front frame) 5 will be described. In the opening process of the cell (front frame) 6, the same process as the opening process of the glass door 6 shown in FIG. 31 is performed. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  If the staff of the game arcade operates the remote control to release the lock of the front frame (cell) 5 to open it, the remote control outputs an infrared ray including a cell open command signal to the IR photosensitive unit 320. Be done. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 outputs a cell open command signal to the main control unit 323. As a result, in CU, it is determined that an instruction input to open a cell for opening a cell is detected. Then, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command including data on prohibition request existence for prohibiting a game and cell open request nothing to P units. In the P unit, in response to that, the driving of the ball hitting and firing motor is stopped to control the ball to be in the ball hitting and stopping state.

  In the CU, a weight of 10 seconds is provided in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and when the 10 seconds of the waiting time is over, cell open request data is issued which is an instruction to release the cell lock and release it. Send the included command to P units. In the P car which received it, the front frame open solenoid is energized to release the lock of the front frame 5 and the front frame 5 is opened. Then, the bit in the cell development is turned on, and thereafter it is kept on until the cell is closed (until the detection signal from the front frame closing detector is input).

  And, P unit, as the operation response, the cell open refusal OFF which does not refuse the open request of the cell, the game prohibition which shows that it is in the ball hitting suspension state, the cell development live etc which shows that the cell is being opened etc Send response including data to CU.

  If the CU does not reject the cell open request, that is, if a response including the cell open rejection OFF is returned, the CU determines that the cell is opened.

  In the process of opening the cell shown in FIG. 33, as in the modification shown in FIG. 32, the function of providing a weight of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time is provided on the P side. When a command to open a cell is detected, the CU sends a command including a command to prohibit and a command to open a cell to the P unit, and the P unit receives that command and performs batting ball launch prohibition control. After that, the action instruction / action response is continued with a 10-second wait period CU and P units, and when the 10-second wait time elapses, the front frame open solenoid is controlled to excite and lock the front frame 5 It may be released and released, and then a cell open rejection OFF, and a response including data under development of a cell may be transmitted to the CU.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, according to the present embodiment, the closed state of the glass door or cell, which is a specific example of the front member of P units, is released without affecting the game progress. It becomes possible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a process when power is turned on while the CU is holding the card and an abnormality in which P units are not connected at that time occurs will be described. Since the communication between the CU and the P unit occurred while the card was inserted and playing a game on the P unit, at the stage where the power supply of the CU was restarted, the command of the recovery request is P units from the CU Sent to. However, because there are P unconnected failures, the response from P is not sent back to CU. Then, the CU resends the recovery request command to P units. If no response is returned from the unit P despite that, the second recovery request is resent to the unit P. If no response is returned from the P unit in response to the second retransmission, the CU determines that the communication is abnormal at this stage, and displays an indication that an error has occurred due to the non-connection from the display 312. Control for turning on or blinking the alarm lamp while performing control to Note that instead of the recovery request, a device information request command may be transmitted.

  In this state, when the game store clerk remotely operates the CU to output an infrared signal for forcibly discharging the inserted card to the IR photosensitive unit 320, the forced discharge signal is sent to the main control unit 323. It is input. In response to this, the CU adds the "number of game balls" backed up in the CU to the "bearing balls" of the inserted card, and clears the "number of game balls" "connection time" of the CU to 0. Then, an instruction to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer. The card reader / writer that has received it ejects the card being taken. The points of the card may not be recorded directly on the card, but the upper server may store the points in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored by the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server, and the points stored in association with the card number received by the upper server Is searched, and the point is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. After that, the CU ejects the card.

  A manual ejection mechanism may be provided which manually ejects the card when the CU fails.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a recovery request command to P units to perform restart processing of the connection sequence (see FIG. 21). The CU determines that the connection sequence resumes with the card inserted (in a state other than standby), and executes the connection sequence for reconnection shown in FIG. 21 instead of the connection sequence shown for power on in FIG. Do. The number of addition balls (for example, j) or the number of subtraction balls from the occurrence of P unconnected failures to the restart of the connection sequence (see FIG. 21) and transmission of the first operation response by P. The process when the number (for example, r) is generated is performed in the restart process of FIG. Referring to FIG. 21, the CU receives the recovery response from P units, thereby calculating the number of gaming balls = 0 + j (number of added balls) + r (the number of subtracted balls), and the number of gaming balls as the calculation result. Back up = j + r. Then, as described in FIG. 21, the communication start request including the SQN correction ON, the game ball correction ON, and the SQN value and the game ball value is transmitted to the P units, and the P SQNs and the number of game balls And make corrections.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, processing when the operation instruction (no request operation) from the CU has not reached P units will be described.

  As described in FIG. 27 and the like, the P unit receives the command of the operation instruction from the CU, and thereby the data of the current addition subtraction ball number and the current starting opening number currently stored in the ball related information storage area. Back up the pre-addition subtract ball number and pre-start opening number in the front ball related information storage area, and clear the data of the current addition subtraction ball number and current start opening number currently stored in the ball related information storage area to 0 In the case of FIG. 35, the operation instruction from the CU has not reached P units. Therefore, the backup clear process described above is not performed on the P unit. As a result, whenever the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, and the start winning combination occur, the data is accumulated and stored as the current ball related information in the current ball related information storage area.

  First, in the state of the current number of gaming balls = 520, the CU transmits a request without request and an SQN = n command to the P-unit as an operation instruction. However, because the command does not reach P, the response from P is not sent back to CU. As a result, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to P again. If this re-transmission does not reach P, the CU retransmits a second time for the same operation instruction, because a response from P is not sent back to the CU. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n and no incremental update of "1" is performed.

  When the command reaches P in the second re-transmission, P is, as described above, the data of the number of added / subtracted balls and the number of starting openings as the ball related information until the arrival of the operation instruction. It is cumulatively stored as Then, using the accumulated number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of gaming balls at the current time = 520 + 6-36 = 490 is calculated, and as an operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = The response of the operation response of 490, the number of addition balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings (2) = 1 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates a game ball number = 520 + 6 (additional ball number) −36 (subtractive ball number) = 490, and performs processing of correcting and storing the game ball number in the 490.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, processing in the case where the operation response (response to no request operation) from P units has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 36, the backup clear process described above is executed because the command from the CU is input to P, but the value of SQN of the command transmitted from the CU to P next time Since (= n) is the same as the previous SQN value (= n), the P-unit judges that the response of the operation response transmitted to the CU is retransmission due to the fact that the response to the CU has not reached CU, and The current addition subtraction ball number as the current ball related information and the current start opening number are accumulated and added to the data without clearing the data of the pre-addition subtraction ball number and the number of front start openings which are the ball related information.

  Specifically, with the current number of gaming balls = 520, the CU first transmits a request of no request as an operation instruction and a command of SQN = n to P units. In the P unit that received it, the above-mentioned backup clear processing is performed to calculate the current number of gaming balls = 520-13 + 3 = 510, back up the number of gaming balls = 510, back up SQN = n + 1, The data of the current addition subtraction ball number and the current starting opening number are backed up and stored in the pre-addition subtraction ball number and the front starting opening number, and a command of operation response is created and the current addition subtraction ball number and current starting as current ball related information Clear the data of the number of mouths to 0. Further, the current number of game balls 510 is included in the data of the response of the operation response. And as for the P unit, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 510, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings (2) = 0 Send the response of to CU.

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as the previous one, that is, no request, a command of SQN = n to P units.

  On P units that received it, the response of the operation response sent does not reach the CU, because the SQN received this time is the value (= n) that precedes the SQ N (= n + 1) being backed up. It is judged that it is a retransmission due to the current addition, and the current addition subtraction ball number as current ball related information for these data without clearing the previous addition subtraction ball number as the ball related information and the data of the number of front starting openings Accumulate and backup data of the current number of starting openings. As a result, the number of pre-addition balls = 3 + 3 = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 13 + 8 = 21, the number of front starting openings (1) = 1 + 0 = 1, and the number of front starting openings (2) = 0 + 1 = 1. After creating the response of the operation response consisting of these data, the data of the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current number of starting openings are cleared to zero. Then, as an operation response, the P unit has SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 505, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 21, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings = 1. Send response to CU. However, since this response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits a command of the same operation instruction (no request, SQN = n) to P units again.

  In P that has received it, the response of the operation response has reached CU, judging that the value of SQN received this time is the value (= n) immediately before the SQ N (= n + 1) being backed up It detects that there is no retransmission. As a result, in the P unit, the cumulative addition storage for the previous ball related information is performed as described above, and the response of the operation response is created and sent back to the CU. Specifically, the response of SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 485, the number of added balls = 12, the number of subtraction balls = 47, the number of starting openings (1) = 2, the number of starting openings (2) = 2 as an operation response Send to CU.

  Since the response of this operation response has reached CU, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520 + 12−47 = 485, and performs processing of correcting and storing the data of the gaming balls in 485.

  As described above, when the operation response transmitted earlier does not reach the CU, the P unit retransmits the unreached operation response and then transmits the next operation response instead of transmitting the next operation response. The information after adding up is sent as the next operation response. As a result, in the gaming apparatus, information on the number of gaming balls and the number of starting opening winnings can be collected reliably and efficiently. In the example of FIG. 36, although the case where the operation response from P units has not been reached once has been described, if the operation response has not been reached twice, the operation response transmitted for the third time is The sum of the information of the operation response transmitted for the second time is included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, processing when the operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached P will be described. It is assumed that the number of gaming balls at the current time is 520, the number of required additions when there is a withdrawal operation from the stored balls replay or the prepaid balance is 125, and the CU first requests addition, SQN = n, and A command including data on the number of requested addition balls = 125 is transmitted to P units. However, because the command does not reach P, the response from P is not sent back to CU. As a result, as described above, the CU retransmits the same operation command. Since the re-transmission command has not reached P, the corresponding response from P is not sent to the CU. Thus, as described above, the CU retransmits the second time for the command with the same operation instruction. The second retransmission command reaches P units. In the non-arriving period of the command of the operation instruction from the CU, addition and subtraction data and the starting opening number are added to the current addition subtraction number of balls and the current starting opening number as current ball related information Accumulate count data and store it.

  Then, the P unit calculates the current number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 (number of requested addition balls) +6 (the number of currently added balls) -36 (the number of currently subtracted balls) = 615, and sets the current number of gaming balls data to 615, Create response of operation response. Specifically, the P unit, as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 615, number of balls added = 6, number of balls subtracted = 36, number of starting openings (1) = 1, and starting Send a response of mouth (2) times = 1 to the CU.

  In response to that, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 + 6-36 = 615, corrects the number of gaming ball data, and stores it in 615.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, processing in the case where the operation response (response to the addition request) from the P units has not been reached will be described. In the case where the initial game ball number is 520, an operation to play the game is performed from the stored ball replay or the prepaid balance as withdrawal, and the case where the 125 ball number addition request is generated will be described. First, the CU transmits a command of addition request existence, SQN = n, and the number of addition request balls = 125 to P as an operation instruction. The P unit that has received it has the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, the number of starting openings (2) = 0, and SQN = n + 1 as current ball related information. Is backed up to the ball related information storage area last time, and the number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 + 3-13 = 635 is calculated and the number of gaming balls = 635 is stored.

  Then, after creating a response of the operation response, the P unit clears the stored data of the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 635, number of balls added A response of 3 = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings (2) = 0 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command as the previous one to the P units. At the time of re-transmission, SQN of the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to P units without updating SQN by adding "1".

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) preceding to the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although it is detected that transmission is performed, although the requested number of added balls = 125 is included in the received command, addition updating of the game balls based on the command is not performed. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  In addition, in the P unit, since the command retransmission detection is performed, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area as in the process of FIG. The stored data, ie, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, and the number of starting openings (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the game ball number = 635 + 3-8 = 630 is calculated, and the game ball number is corrected to 630 and stored.

  After that, the P creates a response of the operation response. Specifically, as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 630, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 21, number of starting openings (1) = 1, and starting opening (2) Send 1 to the CU as a response.

  Since this response has not reached the CU, the CU retransmits the second time for the command of the same operation instruction.

  In the P unit, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and while the addition request ball number 125 is received, addition update is not performed, and double execution of addition update according to the addition request is not performed. Then, in the same manner as described above, after performing cumulative storage in the ball related information storage area last time, calculation of the number of gaming balls, generation of response, and clearing 0 of the current ball related information storage area, addition refusal OFF, SQN as operation response. A response of n = 1, the number of game balls = 610, the number of addition balls = 12, the number of subtraction balls = 47, the number of starting openings (1) = 2, and the number of starting openings (2) = 2 is transmitted to the CU. Since this response has reached CU, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520 + 125 + 12−47 = 610, corrects the number of gaming balls to 610, and stores it.

  As described above, in the P unit, even when the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the value one previous to the SQN (= n + 1) that the SQN received this time backs up In the case of = n, it is determined that it is re-transmission, and it is not determined that it is an additional addition request, and addition update of the game ball is not performed, and double execution of addition update according to the addition request is performed. Absent.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, processing when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU does not reach P will be described. A case will be described where the initial game ball number = 520, and a wagon order or the like generates a 300 ball subtraction request. First, the CU transmits a command of subtraction request existence, SQN = n, and subtraction request ball number = 300 to P as an operation instruction. However, since the command did not reach P, a response from P is not sent back to CU. Therefore, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to P again. The response from the P unit is not sent back to the CU because the re-send command also did not reach the P unit. Therefore, the CU retransmits the second time for the command with the same operation instruction. This second retransmission command reaches P units.

  In the P unit, while the command of the operation instruction from the CU is not reached yet, as in the process of FIG. 35, each time the addition / subtraction ball number and the start winning are generated, those data are accumulated and stored in the current ball related information storage area Do. Then, at the stage when the command of the second operation instruction is input to the P unit, the game ball = 520-300 + 6-36 = 190 is calculated, and the game ball = 190 is stored. Then, as the operation response, subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 190, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings (1) = 1, and number of starting openings (2) = 1 Send the response of to CU.

  In response to that, the CU calculates game ball = 520-300 + 6-36 = 190, corrects the game ball in the 190, and stores it.

  As described above, when performing subtraction from a game ball, the CU first transmits an operation instruction command including data of the subtraction request presence and the subtraction request ball number to the P unit, and a response as an operation response to it is Wait for the response to the CU, and subtract the subtraction requirement from the game ball. Although the main management function to manage the current game balls by adding / subtracting game balls is on the CU side, with respect to the game balls changing every moment with progress of the game in P unit, the CU side It is possible to calculate the current game ball by performing addition and subtraction of the game ball only after the operation response including the reply is sent back, and the period for waiting for the operation response from the P unit, the game in CU compared to the P unit. The calculation time of the ball is late. Therefore, the current game ball data on the CU side is data having a time delay with respect to the P unit, and even if the current game balls on the CU side have the same number of balls required for subtraction, the P unit side In fact, there may be no remaining game balls for the number of required subtraction balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, upon subtraction of the game balls, the CU waits for the response of the operation response from the P's and performs subtraction of the game balls for the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the process when the operation response from P (the response to the subtraction request) does not reach the CU will be described. Assuming that the initial game ball number = 520 and the subtraction required ball number = 300, the CU first transmits a command with subtraction required, SQN = n, and subtraction required ball number = 300 to the P units as operation instructions. The P unit that has received it has the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, the number of starting openings (2) = 0, and SQN = n + 1 as current ball related information. Is backed up in the previous ball related information storage area, and the number of gaming balls = 520-300 + 3-13 = 210 is calculated and the number of gaming balls = 210 is stored.

  Then, after creating a response of the operation response, the P unit clears the stored data of the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 210, number of balls added A response of 3 = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 13, the number of starting openings (1) = 1, and the number of starting openings (2) = 0 is transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command as the previous one to the P units. At the time of re-transmission, SQN of the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to P units without updating SQN by adding "1".

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) preceding to the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. It detects that it is transmission, and although the subtraction request ball number = 300 is included in the received command, subtraction update of the game ball based on the command is not performed. That is, the subtraction update according to the subtraction request is not performed twice.

  In addition, in the P unit, since the command retransmission detection is performed, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area as in the process of FIG. The stored data, ie, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, and the number of starting openings (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of gaming balls = 210 + 3-8 = 205 is calculated, and the number of gaming balls is corrected to 205 and stored.

  After that, the P creates a response of the operation response. Specifically, as the operation response, addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 205, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 21, number of starting openings (1) = 1, and starting opening (2) Send 1 to the CU as a response.

  Since this response has not reached the CU, the CU retransmits the second time for the command of the same operation instruction.

  In the P unit, the retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and while the subtraction request ball number 300 is received, the subtraction update is not performed, and the subtraction update is not performed double according to the subtraction request. Then, in the same manner as described above, after performing cumulative storage in the ball related information storage area last time, calculation of the number of gaming balls, generation of response, and clearing 0 of the current ball related information storage area, addition refusal OFF, SQN as operation response. = N + 1, game ball number = 205 + 6-26 = 185, ball number to be added = 12, subtract ball number = 47, start opening (1) times = 2 and start opening (2) times = 2 responses are sent to CU . Since this response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the number of gaming balls = 520-300 + 12-47 = 185, corrects the number of gaming balls to 185, and stores it.

  As described above, in the P unit, even when the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the value one previous to the SQN (= n + 1) that the SQN received this time backs up If it is = n, it is judged that it is re-transmission, and it is not judged that it is an additional subtraction request, and subtraction update of the game ball is not performed, and double execution of subtraction update according to the subtraction request is performed. I do not do it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a process in the case where P responds to the addition request of CU in response to the addition rejection will be described. With the initial game ball number = 520, the balance of the game recording medium (card) inserted in the CU = 1000 yen, a command of no request, SQN = n is transmitted to P as an operation instruction from the CU. . The P unit calculates the game ball = 520 + 3-23 = 500 and includes the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of balls subtracted, the number of starting openings (1), the number of starting openings (2), and data of SQN = n + 1 Send an operation response to the CU. The CU calculates the gaming ball based on the operation response and corrects it to gaming ball = 500.

  Next, the lending button 321 is pressed, and the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball number = 125 as operation instructions to P units. In the P unit, for any reason, the response of the operation response including the addition refusal ON that rejects the addition is sent back to the CU.

  Since the CU receives the operation response including the addition refusal OFF, the game ball can not be added at P, and it is determined that the game ball difference has occurred between P and CU, and the communication connection is disconnected. In order to do this, send a command for communication disconnection request to P units. Upon receiving it, the P unit returns a response to the communication disconnection response to the CU, disconnects the communication connection, and transmits a release control signal for stopping the release from the release control unit 17 to the release control board 31, The launch control board 31 having received the command stops the drive of the launch motor 18 to stop the game.

  The P unit further has, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, the number of pre-additional balls = 6, the number of pre-subtractions = 36, the number of pre-starting holes (1) = 2 and the pre-starting opening (2). Number of times = 2, current ball number as current ball number = 460, current added ball number = 3, current subtraction ball number = 13, current start opening (1) times = 1, current start opening (2) times = 1 Store the data of

  Next, after the chip ID authentication is performed between the CU and the P, transmission and reception of a recovery request command and a recovery response response are performed. In the response of this recovery response, the aforementioned recovery data stored on the P base side is transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU calculates and backs up the number of gaming balls = 595 + 3-13 = 583 according to the recovery data (the number of currently added balls = 3, the number of currently subtracted balls = 13). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the processing at the time of reconnection (connection sequence) shown in FIG. 21, and the CU transmits a command including game ball correction ON and game ball = 583 to the Ps in the communication start request. In response to this, the P unit corrects the game ball to 583. The CU determines that it is the resumption of the connection sequence after transmitting the communication disconnection request and disconnecting the communication, and executes the connection sequence upon reconnection of FIG. 21 instead of the connection sequence upon power on of FIG. Do.

  Also in the process of FIG. 41, the consumption of the balance is determined on the CU side without waiting for the response of the operation response from P, so the response including the addition refusal ON as the operation response from P is Even if it has been sent back, the balance consumption has already been settled on the CU side in the earlier stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a process in the case where P responds to a subtraction refusal response to a CU subtraction request will be described. Since the number of added balls is 3 and the number of subtracted balls is 13 at the stage when the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted / received between the CU and P one reciprocation as the initial game ball number = 520. The game ball is 520 + 3-13 = 510.

  If an order for wagon service or the like occurs at this stage and a subtraction request for 500 balls is generated, the CU issues a command for subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 500 as operation instructions. Send to the table. At the stage of receiving this command, the number of added balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36 in the P unit, and the number of gaming balls at the current time = 510 + 6-36 = 480. As a result, since the current number of gaming balls (480) is smaller than the number of subtraction required balls (500), it is not possible to meet 500 of the subtraction request. Therefore, the P unit, as an operation response, indicates subtraction refusal indicating rejection of subtraction request ON, SQN = n + 3, number of gaming balls = 480, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings (1) Send a response of 2 and the number of start openings (2) = 2 to the CU.

  In response to that, the CU calculates the game ball = 510 + 6-36 = 480 and corrects the game ball to 480. Then, subtraction refusal is detected, and processing of subtraction cancellation is performed. In the process of this subtraction cancellation, for example, a message such as “Insufficient game ball can not be subtracted” is displayed by the display unit 312.

Thereafter, polling of normal operation instructions and operation responses is performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, processing in the case where the P-unit sends back a clear rejection response in response to a CU clear instruction request will be described. When the return button 322 is pressed and operated with the initial number of game balls = 520, the CU requests the P unit as an operation instruction to prohibit the game from being prohibited and clear as in the process of FIG. Send a command including unrequested data to P units. In response to that, the unit P sends a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. Then, similarly to the processing of FIG. 23, in the P-unit, a 10-second wait is provided, and polling is continued between the P-unit and the CU during the 10-second wait.

  After that, the CU transmits a clear request existence command and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + N + 3 to P units. P that received it is clear rejection ON indicating that it can not be cleared for some reason, SQN = n + N + 4, number of game balls = 480, number of balls added = 6, number of balls subtracted = 36, number of starting openings (1) The response of the operation response of = 1 and the number of start openings (2) = 2 is transmitted to the CU. At this stage, the game ball is 480. Then, the CU detects clear rejection, transmits a command of no request and SQN = n + N + 4 as an operation instruction to the P-unit, and performs clear cancellation processing. The processing of this clear cancellation is processing such as displaying a message such as “Return operation has been canceled but can not be canceled” on the display unit 312 or the like. Thereafter, normal polling of operation instruction and operation response is performed between CU and P units.

  Referring to FIG. 44, processing in the case where the P unit sends back a response of permission rejection in response to the game permission request of the CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, and in a trouble state in which some gaming prohibition factor has occurred, the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P in a state where the gaming of P is prohibited. It is assumed that the game prohibition factor is eliminated at the stage of “game prohibition factor cancellation” in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a game permission request and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the Ps as an operation instruction. However, the P unit sends back to the CU an operation response command including an impossibility to hit the ball for some reason, that is, a game rejection ON that rejects the game permission request.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including the game permission request as an operation instruction to the P unit until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, processing in the case where the P unit sends back a prohibition rejection response in response to the game prohibition request of the CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, transmission and reception of normal operation instruction command and normal operation response response are performed between CU and P units, for example, at the stage of “prohibition of game occurrence factor” in FIG. It is assumed that a game prohibition factor such as operation of the return button 322 has occurred. At this stage, the CU transmits, to the Ps, a command of game prohibition request existence and SQN = n + 2 as an operation instruction. In the P unit, the response of the operation response including the prohibition refusal ON which rejects the game prohibition request for some reason is sent back to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition rejection, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the P as an operation instruction until the game prohibition is made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, processing in the case where the P-unit responds to the glass open request of the CU in response to the glass open request will be described. When an input of an instruction to open the glass door 6 is detected as the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 46, the CU first has a prohibition request as an operation instruction as in the process of FIG. And send the command without glass open request to P unit. In response to this, the P unit performs control to stop the driving of the ball striking motor (not shown) and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a weight of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and the CU continues polling to the P-unit with an operation instruction (no game) for 10 seconds. Then, when the weight of 10 seconds is finished, the CU transmits a command of glass open request and an operation command of SQN = n + 2 to P units. In response to this, the P unit transmits to the CU an operation response response including a glass open rejection ON that refuses to unlock and open the glass door 6 for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects a glass open rejection, transmits a command including no request as an operation instruction to the P-unit, and executes a normal open cancel after processing the glass open cancellation. The process of this glass open cancellation is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as "The glass door can not be opened" by the display unit 312 or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, processing in the case where the P-unit responds to the cell open request of the CU in response to the cell open rejection will be described. When an input of an instruction to open a cell is detected as the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. Send the open request no command to P. In response to this, the P unit performs control to stop the driving of the ball striking motor (not shown) and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a weight of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and the CU continues polling to the P-unit with an operation instruction (no game) for 10 seconds. Then, when the wait of 10 seconds is completed, the CU transmits a command of cell open request presence and an operation instruction of SQN = n + 2 to P units. In response to that, the P unit transmits to the CU an operation response response including a cell open rejection ON that refuses to unlock and release the cell for some reason.

  In response to this, the CU detects a cell open rejection, transmits a command including no request as an operation instruction to the P-unit, and executes a process of cell open cancellation and thereafter performs normal polling. The process of cell open cancellation is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “the cell can not be released” by the display unit 312 or the like.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart for explaining the deposit process. The deposit process on the CU side will be described with reference to FIG.

  As the operation instruction, the CU transmits data including P with no addition request, during deposit processing OFF, SQN = n, the number of requested addition balls = 0, and the number of requested subtraction balls = 0. As the operation response, the P unit has SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of starting openings = 0, the number of starting openings 2 = 0, the game available, the special prize OFF, Send a response including a definite change OFF to the CU.

  Here, when a bill is inserted to the CU side and money is received, the P-unit side transmits data including SQN = n + 2 and ON during payment processing. The operation response of P units is addition refusal OFF, and others become the same responses as the first operation response, and each instruction is issued from the CU side, but the response from P units is the same, and therefore the description will not be repeated. After that, when the deposit process display is finished, the CU side issues an operation instruction of the deposit process display OFF, so that the operation response corresponding thereto is transmitted from the P unit. Due to the deposit process, no addition request is made.

  FIG. 49 is a flow chart for explaining mode change (test hitting mode). The trial game mode is a mode used when adjusting the game console 2. Referring to FIG. 49, the CU transmits, to the P units, no addition, SQN = n, number of requested addition balls = 0, and required number of subtraction balls = 0, as operation instructions. Confirm that no card is inserted, and the P unit has SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of times of starting opening = 0, the number of starting openings 2 times = 0 , Data on game available, prize off, and probability off are transmitted to the CU as an operation response.

  Next, a mode change request is transmitted to the P-unit in order to set the trial hitting mode by remote control operation on the CU side. The P transmits a mode change response to the CU based on the mode change request. After that, the P units operate in the trial hitting mode until the next mode change request is made.

  During the trial run mode, the CU does not perform addition / subtraction update of the game ball. Due to that, the P-unit transmits the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, and the number of subtracted balls = 0 to the CU as an operation response.

  Next, when the adjustment of the game table 2 is completed, the CU side cancels the trial hitting mode by the remote control operation in order to change to the business mode. At the same time, a mode change request to the business mode is sent to the P unit, and the P unit returns a mode change response that has been changed to the business mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side after reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data will be described. In the state of SQN = n with the initial number of game balls = 520, the command of the operation instruction is transmitted to the P unit, and the P unit as an operation response: SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of added balls = 3, subtraction The response including the addition / subtraction data of the number of balls = 23 is transmitted to the CU. After the response reaches CU, SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 500, and if a power failure occurs in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to P units thereafter. If no command can be received after 4 seconds on the P unit, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and it shifts to the unconnected state, and stops the driving of the striking ball firing motor (not shown) to make the play stop state . Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and the game ball = 500 + 6-36 = 470 is calculated accordingly The game ball = 470 is stored.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the execution of the serial ID authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed in the same manner as the process of FIG. Does.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-additional ball number = 3, pre-subtraction ball number = 23, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 1, pre-start opening 2) Number of times = 1, Current game number of balls = 470, Current addition ball number = 6, Current subtraction ball = 36, Current starting opening (1) number = 2 number, Current starting opening (2) number = 2 is stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the communication partners are the same and both SQNs match, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 470, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start Correct the mouth (1) total = 2 and the start mouth (2) total = 2

  Next, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation instruction will be described with reference to FIG. As the initial game ball number = 520, the P unit which received the command of the operation instruction, as the operation response, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 3, the number of subtraction balls = 23, the starting opening (1 ) After sending a response to the CU with the number of times = 1 and the number of starting openings (2) = 1 and the CU accordingly correcting it to SQN = n + 2 and gaming ball = 500, the CU has no request as an operation instruction, Send a command of SQN = n + 2 to P units. If the command does not reach P and the power is cut off immediately after that, the P judges that the command has not been received for 4 seconds or more after sending the last response. Then, transition to the unconnected state is stopped, and the driving of the striking ball firing motor (not shown) is stopped to put the play stop state.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the execution of the serial ID authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed in the same manner as the process of FIG. Does.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-additional ball number = 3, pre-subtraction ball number = 23, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 1, pre-start opening 2) number of times = 1, current number of balls as current number of balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470, current addition number of balls = 6, current subtraction number of balls = 36, current start opening (1) number of times = 2, current start opening ( 2) Store the number of times = 2 and send it to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one more than the SQN on the P side, so based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Perform processing to correct the backup value. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 470, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start Correct the mouth (1) total = 2 and the start mouth (2) total = 2

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data will be described. After the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are exchanged between CU and P as the initial game ball number = 520, the command of the operation instruction of no request, SQN = n + 2 is transmitted to the P unit After that, P sets the action response as SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 470, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting openings (1) number of times = 2, starting opening (2) A response of count = 2 was sent to CU. However, when the response does not reach the CU, and the power is cut off at the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the response, the P unit receives 4 seconds after the last response transmission. If the command is not transmitted, the disconnection is detected and the driving of the ball striking motor (not shown) is stopped to make the play stop state.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the execution of the serial ID authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed in the same manner as the process of FIG. Does.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, previous addition ball number = 6, previous subtraction ball number = 36, previous start opening (1) number of times = 2, previous start opening ( 2) number of times = 2, current game number of balls = 470-3 = 467, current addition ball number = 0, current subtraction ball = 3, current start opening (1) number of times = 0, current start opening ( 2) Store the number of times = 0 and send it to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (number of gaming balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls)-3 (the current number of subtraction balls) = 467 Total number of additional balls = 6 (current number of additional balls) + 0 (current number of additional balls), total number of subtractive balls = 36 (current number of subtractive balls) + 3 (current subtractive ball number), starting opening (1) total = 2 (previous) Correct the start opening (1) number) + 0 (current start opening (1) number), start opening (2) total = 2 (pre-start opening (2) number) + 0 (current start opening (2) number).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, recovery processing when power failure occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the addition request will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the prepaid balance is 1000 yen, the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and P units, and the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls generated therebetween When the game ball reaches 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of requested addition balls = 125, calculates the balance = 1000 yen-500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, a balance = 500, and an addition request ball number = 125 to the P units as an operation instruction. When this command does not reach P, the P detects a disconnection at a stage where the command does not receive a command after transmitting the last response and continues for 4 seconds, and detects a shot and strikes a motor (not shown) Stop driving and stop play.

  On the other hand, in the CU, when there is no response from P units due to the unreached command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted, and when no response is returned after performing the second retransmission, communication error It detects (communication disconnection) and starts reconnection sequence 5 seconds after that.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, as in the process of FIG. 21, the execution of the serial ID authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed by the CU and P units.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-additional ball number = 3, pre-subtraction ball number = 23, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 1, pre-start opening 2) Number of times = 1, Current game number of balls = 470, Current addition ball number = 6, Current subtraction ball = 36, Current starting opening (1) number = 2 number, Current starting opening (2) number = 2 is stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  Since the CU has the same communication counterpart and is one more advanced than the SQN on the P side than the SQN on the P side, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. . Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 595, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start Correct the mouth (1) total = 2 and the start mouth (2) total = 2

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side at a stage before reaching the operation response to the addition request will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the prepaid balance = 1,000 yen, the normal operation instruction and the normal operation response are transmitted / received between the CU and P units, and the game balls = based on the number of additional subtraction balls generated therebetween After becoming 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, in the CU, SQN = n + 2, addition required ball number = 125, balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen is calculated, balance is made 500 yen, and consumption of the balance is fixed at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command of addition request existence, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball number = 125 to P as operation instructions. As for the P unit that received it, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 595, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of starting openings (1) = 2 and the number of starting openings (2) as operation response Send a response of 2 to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and a power failure occurs before the operation response processing according to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU will not be transmitted to the P units thereafter. If no command can be received after 4 seconds on the P unit, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and it shifts to the unconnected state, and stops the driving of the striking ball firing motor (not shown) to make the play stop state . Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, the game ball = 595-3 = 592 is calculated And the game ball = 592 is stored.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the execution of the serial ID authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed in the same manner as the process of FIG. Does.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, previous addition ball number = 6, previous subtraction ball number = 36, previous start opening (1) number of times = 2, previous start opening ( 2) number of times = 2, current number of balls as current number of balls = 592, number of current addition balls = 0, current number of subtraction balls = 3, number of current start openings (1) = 0, number of current start openings (2) = Store 0 and send it to CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the communication partner is the same and the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted by the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (number of game balls in CU) + 6 (number of pre-additional balls) + 0 (number of current addition balls)-36 (pre-number of subtractive balls)-3 (current subtraction number of balls) = 592 Total number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (currently-added number of balls), Subtracted number of balls = 36 (pre-reduced number of balls) + 3 (currently reduced number of balls), starting opening (1) Total = 2 (previous) Correct the start opening (1) number) + 0 (current start opening (1) number), start opening (2) total = 2 (pre-start opening (2) number) + 0 (current start opening (2) number).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, recovery processing when power failure occurs on the CU side at the stage before reaching the subtraction request will be described. As the number of initial game balls = 520, transmission and reception of a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are performed between the CU and the P unit, and at the stage when the number of game balls = 500 according to the number of addition and subtraction balls in the meantime When a request for subtraction of 300 balls is generated due to a request for wagon service, etc., the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of required subtraction balls = 300, and as an operation instruction, there is a request for subtraction, SQN = n + 2, and a reduction request ball Send a command of number = 300 to P units.

  When this command does not reach P, the P detects a disconnection at a stage where the command does not receive a command after transmitting the last response and continues for 4 seconds, and detects a hit and strikes a motor (not shown) Stop driving and stop play.

  On the other hand, in the CU, when there is no response from P units due to the unreached command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted, and when no response is returned after performing the second retransmission, communication error It detects (communication disconnection) and starts reconnection sequence 5 seconds after that.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and P units execute the chip ID authentication sequence and transmit and receive the recovery request and the recovery response.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, pre-additional ball number = 3, pre-subtraction ball number = 23, pre-start opening (1) number of times = 1, pre-start opening 2) Number of times = 1, Current game number of balls = 470, Current addition ball number = 6, Current subtraction ball = 36, Current starting opening (1) number = 2 number, Current starting opening (2) number = 2 is stored and sent to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, so it is determined that the subtraction request is not executed on P, and the backup value is based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. Perform processing to correct Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls of CU) + 6 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 470, the total number of addition balls = 6, the total number of subtraction balls = 36, start Correct the mouth (1) total = 2 and the start mouth (2) total = 2

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed on the P base based on the value of SQN, so that the correction request of 300 balls is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery processing. Although the game is being performed, the subtraction of the required number of balls = 300 is not performed from the number of game balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side in the stage before reaching the operation response to the subtraction request will be described. The initial game ball number is set to 520, and a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P unit, and the number of game balls is set to 500 according to the number of added subtraction balls generated during that time. When a request for wagon service for 300 balls is generated at the stage, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, and there is a demand for subtraction, SQN = n + 2, and the number of balls required for subtraction as operation instructions. Send a command of = 300 to P units.

  In response to this, the P unit receives SQN = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 170, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of starting openings (1) = 2 and the number of starting openings = 2. Send response to CU. If the response does not reach the CU, and a power failure occurs before the processing of the operation response according to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU will not be transmitted to the P units thereafter. If no command can be received after 4 seconds on the P unit, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and it shifts to the unconnected state, and stops the driving of the striking ball firing motor (not shown) to make the play stop state . Accumulated storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of starting openings after P unit transmits the response of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and the game ball = 170-3 = 167 is calculated accordingly The game ball = 167 and SQN = n + 3 are stored.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, as in FIG. 21, execution of the serial ID authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence and transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed by the CU and P units.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, previous addition ball number = 6, previous subtraction ball number = 36, previous start opening (1) number of times = 2, previous start opening ( 2) number of times = 2, current number of balls as current number of balls = 167, current addition number of balls = 0, current subtraction number of balls = 3, current starting opening (1) number of times = 0, current starting opening (2) number of times = Store 0 and send it to CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the P unit has received the subtraction instruction because the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction transmission is in progress, and the P SQN is advanced by 1, and the recovery transmitted by the recovery response Perform processing to correct backup values based on data. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (number of gaming balls of CU) + 6 (number of pre-additional balls) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-36 (the number of pre-subtraction balls)-3 (current subtractive ball number) = 467 Total number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (currently-added number of balls), Subtracted number of balls = 36 (pre-reduced number of balls) + 3 (currently reduced number of balls), starting opening (1) Total = 2 (previous) Correct the start opening (1) number) + 0 (current start opening (1) number), start opening (2) total = 2 (pre-start opening (2) number) + 0 (current start opening (2) number).

  The CU transmits a device information request at power-on to restart the connection sequence, but determines that the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN sent from P do not match, as shown in FIG. Instead of the connection sequence at the time of power activation, the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 21 is executed. As a result, the CU forcibly adds the game balls for the subtraction cancellation to the P base with the operation instruction after recovery, and corrects the SQN as well as the game ball correction ON, the game ball = 467, the SQN correction ON, and the SQN = A communication start request including n + 2 is transmitted to P units (see FIG. 21). In response to that, the P unit corrects and stores the game ball = 467 and SQN = n + 3.

  As described above, even if it is determined that the P unit receives the subtraction instruction, the reason for performing the subtraction cancellation processing is that the P unit that received the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process according to the subtraction instruction There is also a possibility that refusal of subtraction was performed on the P side. When the subtraction is rejected on the side of P, if the subtraction is determined on the side of CU, there is a disadvantage that the number of remaining game balls becomes a negative value. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, at the time of such a CU side power failure occurrence, although the P unit side should have refused the subtraction instruction because there are not enough remaining points, the subtraction is performed and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the number of remaining game balls on the machine side becomes a negative value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the clear request is reached will be described. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of gaming balls = 500. In FIG. 57, as in the process of FIG. 23, the CU transmits to the P units a command including data on the prohibition request existence and the clear request non-existence for prohibiting the game to the P units as the operation instruction. In response to that, the unit P sends a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. Then, as in the process of FIG. 23, in the P unit, a 15-second wait is provided, and polling is continued between the P unit and the CU during the 15-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3 and transmits a command including SQN = n + N + 3 to the P unit as an operation instruction with clear request present and clear display, but the command does not reach the P unit. The platform detects disconnection and stops the driving of the bat firing motor (not shown) and puts it into a play stop state when four seconds after the last response is sent and the command continues to be received for four seconds.

  On the other hand, in the CU, when there is no response from P units due to the unreached command, the same command is repeatedly transmitted, and when no response is returned after performing the second retransmission, communication error It detects (communication disconnection) and starts reconnection sequence 5 seconds after that.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and P perform the execution of the serial ID authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in FIG.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + N + 2, the number of pre-additional balls = 0, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 0, the number of pre-starting balls (1) = 0, the number of pre-starting holes (2) = 0, current game ball number as current ball number = 500, current addition ball number 0, current subtraction ball 0, current start opening (1) number of times = 0, current start opening (2) number of times 0 , Send to CU as a recovery response.

  The CU determines that the clear request has not arrived because the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data sent in the recovery response. Do the processing. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the current number of game balls) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-0 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 500, the total number of addition balls = 0, the total number of subtraction balls = 0, the starting opening (1) Correct the total number to 0, and the starting opening (2) Total number to 0.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, recovery processing in the case where a power failure occurs on the CU side before the arrival of the operation response to the clear request will be described. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of gaming balls = 500. In FIG. 58, as in the process of FIG. 23, the CU transmits to the P units a command including data on prohibition request existence and clear request non-existence for prohibiting a game to the P units as an operation instruction. In response to that, the unit P sends a response including data of prohibition refusal OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. Then, as in the process of FIG. 23, in the P unit, a 15-second wait is provided, and polling is continued between the P unit and the CU during the 15-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3 and transmits a command including clear request present, clear display ON, and SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units as operation instructions.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the P unit clears the game ball to 0 according to the clear request and sets the game ball to 0, and clears the SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0, and then the SQN as an operation response. A response of = 0, the number of game balls = 0, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of starting openings (1) = 0, and the number of starting openings (2) = 0 is transmitted to the CU. If the response does not reach the CU, and a power failure occurs in the CU before performing the operation response process according to the response, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. In the P unit, when the command can not be received for 4 seconds or more, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, and a transition to the unconnected state is made.

  Next, when the power is restored and activated in the CU, the connection sequence is resumed in the same manner as the processing of FIG. 21, and transmission / reception of device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, recovery response CU and P perform.

  In the P unit, as recovery data, SQN = 0, C-ID, pre-additional ball number 0, pre-subtraction ball number 0, pre-start opening (1) number of times 0, pre-start opening 2) Number of times = 0, Current game number of balls = 0, Current addition ball number = 0, Current subtraction ball = 0, Current starting opening (1) number = 0, Current starting opening (2) number = Store 0 and send it to CU as a recovery response.

  The CU determines that the P unit is cleared because the S unit S on the P unit side is 0, and performs processing to correct the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted by the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the backup value of CU) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-0 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 500, the total number of addition balls = 0 (the current number of addition balls) Total = 0 (current subtraction ball number), start opening (1) total = 0 (current start opening (1) number of times), start opening (2) total = 0 (current start opening (number of times 2)).

  The CU determines that the P unit is cleared because the S unit S on the P unit side is 0, and performs processing to correct the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted by the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the backup value of CU) + 0 (the number of current addition balls)-0 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 500, the total number of addition balls = 0 (the current number of addition balls) Total = 0 (current subtraction ball number), start opening (1) total = 0 (current start opening (1) number of times), start opening (2) total = 0 (current start opening (number of times 2)).

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing transition of display screens on the CU side and the P-base side corresponding to the control operation at the time of insertion of the card shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 59, when the card is not inserted, a command of an operation instruction without an operation request is sent from the CU to P during standby, and a response of game ball = 0 is received while waiting as an operation response. P is sent back to CU. During transmission and reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (card not inserted)] at the upper left of FIG. 59, “None” in the “Card type” title column on the display 312 of the CU, “0 shot” is displayed in the “playing ball” title column. In addition, as shown in [Normal screen (card not inserted)] on the upper right of FIG. 59, “0 ball” in the title column of “playing ball” and in the title column of card balance on the display 54 of P units. "0 yen" is displayed. In addition, on the display 312 and the display 43, various data indicating the gaming state of P units at the current time is displayed. For example, in FIG. 59, the number of times of start, the number of big hits, the number of certain variations, and the number of highest runs are displayed, and the number of starts between special prizes (effective start winnings between a certain big hit and the next big hit) The frequency is displayed as a bar graph. Furthermore, on the CU side display unit 312, an amount display portion for setting a credit amount, an amount display portion for the card balance, a display portion for the number of replayed balls, a display portion for the number of balls and a display portion for the rate of rental balls Is provided.

  Furthermore, the display unit 312 on the CU side is configured by the touch panel as described above, and display items of "base information", "setting change", and "order menu" are displayed at the upper left of each display screen. When the user selects a touch operation, the display screen is switched to the touch-operated display screen. In FIG. 59, a screen in a state in which “host information” is selected is displayed.

  In addition, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided at the lower part of each display screen with a selection operation display unit for "return", "rental", "replay", and "call", and the player can select any of these display units. It is possible to input a command to the CU by selecting one and performing a touch operation. For example, if "Return" is touched, the inserted card is returned, and if "Loan" is touched, gaming balls from the prepaid balance recorded in the inserted card are lent. Further, if "replay" is touched, replay using balls or balls of the inserted card (membership card) can be performed. When "call" is touched, a notification for calling a game center clerk is made.

  When the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command of no operation request to the P-unit as an operation instruction during the card insertion process. In response to this, the unit P detects that the card insertion process has been started on the CU side. After sending and receiving the command of the operation instruction, it is in the state of inquiring to the upper server (for example, the hall management computer 1). In the state in which this inquiry is in progress, the display 312 on the CU side displays "inquiring" as shown in the second "card balance inquiring screen" from the top, and also displays on the P side In the display unit 54, the server displays an arrow from the server to the IC in the lower left corner of the screen as shown in the second normal screen (during inquiry of card balance), and the server is inquired of the card inserted. The picture is displayed. Note that "IC" in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  In P units that have received the above-mentioned operation instruction, while waiting as an operation response, a response of game ball = 0 is sent back to the CU.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is collated by inquiring the server and the balls (= 5000) and the balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are determined, the card is being held as an operation instruction. , Add required ball number = 5000, card balance = send a command to P units. After the transmission of this command, the CU is being displayed in addition. On the P unit that has received this command, the CU detects that the card balance and the balls have been settled, and thereafter, the addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, "5,000 balls" is displayed in the ball display column as shown on the third "Up in ball lending" screen from the top on the display 312 of the CU, and the game machine is headed. An arrow is displayed, and it is displayed to the player that it is in the middle of transmitting 5,000 balls to the gaming machine. On the other hand, in the P-unit, as shown on the third [Normal screen (during a rental)] from the top by the display 54, an arrow is displayed from the IC toward the game ball display unit and the card balance display unit. The display (during addition display) which is being added with the ball rental is thereby made. Then, "5000 balls" are displayed on the game ball display unit, and "7000 yen" is displayed on the card balance display unit.

  Next, a response including gaming ball = 5000 is transmitted as an operation response from the P unit to the CU. In the CU, when 2-3 seconds have elapsed since the movement display of the ball indicating the addition display is started, the addition display is ended and “member” indicating the card type inserted in the display 312, the game It switches to the state which displays "5000 shots" as a ball. On the other hand, in the P unit, the addition display is ended after a few seconds since the movement display of the ball during the addition display is started, and the movement display of the ball by the display 54 is ended.

  In this way, while the display of the start of the operation process such as during inquiry or addition display is started at the same time with CU and P units, the end of the display of those operation processes is ended from CU to P unit The command or the like is not transmitted, and the P-unit side can be terminated at its own timing, and the CU-side end timing is not constrained. As a result, it is possible to make a unique display unique to the P stand.

  Next, a detailed example of communication commands between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control substrate for display 53 will be described. (A) start instruction (disbursement control unit → effect controller board for display), (B) gaming machine information notification (disbursement control board → effect controller for display), and (C) card insertion request (disbursement control) There is a command relating to board → effect control board for display).

  In the above (A) to (C), with respect to various commands, information such as a provider of information on a command to be transmitted, a sender, and a receiver is associated in a tabular form. The command communicated between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control board for display 53 is basically data of transmission data (business telegram) and sum (SUM) value (error detection data of communication frame) Is frame data consisting of a frame structure arranged in this order. In the command, the sum value is calculated by the addition result of all data other than the sum value.

  The command of the start instruction of the command (A) is a command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and notifies the effect control substrate 53 for display that the power is turned on. The command of start instruction includes a command code as transmission data.

  The gaming machine information notification of the command (B) is a command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display, and notifies gaming effect information to the effect control substrate 53 for display. In the gaming machine information notification, as transmission data, command code, total game ball number information, number of game ball obtained number information, back ball addition information (addition), game ball firing number information (subtraction), out ball passage information, symbol confirmation Number of times 1, Design fixed number 2, Number of opening 1 number, Number of opening 2 number, Number of opening 3 number, Number of large opening number 1, Number of large number opening 2, Number of number 1 opening, Number 2 number of opening, Number 3 number of opening, 4 times winning opening, gaming machine status 1, gaming machine status 2, gaming machine error status 1, gaming machine error status 2, CU status, card balance, operation mode switching preparation designation, operation mode switching designation, gaming ball total number information, And, maintenance content or test content is included.

  Game ball total number information, game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information (addition), game ball firing number information (subtraction), out ball passage information, symbol fixed frequency 1, symbol fixed frequency 2, starting opening 1 frequency, starting The number includes two openings, three starting openings, one large winning opening, two large winning openings, one winning opening, two winning openings, three winning openings, and four winning openings. The payout control unit 17 can obtain these data based on each data provided from the main control board 16 or the like, and transmits these data as data of the gaming machine information notification.

  As for gaming machine status 2, 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit7, "big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 3", "big hit 4", "big hit display", "high base" “High probability” and “waiting for customer” are indicated. The payout control unit 17 can obtain the game console state 2 data provided from the main control board 16.

  With regard to the gaming machine error state 1, one byte of Bit 0 to Bit 7 indicates that “Magnetic sensor error is occurring”, “radio wave sensor error is occurring”, and “unfair prize error occurring is complete” (Bit 1 to 0 to 7 to 5 "Preliminary" is indicated. The payout control unit 17 can obtain data of the gaming machine error state 1 based on the gaming machine error state 1 provided from the main control board 16.

  For gaming machine error state 2, “Inter-device common error number” (Bit 0 to 6) is indicated by one byte of Bit 0 to Bit 7 and an error on the main control board (Bit 7: 1) or an error on the payout control unit (Bit7: 0) is indicated. The payout control unit 17 can obtain the game console error state 2 data provided from the main control board 16.

  In the CU state, in this example, "2-card insertion processing", "cash insertion processing", "general card holding", "member card holding", "prepaid lending display" by 2 bytes of Bit 0 to Bit 15 "" Replay lending display "," "split ball display", "" wagon service display "", "" clear display "", and "in the break" "(Bit 7 ~ 5, Bit 15 ~ 14" spare ") Will be instructed. The payout control unit 17 can obtain the data of the CU state provided from the card unit 3.

  The card balance indicating the balance of the card inserted in the card unit 3 is designated by two bytes.

  With respect to the operation mode switching preparation designation, the switching preparation designation of the operation mode of the gaming machine is instructed by one bit of Bit0 to Bit7.

  The operation mode includes the "sales mode" in which the player plays a game, the "maintenance mode" in which daily cleaning, replacement of consumables, and equipment failure / repair occur, and confirmation as a result of nail adjustment and base adjustment, A plurality of modes are provided: a "testing mode" for checking the operation at the time of installation, and a "test mode" used for analyzing the operation at the time of market return when the gaming machine is manufactured. The operation mode is switched when a predetermined switching condition as described later is satisfied.

  As the operation mode switching preparation designation, it is the business mode preparation designation when Bit 0 is “1”, the maintenance mode preparation designation when Bit 2 is “1”, and the trial hitting mode preparation designation when Bit 3 is “1”, When Bit 4 is “1”, it is a test mode preparation designation (Bits 7 to 5 are reserved). Bit 1 is unused. It can be obtained from the data of the operation mode switching preparation designated from the card unit 3.

  As for the operation mode switching specification, the switching specification of the operation mode of the gaming machine is instructed by one bit of Bit0 to Bit7.

  As operation mode switching specification, it is business mode switching specification when Bit 0 is “1”, maintenance mode switching specification when Bit 2 is “1”, trial driving mode switching specification when Bit 3 is “1”, Bit 4 When is “1”, it is a test mode switching specification (Bits 7 to 5 are spares). Bit 1 is unused. It can be obtained from the data of the operation mode switching designation provided from the card unit 3.

  With regard to maintenance content or test content, when Bit 2 “1” is set in the operation mode switching specification and maintenance mode switching specification is performed, maintenance contents 1 to 4 are instructed by 1 byte of Bit 0 to 7 (Bit 7 to 4) Is a reserve). On the other hand, when the test mode switching designation is made as Bit 4 “1” in the operation mode switching designation, the test contents 1 to 4 are designated by one byte of Bits 0 to 7 (Bits 7 to 4 are spares). It can be obtained from data of maintenance contents or test contents provided by the card unit 3 by a command.

  The card insertion request of command (C) is data transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 table, and transmits the card ID (C-ID). The command for card insertion request includes a command code and a card ID as transmission data.

  The card ID is data similar to the operation mode switching designation described above, and can be obtained from the data of the card ID provided from the card unit 3 as described above.

  Next, the communication sequence between the card unit 3 and the LSI (including the payout control unit) 799, the communication sequence between the LSI (including the payout control unit) 799 and the main control board 16, and the LSI (including the payout control unit) A representative example of a communication sequence between the 799 and the presentation effect control board 53 will be described.

  60 and 61 are diagrams showing a representative example of the communication sequence between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17. 62 to 65 are diagrams showing representative examples of communication sequences between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control substrate for display 53. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a display example on the display 54. As shown in FIG. The steps shown by broken lines in the present embodiment indicate the control contents of the modification.

  60 and 62 show communication sequences executed between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17 and between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 based on insertion of a card. ing.

  Referring to FIG. 60, in the card unit 3, when the card is inserted, information such as the card balance and the card ID recorded in the inserted card is read by the card reader / writer. Then, although not shown, the sequence number, card holding ON (general card holding, member card holding), and card insertion processing ON as an operation instruction from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17. The data including OFF during addition display (during prepaid lending display, replay lending display) is transmitted.

  In the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction, data including the sequence number added and updated is transmitted to the card unit 3 as an operation response that is a response to the operation instruction.

  Further, referring to FIG. 62, the payout control unit 17 having received such an operation instruction is in a state of inquiring card information, and from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate 53 for display as gaming machine information notification. Data including display ON during card insertion processing is transmitted. Referring to FIG. 62, in the effect control substrate for display 53, a display for waiting for a customer is displayed on the display 54 in a state where no card is inserted, and when such notification of gaming machine information is received, the display Control is performed to switch the display of 54 to an animation display during communication (an animation display indicating that communication with the card unit 3 is in progress).

  Referring to FIG. 60, when the reading of the card information is completed, the card unit 3 transmits data including the read card ID to the payout control unit 17 as a card insertion request. Then, in the card unit 3, processing is performed to inquire the normality of the read card ID to the upper server 801.

  The payout control unit 17 having received such a card insertion request from the card unit 3 stores (holds) the received card ID in the card ID storage unit of the payout control unit 17, and as shown in FIG. As the insertion request, data including the received card ID is transmitted to the effect control board 53 for display. Thus, the card ID of the inserted card is notified.

  Referring to FIG. 62, in the effect control board for display 53 receiving the card insertion request, the member card and the general card inserted in the card unit 3 are acquired based on the received card ID, and effect control for display It is stored (saved) in the card ID storage unit of the substrate 53.

  Then, in the effect control substrate 53 for a display unit, it is determined whether or not the received card ID matches the previously stored card ID, and when it matches, the future game result is stored in the personal gaming history stored last time Perform processing to be added to the data. On the other hand, when they do not match, the personal gaming history data stored last time is cleared, and the future gaming results are processed as new personal gaming history data.

  In addition, in the effect control substrate 53 for display devices, as described above, the game history data is accumulated and stored in association with the card ID, but separately from the effect control substrate 53 for display devices, the payout control unit 17 also A history data storage unit may be provided, and game history data may be accumulated and stored in the game history data storage unit in association with a card ID. Specifically, when storing the card ID received from the card unit 3 in the payout control unit 17, the game history data collected by the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17 is And the game history data storage unit. When such a configuration is employed, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 62, the payout control unit 17 also acquires and stores the card ID as well as the effect control substrate 53 for a display, and receives the received card It is determined whether or not the ID matches the previously stored card ID. If the ID matches, the game result to be used in the future is added to the previously stored personal game history data and used. On the other hand, when they do not match, the personal gaming history data stored last time is cleared, and the future gaming results are processed as new personal gaming history data.

  Further, the payout control unit 17 that has received such a card insertion request transmits a card insertion response as a response to the card insertion request to the card unit 3.

  In the card unit 3, when the card insertion response is received and the inquiry result to the effect that the card ID is normal is obtained, the sequence number, card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display as operation instruction While transmitting data including ON, the number of requested addition balls, and the card balance to the payout control unit 17, the data of the sequence number in the transmission data and the data of the number of gaming balls (the number of required addition balls) are stored in the backup recording area Do. Further, in such a state, in the card unit 3, control is performed to perform display during addition indicating that addition of a game ball is being performed on the display unit 312.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, the gaming machine includes the game ball number related information, the card balance, the card insertion processing display OFF, and the addition display ON according to the received data. An information notification is sent to the effect control board 53 for a display. In the effect control substrate for display 53, when such a notification of the gaming machine information is received, control is performed to switch the display of the display 54 to an animation display during addition (an animation display indicating that the addition is in progress).

  Further, the payout control unit 17 having received such an operation instruction transmits data including the sequence number and the number of game balls to the card unit 3 as an operation response which is a response to the operation instruction.

  Thereafter, in the card unit 3, the addition display is ended, and the operation instruction includes the sequence number, the card holding ON, the card insertion processing OFF, the addition display OFF, the number of requested addition balls, and the data including the card balance. Transmit to control unit 17.

  When receiving such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, the payout control unit 17 transmits a gaming machine information notification including OFF during addition display to the effect control board for display 53 according to the received data. In the effect control substrate for display 53, when such notification of the gaming machine information is received, the display 54 performs control to end the animation display during addition.

  Further, the payout control unit 17 having received such an operation instruction transmits data including the sequence number and the number of game balls to the card unit 3 as an operation response which is a response to the operation instruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a communication sequence when the operation mode shifts from the business mode to various operation modes will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 61, in card unit 3, a command of mode change request to each operation mode is transmitted to payout control unit 17 by remote control operation. Specifically, data including a transition destination mode and additional information is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 as an operation instruction. In addition, a mode change request | requirement is transmitted only in the case of balance 0 yen and the game ball 0 shot in the card unit 3 side.

  The payout control unit 17 having received this operation instruction receives (1) balance 0 yen, 0 game balls, (2) 0 number of balls in the game (the number of floating balls) as an operation response which is a response to the operation instruction. (3) When the mode change response result from the main control board 16 satisfies all OK conditions, a permission (OK) command is transmitted. Whether the condition of (3) is satisfied or not is determined as follows. An operation instruction of mode change instruction is sent from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16, and it is determined whether or not the main control board 16 that has received it satisfies the conditions, and the mode change response that is the determination result is the payout control It is sent back to section 17. The main control board 16 that has received the operation instruction of the mode change instruction is (3.1) not in the symbol variation, (3.2) not in the big hit, (3.3) not in the small hit, all conditions of In the case where the above condition is satisfied, an operation response in which the mode change response result is OK is sent back to the payout control unit 17. In addition, since conditions (1), (2), (3.1)-(3.3) are illustration, it is also possible to set it as another conditions. As another condition, for example, it can be considered that there are no floating balls in the game area 27 or the like.

  When the card unit 3 receives a mode change response of permission (OK) from the payout control unit 17, the card unit 3 operates in the operation mode designated by the remote controller.

  Thereafter, when changing to the business mode again, in order to set the business mode by remote control operation, a command of mode change request is transmitted to the payout control unit 17. Specifically, data including a business mode and additional information is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 as an operation instruction.

  The payout control unit 17 having received this operation instruction receives (1) balance 0 yen, 0 game balls, (2) 0 number of balls in the game (the number of floating balls) as an operation response which is a response to the operation instruction. (3) When the mode change response result from the main control board 16 satisfies all OK conditions, a permission (OK) command is transmitted. Whether the condition of (3) is satisfied or not is determined as follows. An operation instruction of mode change instruction is sent from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16, and it is determined whether or not the main control board 16 that has received it satisfies the conditions, and the mode change response that is the determination result is the payout control It is sent back to section 17. The main control board 16 that has received the operation instruction of the mode change instruction is (3.1) not in the symbol variation, (3.2) not in the big hit, (3.3) not in the small hit, all conditions of In the case where the above condition is satisfied, an operation response in which the mode change response result is OK is sent back to the payout control unit 17. In addition, since conditions (1), (2), (3.1)-(3.3) are illustration, it is also possible to set it as another conditions. As another condition, for example, it can be considered that there are no floating balls in the game area 27 or the like.

  When the card unit 3 receives a mode change response of permission (OK) from the payout control unit 17, the card unit 3 operates in the business mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control substrate for display 53 at the time of addition request will be described.

  In the card unit 3, when a prepaid lending operation by the operation of the lending button 321 or a replay lending operation by the operation of the replay button 319 is performed, an addition factor of the game balls is generated, and the game balls owned by the player are added Be done. In those cases, although not shown, the game ball number related information including the number of requested addition balls indicated in the operation instruction, CU state (data displayed during prepaid lending display or replay lending display (added display) Is ON, and data such as the card balance is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 as an operation instruction. As described above, an operation instruction including data specifying an addition factor (during prepaid lending display and replay lending display) is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17.

  When the addition based on the prepaid lending operation or the replay lending operation is performed, the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 displays an image in an addition display as shown in FIG.

  When an addition factor of game balls is generated, the payout control unit 17 controls the number of game balls related information including the total number of game balls indicated in the game machine information notification based on the data received from the card unit 3, CU state (Prepaid lending display or replay display data (additional display) is ON) and data such as the card balance are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control board 53 for a display as gaming machine information notification. As described above, the gaming machine information notification including data (prepaid lending display and replay playing display) specifying the addition factor is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53.

  In the effect control substrate 53 for a display, when the gaming machine information notification is received, whether the addition factor of the game ball corresponds to the prepaid lending or the replay lending based on the data specifying the addition factor judge.

  Then, in the effect control substrate for display 53, when the addition factor of the game ball is prepaid lending based on the determination result of the addition factor of the game ball, the display 54 displays (A1) to (A3) in FIG. Perform display control to display prepaid lending animation as shown. The prepaid lending animation display becomes a display during prepaid lending as in (A2) of FIG. 66 from the display before prepaid lending as in (A1) of FIG. 66, and then prepaid as in (A3) of FIG. It will be displayed after lending. In the display during prepaid lending, the value of the card balance (“balance” in the figure) is gradually converted to the value of the possessed ball (“handled ball” in the figure), and the animation display in which the possessed ball increases Is done. Then, when such animation display is finished, it becomes a display after prepaid lending as shown in (A3) of FIG. As described above, in the prepaid lending animation display, it is specified that the adding factor is the prepaid lending by the display of the card balance value being changed to increase the number of balls.

  In addition, in the effect control substrate 53 for a display, when the addition factor of the game ball is the replay lending based on the determination result of the addition factor of the game ball, the display 54 displays (B1) to (B3) in FIG. Perform display control to make replay play lending animation display as shown in. From the display before replay lending as in (B1) in FIG. 66, the replay play lending and animation display becomes a display during replay lending as in (B2) in FIG. 66, and thereafter, in (B3) in FIG. It becomes a display after such replay lending. In the display during replay lending, the value of the card balance (“balance” in the drawing) is not changed, and animation display is performed in which the number of balls (“balls” in the drawing) gradually increases. Then, when such animation display ends, it becomes a display after replay play lending as shown in (B3) of FIG. As described above, in the replay lending animation display, it is specified that the additional factor is the replay lending by displaying that the number of balls increases without changing the value of the card balance.

  When the image display in the addition display in the card unit 3 is finished, the data (the addition display) in the prepaid lending display or the replay play lending display included in the CU state in the operation instruction transmitted to the payout control unit 17 is turned off. Accordingly, in the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, data (additional display) of the prepaid lending display or the replay lending display included in the CU state is turned OFF. The effect control substrate 53 for display performs control to end the addition animation display when the data of the prepaid lending display or the replay lending display is turned off in the gaming machine information notification.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control substrate for display 53 at the time of a subtraction request will be described.

  In the card unit 3, when a ball division operation is performed by designating a ball sharing (ball division) or a wagon order operation by a wagon order designation, a subtraction factor of game balls is generated, and the player owns The game ball of is subtracted. In those cases, the game ball number related information including the required number of balls for subtraction indicated in the operation instruction, the CU state (data being displayed during divided ball display or wagon service display (under subtraction display) is on), and the card Data such as the balance is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 as an operation instruction. As described above, the operation instruction including the data specifying the subtraction factor (during divided ball display or wagon service display) is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17.

  For example, when a wagon order operation is performed, an image under subtraction display such as an image showing subtraction of wagon service display is displayed on the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 (not shown). When the ball-dividing operation is performed, the display 312 of the card unit 3 displays an image under subtraction display such as an image indicating subtraction due to the ball-dividing being performed.

  When a subtraction factor of gaming balls is generated, the payout control unit 17 controls the number of gaming balls related information including the total number of gaming balls indicated in the gaming machine information notification based on the data received from the card unit 3, CU state (Data for the ball divided display or wagon service display (subtraction display) is ON) and data such as the card balance are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control board for display 53 as gaming machine information notification. As described above, the gaming machine information notification including the data specifying the subtraction factor (the ball divided display or the wagon service display) is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53.

  In the effect control substrate 53 for a display, when the notification of the gaming machine information is received, it is determined, based on the data specifying the subtraction factor, which of the ball division factor and the wagon order corresponds to the subtraction factor of the game ball. judge.

  Then, in the effect control substrate 53 for the display device, when the subtraction factor of the game ball is the ball division, based on the determination result of the subtraction factor of the game ball, the numerical value of the ball is gradually divided in the display 54 Is converted to a numerical value, and an animated display is made with decreasing balls. On the other hand, in the effect control substrate 53 for the display, when the subtraction factor of the game ball is the wagon order based on the judgment result of the subtraction factor of the game ball, the numerical value of the ball gradually becomes the minute wagon order in the display 54 Is converted to a numerical value, and an animated display is made with decreasing balls. A display in which the number of balls is reduced based on the subtraction factor in this way is called a subtraction animation display. Thus, in the subtraction animation display, the subtraction factor is specified.

  When the image display under subtraction display in the card unit 3 is finished, the data during ball division display or wagon service display (subtraction display) included in the CU state in the operation instruction sent to the payout control unit 17 is turned OFF. Accordingly, in the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53, the data (addition display) of the ball divided display or the wagon service display included in the CU state is turned OFF. The effect control board 53 for display performs control to end the subtraction animation display when the data (subtraction display) of the ball division display or the wagon service display becomes OFF in the gaming machine information notification.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the effect control board for display 53 during the game will be described.

  In the gaming state until a big hit occurs in the card unit 3, the display control for the in-game animation, which is an animation display displayed during the game, is performed on the display 54 by the effect control substrate 53 for display Be Then, when a big hit occurs, the game control board (main control board 16) sends a payout control section 17 a table state inquiry response, data including the big hit ON similar to the big hit 1 to 4 ON included in the game information notification Is sent.

  When receiving a game state inquiry response including such a big hit ON, the payout control unit 17 receives the game ball number related information including the total number of game balls indicated in the game machine information notification, etc. Data including ON in 4) and big hit end display OFF are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control board for display 53 as gaming machine information notification. As described above, the gaming machine information notification including the data specifying the gaming state is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the effect control substrate for display 53.

  A display control for producing a big hit during animation, which is an animation display displayed during a big hit game, on the display 54 when receiving a gaming machine information notification including a big hit on the effect control board 53 for a display Is done.

  Then, before the end of the big hit gaming state from the gaming control board (main control board 16) to the payout control unit 17, as a platform state inquiry response, a big hit similar to ON in the big hit display ON included in the game information notification Data including ON being displayed is transmitted.

  When the platform status inquiry response including ON during such big hit end display is received, the payout control unit 17 turns ON the data of the big hit end display included in the gaming machine information notification (data in the big hit is ON Continue).

  In the effect control board 53 for the display, when the gaming machine information notification including the big hit ON and the big hit end ON is received, the display 54 ends the big hit middle animation display, and the animation display is displayed at the time of the big hit end. Display control is performed to display a certain big hit end animation.

  Then, when the big hit gaming state ends, the game control board (main control board 16) includes a big hit medium off and a big hit end display off included in the game information notification from the game control board 17 as a platform state inquiry response. Data is sent.

  When receiving a platform status inquiry response including such a big hit medium OFF and a big hit end display OFF, the payout control unit 17 turns off the data during the big hit and the big hit end display included in the gaming machine information notification. Do.

  In the effect control board 53 for the display, when the gaming machine information notification including the big hit medium OFF and the big hit end display OFF is received, the display 54 ends the big hit end animation display, and a display for displaying the game animation image Control is performed.

  Next, details of the SE2 mode encrypted communication used in the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. The encryption communication in the SE2 mode is performed between the main control unit 323 of the CU 3 and the CU communication control unit 80, but in addition, between the CU communication control unit 80 and the P communication control unit 81 of the pachinko machine 2 Between the dispensing control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 and the main control board 16, between the main control board 16 and the key management server 803, between the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and the upper server 801, and the upper server 801. And the key management server 800. Furthermore, it may be performed among various devices installed in the game arcade, such as a hall management computer 1, a Z counter, a card issuing device, a settlement device, a prize exchange device (POS terminal), and the like.

  First, the SE2 mode encryption scheme will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 (a) shows counters used for encryption and decryption in SE2 mode. This counter is composed of 16 bytes, an initial vector part R consisting of 8 bytes, a telegram counter part N consisting of 7 bytes, and an encryption block counter part I consisting of 1 byte.

  The initial vector unit R is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80 as described based on FIG. 8, FIG. 9, and FIG. 14. As a result, the value of the initial vector unit R is shared between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Although the encryption block counter unit I and the message counter unit N are added and updated as described later, the initial vector unit R is not added and updated.

  The initial values of the message counter N and the encryption block counter I are zero. As described above, such a counter is shared between devices (for example, the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80) that perform cryptographic communication with each other. Every time the plaintext divided into blocks (16 bytes) is encrypted one block at a time, the encryption block counter unit I is counted up. When all the blocks of the telegram transmitted in one operation instruction or operation response are encrypted, the ciphertext is transmitted, the telegram counter N is counted up by "1", and the cipher block counter I Becomes "0". Such count-up operation is repeated.

  With reference to (b) of FIG. 67, the scheme of the block cipher in the SE2 mode will be described. (B) of FIG. 67 shows an example in which a telegraphic message transmitted by one operation instruction or operation response is constituted by three blocks of plaintexts 1 to 3. First, plaintext data to be transmitted (see FIG. 5) is divided into plaintexts (plaintext 1, plaintext 2,...) Of blocks of 16 bytes each. Then, the current counter value R, N, 0 is encrypted using the key K. The key K is a main authentication key or a communication key (session key) as described with reference to FIGS. 7, 10, and 15. Then, an exclusive OR operation is performed using the encrypted value (16 bytes) and the block of plaintext 1 (16 bytes). The calculation result is ciphertext 1 (16 bytes).

  When encrypting the next plaintext 2, the counter is updated by adding "1". As a result, the value of the counter becomes R, N, 1. This value is encrypted with the key K in the same manner as described above, and the exclusive OR (exclusive OR) operation is performed on the data of the encryption result and the plaintext 2 to generate a ciphertext 2.

  When the next plaintext 3 is encrypted, the value of the counter is further incremented by one and updated, and the value becomes R, N, 2. This value is encrypted with the key K, and an exclusive OR (exclusive OR) operation is performed on the value of the encryption result and the plaintext 3 to generate a ciphertext 3. The above three blocks of plaintexts 1 to 3 constitute all the frames of the telegraphic message transmitted in one operation instruction or operation response, and the ciphertexts are transmitted by encrypting the plaintexts 1 to 3 At the same time, the message counter N is incremented by "1", and the encrypted block counter I becomes "0".

  Therefore, when encrypting the plaintext 1 of the operation instruction or operation response to be transmitted next, the value of the counter becomes {R, N + 1, I = 0. An exclusive OR (exclusive OR) operation is performed on the value obtained by encrypting the value with the key K and the plaintext 1 to generate a ciphertext 4.

Thereafter, encryption is performed while adding and updating the value of the counter as needed, such as plaintext 2, plaintext 3, and so on.
Next, the decoding process will be described based on FIG. On the ciphertext receiving side, when decrypting the received block 1 of ciphertext 1 (16 bytes), the value (R, N, 0) of the counter is first encrypted with the key K and the encrypted value And the ciphertext 1 and the exclusive OR (exclusive OR) is calculated and decrypted to obtain the plaintext 1.

  As a characteristic of the exclusive OR (exclusive OR) operation, the exclusive OR operation is performed on binary data (binary data) with a binary number (referred to as A), and the operation result data is calculated. Furthermore, if the exclusive OR operation is performed with the same binary value (A), there is a property that it returns to the original binary data before the first exclusive OR operation. In this SE2 mode encryption / decryption processing, encryption / decryption processing is performed utilizing the characteristics of such exclusive OR.

  When decrypting the second block ciphertext 2 (16 bytes), the value of the counter is updated by adding “1”. As a result, the value of the counter becomes R, N, 1 and the R, N, 1 is encrypted with the key K, exclusive OR operation is performed with the value of the result and the ciphertext 2, and decryption is performed. Generate

  Similarly, when decrypting the ciphertext 3, the value of the counter is updated by adding "1". Similarly to the case of encryption, the encryption block counter unit I is “1” every time when decryption of each block of the telegraphic message transmitted by one operation instruction or operation response is performed. The message counter N is incremented by one and updated, and the value of I is cleared to zero, when decoding of all blocks of the message sent in one operation instruction or operation response is completed.

  As described above, in the case of the SE1 mode, the exclusive OR operation is performed on the plaintext M using the key of the same data length for encryption, and the exclusive OR operation is performed on the ciphertext using the key of the same data length Since the data (key) on which the exclusive OR operation is performed on the plaintext M is constant and does not change because it is only performed and decrypted, high security can not be expected. However, in the case of the SE2 mode, high security can be expected because the data (the key as the value of the counter) for performing the exclusive OR operation on the plaintext M is updated and changed.

  Next, based on FIG. 69 to FIG. 73, the actual operation of encrypted communication between an operation instruction (command) and an operation response (response) between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 will be described. FIG. 69 shows encrypted communication in a steady state when the encrypted communication text is properly decrypted at the receiving side. FIG. 70 shows processing at the time of abnormality when the operation response from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 has not arrived. FIG. 71 shows processing at the time of abnormality when an operation instruction from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80 has not arrived. FIG. 72 shows the process of the modification in the abnormal time when the operation response is not reached shown in FIG. FIG. 73 shows a modified example of the process for abnormal time at which the operation instruction has not been reached shown in FIG.

  First, processing at normal time will be described based on FIG. An operation instruction and an operation response between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 will be described by taking an example of 96-byte data having a data length of a multiple of 48 bytes.

  As described in FIG. 67, the main control unit 323 divides the 96-byte plaintext into six blocks of 16 bytes each, and encrypts the plaintexts 1 to 6 of each block one by one. The value of the counter is R, N, 0, and the value of the counter is encrypted as described above, and the exclusive OR operation is performed using the encrypted value and the plaintext 1. To generate a ciphertext 1. Similarly, the value of the R, N, 1 counter is used to generate the ciphertext 2, the value of the R, N, 2 counter is used to generate the ciphertext 2, R to generate the ciphertext 4, The values of the counters of N and 3 are used, the values of the counters of R, N and 4 are used in the generation of the ciphertext 5, and the values of the counters of R, N and 5 are used in the generation of the ciphertext 6.

  The CU communication control unit 80 having received the ciphertexts 1 to 6 consisting of the six blocks decrypts the ciphertext as needed while updating the value of the counter as described with reference to FIG. The value of the counter at the start of decryption, that is, the value of the counter used to decrypt the first ciphertext 1 is R, N, 0, and the value is encrypted and the value of the ciphertext The exclusive OR is calculated and decrypted to generate the plaintext 1. Similarly, for the ciphertext 2, ciphertext 3, ciphertext 4, ciphertext 5 and ciphertext 6 as well, the value of the cipher block counter unit is updated by adding “1” each time, and decryption processing is performed. Specifically, the counter values of R, N, 1 are used for ciphertext 2, the counter values of R, N, 2 are used for ciphertext 3, R, for ciphertext 4, The N, 3 counter values are used for decryption, the R, N, 4 counter values are used for the ciphertext 5, and the R, N, 5 counter values are used for the ciphertext 6.

  Next, the CU communication control unit 80 encrypts the operation response (response) and transmits it to the main control unit 323. At this time, since the last message counter used by the CU communication control unit 80 for the previous decryption process is N, when generating the ciphertext this time, the value is the value of the last message counter. N is incremented by one and updated to N + 1. Therefore, the counter value of "R, N + 1, 0" is used first. This counter value is encrypted, and the exclusive OR operation is performed with the encrypted value and the first plaintext 1 of the operation response to generate a ciphertext 1. Next, the CU communication control unit 80 adds “1” to update the encryption block counter and updates the encryption block counter to generate the ciphertext 2 using the values of R, N + 1, 1. Similarly, while incrementing and updating the encryption block counter unit by “1”, the ciphertext 3, ciphertext 4, ciphertext 5 and ciphertext 6 are generated, and the operation response including these ciphertexts is transmitted to the main control unit 323 Do.

  The main control unit 323 adds “1” to the value “N + 1” of the message counter used for generating the ciphertext transmitted last time, updates it, and uses the R, N + 2, 0 counter values to start the operation response first Decrypt ciphertext 1 of. Then, in the same manner as described above, the ciphertext 2, ciphertext 3, ciphertext 4, ciphertext 5, and ciphertext 6 are decrypted at any time while adding and updating the cipher block counter unit as needed, and plaintext 2, plaintext 3, plaintext 4, The plaintext 5 and the plaintext 6 are generated.

  By such a method, encryption of transmission data and decryption processing of reception data are performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a process at the time of abnormality when the operation response from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 has not arrived will be described. First, an operation instruction consisting of six blocks of ciphertexts 1 to 6 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The value of the counter used for each block is R, N, 0 at the beginning, and the encryption block counter unit is incremented by “1” to make the final value R, N, 5. The CU communication control unit 80 that has received this ciphertext first decrypts the ciphertext 1 using the counter values R, N, 0 at the start of the cipher and generates plaintext 1. Next, the ciphertext 2, ciphertext 3, ciphertext 4, ciphertext 5 and ciphertext 6 are decrypted while adding and updating the cipher block counter unit as needed, and plaintext 2, plaintext 3, plaintext 4, plaintext 5, plaintext 6 are decrypted Generate

  Then, the CU communication control unit 80 adds “1” to update the value N of the message counter unit used for decryption of the previous ciphertext, updates it, and uses the value of “R, N + 1, 0” to start the operation response first. The plaintext 1 of the block is encrypted to generate a ciphertext 1. Next, “1” is added to update the value of the encryption block counter unit to update and generate an encrypted text 2, an encrypted text 3, an encrypted text 4, an encrypted text 5, and an encrypted text 6, which are transmitted to the main control unit 323. When the operation response composed of the ciphertexts 1 to 6 does not reach the main control unit 323, the main control unit 323 retransmits to the CU communication control unit 80 the data of the same operation instruction as the previously transmitted operation instruction. Do. When the CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the retransmitted ciphertext, the value of the message counter unit used in the previous generation of the ciphertext of the CU communication control unit 80 is N + 1, so the current decryption is performed this time In doing so, “R, N + 2, 0” will be used as the value of the counter used first.

  The CU communication control unit 80 tries to decrypt the first ciphertext 1 among the retransmitted ciphertexts using the value “R, N + 2, 0” of the counter. However, the ciphertext 1 is data encrypted using the value "R, N + 1, 0" of the counter, and the ciphertext 1 is decrypted using "R, N + 2, 0" which is a different counter value. Even if you try, it can not be decoded to the correct plaintext, and the decoding fails. The determination as to whether or not the correct plaintext can be decrypted is made based on a general check by the MAC. Briefly described, the CU communication control unit 80 encrypts the first counter value R, N + 2, 0 with a key, and calculates the exclusive OR of the value and the first ciphertext 1. Such decryption processing is sequentially executed for the ciphertext 2, ciphertext 3, ciphertext 4, ciphertext 5 and ciphertext 6 while the counter value is added and updated, and included in the data of the processing result The MAC check is performed using the data of the existing MAC (see FIG. 5). Specifically, a MAC is generated according to the MAC algorithm from the data of the decoding processing result, and the generated MAC is compared with the data of the MAC included in the transmission data from the main control unit 323 to see if they match. Check. If they are correctly decoded, they match, but in this case, because the value of the counter used for decoding is incorrect, they are not correctly decoded, and it is determined as a result of MAC check that both do not match. It is determined that the MAC is abnormal, that is, decoding failure.

  When it is determined that such a MAC abnormality, that is, a decoding failure, the CU communication control unit 80 executes a restoration process to restore the incorrect counter value to the correct counter value. In CU communication control unit 80, the value of telegram counter unit N is used for "R, N + 2, 0", which is the counter value at the start of decryption that was initially used to decrypt the ciphertext determined to be decryption failure. Decryption processing of the ciphertext is sequentially performed using the counter value sequentially decremented while updating by “1” each time, the above-described MAC check is performed, and it is determined whether or not the decryption is correctly performed. If it is determined that the MAC is abnormal as a result of the MAC check even if the subtraction processing of the counter value is performed a predetermined number of times, the CU communication control unit 80 next determines “R, N + 2, 0” which is the counter value at the start of decoding On the other hand, the message counter unit N is updated by adding “1” at a time, and decoding processing using the added counter value is sequentially performed to perform MAC check. When it is determined that the MAC check is appropriate and the decryption is successful, the plaintext for which the decryption is successful is taken as an appropriate operation instruction. Then, the counter value obtained by adding “1” and updating to the value of the message counter used when it is determined that the decryption is successful is used to encrypt the first plaintext 1 of the next operation response data.

  In the case of FIG. 70, decoding is performed using the counter value “R, N + 1, 0” obtained by subtracting the telegram counter N once from “R, N + 2, 0” which is the counter value at the start of decoding. MAC is determined to be normal and it is determined that decoding is successful.

  The first plaintext 1 of the operation response to be transmitted next is encrypted using the R, N + 2, 0 counter values updated by adding "1" to the value N + 1 of the message counter used when it is determined that the decryption is successful. To generate a ciphertext 1. Next, while adding and updating the encryption block counter unit “1” each, the ciphertext 2, ciphertext 3, ciphertext 4, ciphertext 5, and ciphertext 6 are sequentially generated and transmitted to the main control unit 323.

  At the start of decryption of “R, N + 2, 0”, which is the counter value obtained by adding “1” to the value N + 1 of the message counter used at generation of the ciphertext at the time of re-transmission, The first ciphertext 1 of the received ciphertext is decrypted as the first counter value of. Since the first ciphertext 1 is encrypted using the counter value of the counter value “R, N + 2, 0”, it is possible to properly decrypt using the same counter value. Then, the main control unit 323 sequentially decrypts the ciphertext 2, the ciphertext 3, the ciphertext 4, the ciphertext 5, and the ciphertext 6 while adding and updating the cipher block counter unit “1” at a time.

  The number of subtractions to the counter value in the above-described counter repair processing corresponds to the number of retries in which the main control unit 323 retransmits (retrys) the operation command when the operation response has not been reached. In the case of the present embodiment, the number of retries is limited to two, and there is no need to perform subtraction update of the telegram counter unit N beyond the deviation of the counter value caused by the two retries. Therefore, subtraction update of the counter value is performed up to two times.

  Next, based on FIG. 71, processing when an operation instruction from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80 has not been reached will be described. First, the main control unit 323 generates six-block ciphertext of the ciphertext 1 to ciphertext 6 using the counter values R, N, 0 to R, N + 1, 2 and transmits the ciphertext to the CU communication control unit 80. However, when the ciphertext does not reach the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 tries again a retry to encrypt the operation instruction of the same contents and to re-transmit the same to the CU communication control unit 80. The message counter unit used for encryption at the time of retransmission is N + 1 obtained by adding “1” to the value N of the message counter unit used for encryption at the time of transmission of the previous operation instruction. Therefore, using the counter value of “R, N + 1, 0”, the main control unit 323 generates the ciphertext 1 by encrypting the first plaintext 1 block of the operation instruction to be retransmitted. Next, the main control unit 323 sequentially updates the encrypted block counter unit by “1”, sequentially generates encrypted text 2, encrypted text 3, encrypted text 4, encrypted text 5, and encrypted text 6, and performs CU communication control. Retransmit to the unit 80.

  However, when the retransmitted ciphertext also does not reach CU communication control unit 80, main control unit 323 encrypts the operation instruction of the same content again and retransmits it to CU communication control unit 80. 2 Try the second retry. The operation instruction transmitted in the second retry arrives at the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 tries to decrypt the ciphertext. CU communication control unit 80 uses “R, N, 0”, which is a value obtained by adding “1” and updating to the last counter value used to encrypt the operation response transmitted to main control unit 323 last time. The first block of the sentence is decrypted, and the cipher block counter unit is added and updated one by one to the counter value "R, N, 0" while sequentially updating the ciphertext 2, ciphertext 3, ciphertext 4 , Try to decrypt ciphertext 5 and ciphertext 6.

  However, since the counter value on the main control unit 323 side and the counter value on the CU communication control unit 80 are out of order as a result of two retries of the main control unit 323, decryption to an appropriate plain text As a result of the MAC check described above, the MAC is abnormal and it is determined that decoding is unsuccessful.

  Then, the CU communication control unit 80 performs the process of repairing the out-of-order counter as described above. Cipher that has been retransmitted one by one while decrementing the telegram counter unit N by "1" for "R, N, 0" which is the count value initially used for the ciphertext judged to be a decryption failure Attempts to decode the sentence and performs MAC check. As described above, the number of executions of this subtraction update is limited to two, which is the number of retries. If the decryption is not successful even if the decryption is attempted by the subtraction and update of the counter value for two times, the CU communication control unit 80 causes the telegram counter unit of the counter value “R, N, 0” to On the other hand, the process of decrypting the ciphertext is tried while adding and updating "1" each time. The number of attempts to update this addition matches the number of retries to execute retransmission by the main control unit 323 when the operation instruction has not been reached. In the present embodiment, retry is performed up to two times. As a result, the addition update of the counter value is updated by adding and updating the number of retries up to two times.

  Then, as a result of the second addition update, the counter value becomes “R, N + 2, 0”, and the ciphertext 1 is decrypted using this counter value, and while the addition update of the encryption block counter portion is sequentially performed, the ciphertext 2 and the encryption By decrypting the sentence 3, the ciphertext 4, the ciphertext 5 and the ciphertext 6, the plaintext can be decrypted to a proper plaintext. As a result of the MAC check, the plaintext is judged to be proper and the decryption is judged to be successful. The CU communication control unit 80 takes in the operation instruction of the plaintext judged to be the decryption success. Then, the data of the operation response to it is encrypted and transmitted to the main control unit 323. At the time of the encryption, the value of “N + 3” obtained by adding and updating “1” to the value “N + 2” of the message counter unit used for the decryption processing determined to be successful is used. Therefore, the first block is encrypted using “R, N + 3, 0” to generate ciphertext 1. Next, while incrementing and updating the count value of the encryption block counter unit by “1”, the ciphertext 2, ciphertext 3, ciphertext 4, ciphertext 5, and ciphertext 6 are sequentially generated and transmitted to the main control unit 323 . The main control unit 323 decrypts the ciphertext using the value “N + 3” obtained by adding “1” to the value “N + 2” of the message counter unit used for the ciphertext transmitted in the second retry. That is, the ciphertext 1 of the first block is decrypted using “R, N + 3, 0”. The cipher block 2, the ciphertext 3, the ciphertext 4, the ciphertext 5, and the ciphertext 6 are sequentially decrypted while adding and updating the cipher block counter unit by "1" each time.

  Next, based on FIG. 72, a modification of the process at the abnormal time when the operation response has not been reached will be described. This FIG. 72 is a modification of the above-described FIG. 70, and here, mainly the differences will be described. When the operation response from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 has not arrived yet, the main control unit 323 executes a retry for retransmitting the same operation instruction as the previous one. When the operation instruction (cipher text) retransmitted by the retry reaches the CU communication control unit 80, the value of the counter between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is the same as in FIG. 70. Mistaken. As a result, when the CU communication control unit 80 attempts to decrypt the ciphertext, as a result of the MAC check, the MAC is abnormal and it is determined that the decryption is unsuccessful. In this modification, it is determined that decoding is impossible when the decoding fails, and an operation response of the decoding error is transmitted to the main control unit 323. At that time, the CU communication control unit 80 encrypts the operation response of the decryption error using the key K in the SE1 mode, and transmits the ciphertext to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 receives it, decrypts the ciphertext using the key K which is a common key, and determines that a decryption error has occurred. Then, in order to initialize the value of the counter, a new random number R is generated, and the value of the random number is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as the initial vector unit R. At this time, the key K is used to encrypt the value of the initial vector part R in the SE1 mode, and the ciphertext is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the received ciphertext in the SE1 mode using the key K, and acquires the initial vector portion R. As a result, “R, 0, 0” which is the value of the counter initialized between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is shared.

  Next, the CU communication control unit 80 encrypts an operation response indicating that the update of the initial vector unit R is completed using the key K in the SE1 mode, and transmits the encrypted operation response to the main control unit 323.

  The main control unit 323 that has received it encrypts the same data as the operation instruction retransmitted last time in the SE2 mode and transmits it to the CU communication control unit 80. At this time, encryption is performed using the counter value "R, 0, 0" initialized to encrypt the first block. Then, while adding and updating “1” at a time to the cipher block counter unit, ciphertext 2, ciphertext 3, ciphertext 4, ciphertext 5 and ciphertext 6 are sequentially generated and transmitted to CU communication control unit 80 .

  CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the first block of ciphertext using the initialized counter value, that is, “R, 0, 0”. Next, while adding and updating “1” at a time to the cipher block counter unit, ciphertext 2, ciphertext 3, ciphertext 4, ciphertext 5 and ciphertext 6 are sequentially decrypted to generate plaintext.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a modification of the process when an operation instruction has not reached an abnormality will be described. FIG. 73 is a modification of the process when the operation instruction has not been reached in FIG. 71 described above, and the difference will be mainly described here. When the operation instruction reaches the CU communication control unit 80 by the second retry by the main control unit 323, the value of the counter between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is inconsistent. As a result, when the CU communication control unit 80 attempts to decrypt the ciphertext, as a result of the MAC check, the MAC is abnormal and it is determined that the decryption is unsuccessful. In this modification, it is determined that decoding is impossible when the decoding fails, and an operation response of the decoding error is transmitted to the main control unit 323.

  At that time, the CU communication control unit 80 encrypts the operation response of the decryption error using the key K in the SE1 mode, and transmits the ciphertext to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 receives it, decrypts the ciphertext using the key K which is a common key, and determines that a decryption error has occurred. Then, in order to initialize the value of the counter, a new random number R is generated, and the value of the random number is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as the initial vector unit R. At this time, the key K is used to encrypt the value of the initial vector part R in the SE1 mode, and the ciphertext is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the received ciphertext in the SE1 mode using the key K, and acquires the initial vector portion R. As a result, “R, 0, 0” which is the value of the counter initialized between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is shared.

  Next, the CU communication control unit 80 encrypts an operation response indicating that the update of the initial vector unit R is completed using the key K in the SE1 mode, and transmits the encrypted operation response to the main control unit 323.

  The main control unit 323 that has received it encrypts the same data as the operation instruction retransmitted last time in the SE2 mode and transmits it to the CU communication control unit 80. At this time, encryption is performed using the counter value "R, 0, 0" initialized to encrypt the first block. Then, while adding and updating “1” at a time to the cipher block counter unit, ciphertext 2, ciphertext 3, ciphertext 4, ciphertext 5 and ciphertext 6 are sequentially generated and transmitted to CU communication control unit 80 .

  CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the first block of ciphertext using the initialized counter value, that is, “R, 0, 0”. Next, while adding and updating “1” at a time to the cipher block counter unit, ciphertext 2, ciphertext 3, ciphertext 4, ciphertext 5 and ciphertext 6 are sequentially decrypted to generate plaintext.

  Next, encryption processing and decryption processing in the SE2 mode will be described based on FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b). First, an encryption key is issued in S100 of FIG. 74 (a). This encryption key is a main authentication key or a communication key (session key), and will be simply referred to as a "key" hereinafter. The key is shared between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80.

  Next, in S101, a random number R is issued. The random number R is generated by the main control unit 323. Next, in S102, the telegram counter unit N of the counter and the cipher block counter unit I are reset to "0". Next, in S103, the random number R is encrypted in the SE1 mode with the key issued in S100, and transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80.

  As shown in S130 of FIG. 74 (b), the CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the transmitted encrypted R in the SE1 mode using a key to generate plaintext R, and the process proceeds to S131. While storing R as an initial vector unit, the message counter unit N and the encryption block counter unit I are reset to a value of "0".

  On the transmission side of the ciphertext, a message (plaintext) to be transmitted is generated in S104 of FIG. 74 (a). The generated plaintext is divided into blocks of 16 bits, and each block is encrypted using the current value of the counter to generate a ciphertext (S105). Then, when the encryption of one block is completed, the control proceeds to S106, and it is determined whether the encryption of all frames of the plaintext message generated at S104, that is, all blocks is completed. If the process has not been completed yet, the control proceeds to S107, and the encryption block counter unit I is updated by adding "1", and then the process proceeds to S105. Encryption of the next block according to S105 is performed to generate a ciphertext.

  By repeating the loop of S105 → S106 → S107 → S105, when encryption of all frames of the telegram is completed, the control proceeds to S108, and the telegram counter unit N is updated by adding "1". Next, at S109, the encryption block counter unit I is cleared to "0".

  Next, the control proceeds to S110, and processing for transmitting the ciphertext to the other party is performed. Next, in S111, it is determined whether a decoding error has been received. This decryption error is transmitted at S162 or S170 described later when decryption of the ciphertext fails at the receiving side, and if it is received, error processing is performed at S112. This error processing is, for example, processing such as displaying an error on a display device, notifying an upper server of the occurrence of an error, and stopping operation control thereafter.

  After the ciphertext transmitted in S110 is received in S132 of FIG. 74 (b), decryption processing is performed in S133. As described above, this decoding process is a process of decoding for each block using the current counter value of the counter. After the decoding process is performed on all the frames, the MAC check is performed as described above to determine whether the decoding is successful. If the decryption fails, the counter repair process of S135 is performed.

  FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the specific control contents of the counter repair processing shown at S135 described above. FIG. 75 (a) shows the counter repair processing shown in FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, and FIG. 75 (b) shows the repair processing of the modification shown in FIG. 72 and FIG.

  First, counter repair processing 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). First, in step S150, the telegram counter unit N in the value of the counter used for the decryption processing of the first block of the ciphertext that has failed to be decrypted is updated by subtracting “1”. Next, in S151, the decoding process is performed for each block using the value of the decremented counter, and a MAC check is performed to determine whether the decoding is successful or not. If the decryption is not successful, the value of the repair counter SK is incremented by one and updated in S154. The repair counter SK is a counter for counting how many times repair has been attempted. Next, in S155, it is determined whether the repair counter SK has reached a predetermined value. As described above, this predetermined value is the value of the number of retries 2 on the ciphertext transmitter side.

  If the predetermined value has not yet been reached, the control returns to S150, and the control of S150 to S155 is repeatedly executed. If the decoding is successful during the repetitive execution, a determination of YES is made in S152, the control proceeds to S153, and the recovery counter SK is reset to "0".

  On the other hand, when the processing of S150 to S155 is repeatedly executed and the value of the repair counter SK reaches a predetermined value, a determination of YES is made in S155, control proceeds to S156, and the current message counter N is repaired. The value of the counter SK is added. As a result, the value of the telegram counter unit N becomes the value of the telegram counter unit N of the last counter value used at the time of decoding failure. Then, “1” is added to and updated in the message counter unit N in S157, and a decoding process using the counter value is performed in S158. Next, in S159, a MAC check is performed to determine whether the decryption is successful or not. If the decryption is not successful, the recovery counter SK is updated by subtracting “1” in S160, and the value of the recovery counter SK is increased in S161. A determination is made as to whether it has become "0". If not, the control returns to S157, and the control of S157 to S161 is repeatedly executed.

  If it is determined in S159 that the decoding is successful while the repetitive execution is being performed, the control proceeds to S153, and processing for resetting the recovery counter SK is performed. The plaintext judged to be successfully decrypted is the correct plaintext.

  On the other hand, if the value of the repair counter SK becomes "0" by repeatedly executing the processing of S157 to S161, it means that the repair of the counter has been performed a predetermined number of times, and in that case, the control proceeds to S162. A process of encrypting the information indicating the decryption error using the key K in the SE1 mode and transmitting the ciphertext is performed.

  This decoding error information is received at S112 of FIG. 74 (a) described above, and a determination of YES is made.

  Next, counter repair processing 2 of the modification will be described based on FIG. 75 (b). In S170, processing is performed to encrypt information indicating a decryption error using the key K in the SE1 mode, and processing is performed to transmit the encrypted information to the other party. If this decoding error is received, a determination of YES is made in S112 of FIG. 74A, and in the case of this modification, if a determination of YES is made in S112, the control proceeds to S101. Then, after a new random number R is generated in S101 and the message counter N and the encrypted block counter I are reset in S102, the random number R is encrypted in S103 to be the value of the initial vector part to the other party. Processing to transmit is performed. The transmitted value of the encrypted initial vector portion is received in S171 of FIG. 75 (b). Next, in S172, the information indicating that the update of the initial vector portion R is completed is encrypted by the SE1 mode using the key K, processing is performed to transmit the ciphertext to the other side, and then the control is performed as shown in FIG. It transfers to S130 of b).

  At S130, processing is performed to decrypt the ciphertext of the initial vector portion R received at S171 described above using the key K in the SE1 mode. Then, the value of the initial vector section R of the plaintext generated as a result of decryption is stored, and the message counter section N and the encrypted block counter section I are reset to "0" (S131).

  Then, using the values of R, 0, 0, processing is performed to decrypt the ciphertext received in S132 in S133.

  If the data length of the received data is abnormal or if CRC error occurs as a result of CRC check, the receiving side discards the received message without updating the value of the counter. . Then, processing for returning a request for re-transmission is performed. On the side which has received it, processing of subtracting the value of the telegram counter unit N in the current count value of the counter by "1", decoding the same telegram and retransmitting is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, an outline of communication data such as a command and a response communicated between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 will be described. FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining communication data such as a command and a response communicated between the upper server 801 and the CU 3.

  The data of the operation request transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU 3 is a command (CMD) between the upper server 801 and the CU 3, and the data transmitted from the CU 3 to the upper server 801 as an operation response to the command is a response (RES ).

  FIG. 76 shows the transmission direction, the names of transmission information, and the outline thereof. Authentication control information CMD is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the main control unit 323 of CU3. The authentication control information CMD notifies the CU 3 of control information related to security. Authentication control information RES is transmitted from the main control unit 323 of CU 3 to the upper server 801. The authentication control information RES is to notify the upper server 801 that the authentication control information CMD has been successfully processed.

  The authentication operation designation information CMD is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the main control unit 323 of CU3. The authentication operation designation information CMD is to notify the CU 3 of a security-related operation designation value. The authentication operation specification RES is transmitted from the main control unit 323 of CU 3 to the upper server 801. The authentication control information RES is to notify the upper server 801 that the authentication operation specification CMD has been successfully processed. In the following description, security related information is called security related information.

  An authentication inquiry ATT is transmitted from the main control unit 323 of CU 3 to the upper server 801. The authentication query ATT queries the upper server 801 for an authentication operation. An authentication result notification CMD is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the main control unit 323 of CU3. The authentication result notification CMD is to transmit an inquiry operation result of the authentication operation to the CU 3.

  Such security related information is stored in the security related information storage unit provided in each of the upper server 801 and the CU 3 in association with the version number information indicating the version number of the information. Such a security related information storage unit can store and retain stored information until the next power-on even in the power-off state of the flash memory device, the hard disk device, and the backup RAM in each of the upper server 801 and CU3. Storage medium.

  An error notification ATT is transmitted from the main control unit 323 of CU 3 to the upper server 801. The error notification ATT notifies the upper server 801 of error information related to security.

  The trace recovery CMD is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the main control unit 323 of CU3. The trace recovery CMD is for requesting the CU 3 to transmit security-related trace data. The trace recovery RES is transmitted from the main control unit 323 of CU3 to the upper server 801. The trace recovery RES notifies the upper server 801 that the authentication operation specification CMD has been successfully processed.

  The version number information request 2CMD is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the main control unit 323 of CU3. The version number information request 2 CMD requests the CU 3 for version number information indicating version numbers of authentication control information and authentication operation designation information. The version information transmission 2 RES is transmitted from the main control unit 323 of CU 3 to the upper server 801. The version number information transmission 2 RES is to notify the upper server 801 of version number information of security related information stored and held in the CU 3.

  For each of such security related information, standard setting information is preset as default data (data of “initial value” of various information described later), and is configured of a keyboard or the like provided in the upper server 801 In the input operation unit, the manager of the game arcade can change (update) the data by inputting the data. Therefore, when no change operation is performed on the security related information in the upper server 801, the security related information is set to data of "initial value". When security related information is input to the upper server 801, for example, it is possible to input each gaming machine for each gaming machine in the game arcade or to input and set a unified threshold value for each model. is there.

  In the upper server 801, security related information may be acquired and used as follows. When the machine type information of the gaming machine and the setting information of the security related information are associated in advance, that is, when the model information and the setting information of the security related information correspond on a one-to-one basis, the setting information is input The model information is downloaded to the upper server 801 from a server higher than the upper server 801 to be set, and the upper model server 801 stores the downloaded model information so that the security is one-to-one corresponding to the model information. The upper information server 801 may select and store the related information, and use the security related information. In addition, such security related information can be automatically changed (updated) to predetermined data at predetermined timing (for example, periodic timing) regardless of input. You may

  Next, the contents of the main ones of the communication data shown in FIG. 76 will be described in detail based on FIGS.

  Referring to FIG. 77, as authentication inquiry ATT, authentication inquiry ATT of communication control IC information which is information of SID of CU communication control unit 80 and game which is information regarding main chip ID and payout chip ID in P unit 2 There is an authentication inquiry ATT of machine chip information. The authentication query ATT includes a common part and trace data (authentication query). Data such as the serial number of the main control unit 323 is indicated by the data of the common unit. The trace data includes inquiry type, communication control IC information held by the main control unit 323, and gaming machine chip information such as main chip ID and payout chip ID acquired from P units.

  Referring to FIG. 78, as an authentication result CMD, a communication control IC information inquiry result CMD transmitted according to an authentication inquiry ATT of communication control IC information, and a gaming machine transmitted according to an authentication inquiry ATT of gaming machine chip information There is a chip information inquiry result CMD. The authentication result CMD includes a response type, a communication control IC information inquiry result, an inquiry result, a gaming machine chip information inquiry result, an inquiry result 1 and an inquiry result 2.

  The data of the response type indicates which type of the communication control IC information inquiry result and the gaming machine chip information inquiry result. In the case of the communication control IC information inquiry result, the presence / absence of the inquired communication control IC information (SID of the CU communication control unit 80) in the upper server 801 is indicated as the inquiry result of the communication control IC information. If it is the gaming machine chip information inquiry result, the data of the inquiry result 1 of the gaming machine chip information communication control IC information inquiry result indicates the presence or absence of the inquired main chip ID (main control chip information) in the upper server 801 Be Then, if it is the gaming machine chip information inquiry result, the presence or absence of the payout chip ID (disbursement control chip information) inquired by the data of the inquiry result 2 of the gaming machine chip information communication control IC information inquiry result in the upper server 801 Is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 79, authentication control information CMD is not transmitted when CU 3 already stores the information of the same version number. The authentication control information CMD includes data of an authentication control information version number, a number of operation permission days for CU authentication NG, a number of operation permission days for gaming machine authentication NG, and a communication control IC validation key.

  The authentication control information version number is the version number of the authentication control information stored in the upper server 801. The operation permitted days at CU authentication NG indicates the operation permitted days when the communication control IC information inquired of the upper server 801 by the authentication inquiry ATT from CU3 is not registered in the upper server 801 (at the time of authentication NG) And is set within the range of 0 to 14 days. Here, when the operation permission days is 0 days, the operation is not permitted. In addition, the operation permission days at the time of gaming machine authentication NG is the operation permitted days when the gaming machine chip information for which the upper server 801 is inquired by the authentication inquiry ATT from CU3 is not registered in the upper server 801 (during authentication NG). And is set within the range of 0 to 14 days. Here, when the operation permission days is 0 days, the operation is not permitted. The communication control IC validation key indicates a key used to validate (activate) the CU communication control unit 80.

  Referring to FIG. 80, authentication operation designation CMD is not transmitted when CU 3 already holds the information of the same version number. The authentication operation specification CMD includes data of authentication operation specification version number, base abnormality detection threshold in low base state, base abnormality detection threshold in high base state, presence / absence of game machine trial run mode, and subtraction ball abnormality detection set value It is done.

  The authentication operation designation version number is a version number of authentication operation designation information stored in the upper server 801.

  Here, the base is a ratio of the number obtained by the player by being added to the game ball in accordance with the winning with respect to the number of shots for the game ball, for example, It is calculated based on an arithmetic expression such as “(%)”. The base abnormality detection threshold is data for setting the presence / absence of the base abnormality detection when detecting an abnormal state of the base in the CU 3 and its constant (threshold). The base abnormality detection threshold includes a low base time threshold used as a base abnormality detection set value in a low base state and a high base time threshold used as a base abnormality detection set value in a high base state.

  The low base threshold value has a set value in the range of 0 to 100% and an initial value of 30%. Such a low base threshold indicates “no detection” when it is set to 0%, and “detected” when it is set to other than 0%. Thus, base abnormality detection is performed using the set low base threshold value when the low base threshold is other than 0%, and base abnormality using the low base threshold when the low base threshold is 0%. Detection is not performed.

  The high base threshold value has a set value in the range of 0 to 150% and an initial value of 120%. Such a high base time threshold indicates "not detected" when it is set to 0%, and indicates "detected" if it is set to other than 0%. Thus, base abnormality detection using the set high base threshold is performed when the high base threshold is other than 0%, and base abnormality using the high base threshold when the high base threshold is 0%. Detection is not performed.

  The gaming machine test mode setting value is data for setting the presence or absence of a trial operation mode such as gaming machine nail adjustment. In the game machine test mode set value, "test game mode present" or "test game mode not present" is indicated, and the initial value is "test game mode not present".

  The subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is data for setting presence / absence of detection of an abnormal state of the subtraction ball number (number of balls subtracted from the number of game balls based on the shot detection signal) in CU3 and its constant (threshold) It is. The abnormal state of the subtraction ball set here is detected based on the occurrence of winning of the game ball continuously for the set number of balls despite the fact that the game ball is not fired. The threshold value of the subtraction ball abnormality detection set value is data for setting the number of winning balls in which the continuous winning is determined to be an abnormal state of the number of subtraction balls. The set value of the subtraction ball abnormality detection set value is in the range of 0 to 99 balls, and the initial value is 5 balls. Such a subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value indicates "detection absent" when it is set to 0 ball, and indicates "detection present" when it is set to other than 0 ball. Thereby, when the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is other than 0 ball, subtraction ball abnormality detection is performed using the set subtraction ball number threshold value, and when the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is 0 ball, subtraction ball abnormality Detection is not performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86, representative processes relating to security-related control information performed by the upper server 801, the main control unit 323 of CU3, and the CU communication control unit 80 of CU3 will be described.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing processing of a start-up sequence as a sequence from power-on of CU3 to on-run state. FIG. 81 shows processing executed by the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 after the power of the CU 3 is turned on, with the upper server 801 operating.

  After the communication state has been established between the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323, the following communication of commands and responses is performed between the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323. Transmission of authentication CMD and response of authentication RES in response, transmission of version information request CMD and transmission of version information transmission RES in response, transmission of version information request 2CMD and transmission of version information in response to response 2RES, time setting Transmission of CMD and response of authentication RES to that, transmission of control information CMD and response of control information RES to that, and transmission of BB operation specification CMD and response of BB operation specification RES to this are executed.

  Among such data, version number information request 2 CMD indicates whether the version number information of each of the authentication control information stored in both upper server 801 and main control unit 323 and the authentication operation designation match. The upper server 801 is a command for requesting the main control unit 323 to send back version information of each of the authentication control information and the authentication operation designation in order to confirm whether this is the case. The version number information transmission 2 RES is a response in which the main control unit 323 returns the version number information of the authentication control information and the authentication operation designation stored and held in response to the version number information request 2CMD.

  In the upper server 801, with regard to authentication control information and authentication operation designation, version information stored in the upper server 801 and version information stored in the main control unit 323 based on the received version information transmission 2 RES. It is determined whether or not there is a match. Then, with regard to the information which does not match among the authentication control information and the authentication operation designation, the information stored in the upper server 801 is transmitted to the main control unit 323 like the authentication control information CMD and the authentication operation designation CMD described above.

  As described above, when the version numbers of the security related information do not match, when the security related information is changed in the upper server 801 when the power supply of the CU3 is in the OFF state, replacement of the CU side device such as replacement of the CU3 takes place. When the wrong security related information is stored in CU3 due to a communication failure when the power of CU3 is on, and when the power of CU3 is on, the security stored in CU3 due to noise etc. It includes when relevant information changes to inappropriate information.

  The main control unit 323 changes the stored authentication control information to data of the authentication control information indicated by the received command when the authentication control information CMD is received, and stores it when the authentication operation designation CMD is received. The specified authentication operation designation is changed to data of the authentication operation designation indicated by the received command. Thereby, when the authentication control information and the authentication operation designation data stored in the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 are different when the power of CU3 is turned on, the data on the main control unit 323 side is changed. As a result, security related information stored by both parties can be matched.

  When the change of the authentication control information according to the authentication control information CMD is completed in the main control unit 323, the authentication control information RES is transmitted to the upper server 801. Further, when the change of the authentication operation designation according to the authentication operation designation CMD is completed in the main control unit 323, the authentication operation designation RES is transmitted to the upper server 801.

  Thereafter, between the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323, transmission of trace recovery CMD and return of trace recovery RES to it, transmission of trace recovery (security) CMD and return of trace recovery (security) RES, and , And the response of the start CMD and the start RES to this are executed, and the online state is established.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing processing of a setting value change sequence as a sequence when information such as change of setting value of security related information is changed after CU3 and main control unit 323 are brought into the online state. .

  As described above, in the upper server 801, it is possible to change information such as changing setting values of security related information such as authentication control information and authentication operation designation. FIG. 82 shows processing executed by the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 when such information is changed in the online state.

  In the online state, when security related information such as authentication control information and authentication operation designation is changed, after transmission of control information CMD and return of control information RES corresponding thereto, authentication control information CMD and Among the authentication operation specification CMD, a command indicating the changed setting value is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the main control unit 323. Then, the main control unit 323 changes the information indicated by the received command among the stored authentication control information and the authentication operation designation, as in the case of the start-up sequence described above.

  Thereby, in the online state, when security related information such as authentication control information and authentication operation designation is changed in the upper server 801, based on commands such as the authentication control information CMD and the authentication operation designation CMD, The security related information stored in the main control unit 323 of CU3 is changed.

  Next, an example of an authentication sequence when authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is not performed when the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 are in the online state will be described. .

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example in which the operation is permitted in the authentication sequence when the authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is not performed in the online state.

  The host server 801 is used in a game arcade where the host server 801 is provided in an authentication information storage unit made of a predetermined storage medium such as a RAM, a flash memory device, a hard disk drive, and a backup memory (currently used Communication control IC information is stored for the CU communication control unit 80 of each CU 3 (including those stored as spares). In the upper server 801, whether or not the communication control IC information is registered in the authentication information storage unit in response to an inquiry about the communication control IC information from the main control unit 323 based on such data of the communication control IC information It is searchable. In the CU manufacturer, a CU information registration server is provided which registers information on such CU at the shipping stage of CU3. Such a CU information registration server is communicably connected to the upper server 801, and when shipping a CU3, the CU information registration server distributes the information related to the CU online to the upper server 801, to the game arcade. Communication control IC information (SID of CU communication control unit 80) corresponding to the main control unit 323 of each CU 3 introduced is additionally stored in the authentication information storage unit. Such a CU information registration server may be provided in a third party organization other than the game arcade and the maker, and may distribute information on CU online.

  Also, in the higher-level server 801, in the authentication information storage unit, data such as chip ID (main chip ID, payout chip ID), maker code, format code, etc. is associated with the game machines manufactured by all game machine makers. The data of the gaming machine chip information is stored. In the upper server 801, when the main control unit 323 makes an inquiry from the gaming machine chip information, whether or not the gaming machine chip information is registered in the storage data of the authentication information storage unit is based on data such as chip ID. , Searchable. The P-unit manufacturer is provided with a P-unit information registration server for registering information on such P-units at the shipping stage of the P-units 2. Such a P-unit information registration server is communicably connected to the upper server 801, and when shipping the P-unit 2, the P-unit information registration server should online distribute information on the P-unit to the upper server 801. Then, gaming machine chip information on each P unit is additionally stored in the authentication information storage unit. Such a P-unit information registration server may be provided in a third party organization other than the game arcade and the maker, and may distribute information on P-units online. The above-described CU information registration server and the P-unit information registration server may be configured by separately provided servers, or may be configured by one server.

  In the authentication information storage unit, the gaming machine chip information of each P unit 2 (including those currently used and those reserved as spares) used in the game arcade provided with the upper server 801 May be stored.

  In addition, the communication control IC information and the gaming machine chip information may be stored in different storage units instead of the same storage unit.

  Referring to FIG. 83, when the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 are online and authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is not performed, the main control unit 323 is An inquiry ATT for inquiring whether the communication control IC information (SID of the CU communication control unit 80) possessed by the CU communication control unit 80 connected to the main control unit 323 has been registered is transmitted to the upper server 801 from Ru. In main control unit 323, communication control IC information (SID) of connected CU communication control unit 80 is written in each EEPROM 808, for example, at a predetermined timing such as introduction to a game arcade, etc. after manufacture of CU3. . The SID thus written to the EEPROM 808 is transmitted by the inquiry ATT.

  In the upper server 801, when the authentication inquiry ATT is received, the communication control IC information specified by the inquiry ATT is searched from among the data of the communication control IC information stored in the authentication information storage unit provided in the upper server 801. Be done.

  In the upper server 801, in the authentication information storage unit, the CU communication control unit 80 of CU3 used in the game arcade provided with the upper server 801 (including those currently used and those stored as spares). Communication control IC information of the main control unit 323 is stored in association with the SID of the main control unit 323, and based on the SID of the main control unit 323 specified by the received authentication inquiry ATT, the stored data of the authentication information storage unit is handled It is searched whether the communication control IC information to be registered is registered.

  In the upper server 801, when the corresponding communication control IC information is registered as a result of the search, the authentication result CMD specifying the presence of the communication control IC information is transmitted to the main control unit 323. On the other hand, in the upper server 801, when the corresponding communication control IC information is not registered as a result of the search, an authentication result CMD specifying no communication control IC information is transmitted to the main control unit 323.

  When the authentication result CMD is received, the main control unit 323 confirms whether the communication control IC information of the connected CU communication control unit 80 is registered based on the received authentication result CMD.

  When the main control unit 323 determines that the communication control IC information is registered, a communication control IC authentication sequence as shown in FIG. 9 is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. As a result, mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is performed. On the other hand, when the main control unit 323 determines that the communication control IC information is not registered in the main control unit 323, the communication control IC authentication sequence is not executed.

  Then, if the result of the mutual authentication is normal, the device information request by the main control unit 323 as shown in FIG. 10 and the device information response by the CU communication control unit 80 corresponding to the device information request are performed. A gaming machine chip information acquisition sequence for acquiring information such as a main chip ID and a payout chip ID is executed.

  When the gaming machine chip information is acquired, an inquiry ATT for inquiring whether the acquired gaming machine chip information is registered is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the host server 801.

  In the upper server 801, when the authentication inquiry ATT is received, the main chip ID and the payout chip ID, which are gaming machine chip information specified by the inquiry ATT, of the gaming machine chip information stored in the authentication information storage unit described above. It is searched from among the data.

  In the upper server 801, when the inquired gaming machine chip information is registered as a result of the search, the authentication result CMD specifying the presence of the gaming machine chip information is transmitted to the main control unit 323. On the other hand, in the upper server 801, when the communication control IC information inquired about is not registered as a result of the search, the authentication result CMD specifying no gaming machine chip information is transmitted to the main control unit 323.

  When the authentication result CMD is received, the main control unit 323 confirms, based on the received authentication result CMD, whether or not the gaming machine chip information of the gaming machine to which the CU 3 is connected is registered.

  When the main control unit 323 determines that the gaming machine chip state is registered, the main control unit 323 transmits a gaming machine authentication result notification indicating that the authentication result of the gaming machine is normal to the CU communication control unit 80. Be done. CU communication control unit 80 transmits a gaming machine authentication result response in response to receiving the gaming machine authentication result notification. After communication of such information is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, communication between the CU3 and the P-unit 2 becomes possible, and insertion and receipt of a card into the CU3 is performed. It becomes possible.

  As described above, since it is permitted to play a game under the condition that the communication control IC information is registered in the upper server 801, when the IC chip constituting the CU communication control unit 80 is replaced with an incorrect one. Game is not allowed. This makes it possible to check whether there is a possibility that the IC chip constituting the CU communication control unit 80 has been replaced with an unauthorized one. In addition, since it is permitted to play a game under the condition that the gaming machine chip information is registered in the upper level server 801, the gaming machine chips such as the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are replaced with fraudulent ones. In the case, the game is not acceptable. This makes it possible to check whether there is a possibility that the gaming machine chip has been replaced with an unauthorized one.

  Furthermore, since it is permitted to play a game on condition that the communication control IC information is registered in the upper server 801 and the gaming machine chip information is registered in the upper server 801, CU3 and P units are included. Security on the IC chip in 2 can be further improved.

  Next, when the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 are in the online state, an example when the main control unit 323 receives an authentication result CMD specifying no communication control IC information from the upper server 801 will be described. Do.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example in which the time-limited operation permission is permitted in the authentication sequence when the authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is not performed when in the online state.

  When the main control unit 323 receives an authentication result CMD specifying no communication control IC information from the upper server 801 when the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 are online, the main control unit 323 It is determined that communication control IC information is not registered.

  As described above, when the communication control IC information is not registered when in the online state, the main control unit 323 controls the CU communication control unit within the range of operation permission days at the time of CU authentication NG in the above-mentioned security related information. It permits the execution of the communication control IC authentication sequence as described above between 80 and 80. In that case, the CU authentication NG operation permitted days counting unit is provided in the same storage medium as the authentication information storage unit, and the operation when CU authentication NG is set as the initial value when the registration non-information is first registered. By storing the value of the permitted number of days and counting down the operation permitted number of days as the number of days elapses, it is determined whether or not it is within the operation permitted number of days. The data in the CU authentication NG operation permitted days counting unit may be stored in the authentication information storage unit in association with the no-registration information.

  When the main control unit 323 receives an authentication result CMD specifying no gaming machine chip information from the upper server 801 when the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 are online, the main control unit The H.323 determines that gaming machine chip information is not registered.

  As described above, when the gaming machine chip information is not registered when the gaming machine is in the online state, the main control unit 323 determines whether or not the gaming machine has the above-mentioned gaming machine authentication NG days. It is permitted to transmit to the CU communication control unit 80 a gaming machine authentication result notification indicating that the authentication result is normal. In that case, the gaming machine authentication NG operation permitted days counting unit is provided in the same storage medium as the authentication information storage unit, and when the non-registration information is first registered, the gaming machine authentication NG time is set as the initial value. By storing the value of the operation permitted days of the above and downloading the operation permitted days according to the passage of the days, it is judged whether or not it is within the range of the operation permitted days. The data of the gaming machine authentication NG operation permitted days counting unit may be stored in the authentication information storage unit in association with the no-registration information.

  Even when at least one of the communication control IC information and the gaming machine chip information is not registered in the online state by performing such control, the main control unit 323 performs the aforementioned gaming machine authentication NG time. Communication between the CU 3 and the P unit 2 is possible within the range of the operation permission days of the, and insertion and receipt of a card become possible.

  As described above, even if at least one of the communication control IC information and the gaming machine chip information is not registered in the host server 801, within a limited period, based on the communication control IC information and the gaming machine chip information. It is permitted to play a game. Thus, for example, when there is communication control IC information and gaming machine chip information that could not be confirmed to be registered in the upper server 801 due to a delay in registration of information in the upper server 801 and an abnormality in the communication state. However, since it is possible to play the game for a limited time, it is possible to minimize the state in which the gaming machine can not operate. In the case where at least one of the communication control IC information and the gaming machine chip information is not registered in the upper server 801, it is difficult to believe that the payment will be performed fraudulently, so permission is not limited to the period. You may do it.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example in which the operation is disabled in the authentication sequence when the authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is not performed when in the online state.

  When the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 are in the online state, the main control unit 323 receives an authentication result CMD specifying no communication control IC information from the upper server 801, and the main control unit 323 communicates If it is judged that the control IC information is not registered and execution of the communication control IC authentication sequence is permitted in the operation permitted days at CU authentication NG, the communication control IC is out of the operation permitted days range Execution of the authentication sequence is prohibited. Then, in such a case, an error notification ATT indicating an abnormality in communication control IC authentication is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the upper server 801. In such a case, communication between the CU 3 and the P platform 2 becomes impossible, and card insertion and payment become impossible. Then, in CU 3, an error notification such as displaying an error message specifying the content of the error on the display 372 is performed.

  The error notification ATT includes data of occurrence date and time, error code, error information, SID of main control unit, main chip ID, and payout chip ID.

  When the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 are in the online state, the main control unit 323 receives an authentication result CMD specifying no communication control IC information from the upper server 801, and the main control unit 323 Determining that the machine chip information is not registered, and transmitting to the CU communication control unit 80 a gaming machine authentication result notification indicating that the authentication result of the gaming machine is normal in the operation permitted number of days at the time of gaming machine authentication NG When it becomes out of the operation permitted days range when it is permitted, transmission of such notification of gaming machine authentication result is prohibited. Then, in such a case, an error notification ATT indicating that the gaming machine authentication is abnormal is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the upper server 801.

  As described above, even if it is possible to play a game for a limited period of time because at least one of the communication control IC information and the gaming machine chip information is not registered in the upper server 801, the period is out of the period. In this case, an error occurs and the game is not permitted. In this way, if it can not be determined that at least one of the communication control IC information and the gaming machine chip information is registered even if the predetermined period is exceeded, the game is considered to be that the information is illegal. Since it is not permitted, it is possible to prevent the continuation of the game using the unauthorized communication control IC information and the gaming machine chip information.

  Next, an example will be described in which authentication of communication control IC information and authentication of gaming machine chip information are performed when the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 are not in the online state as described above but in the offline state. The off-line state in this case includes what is generated based on various off-line factors such as power failure and disconnection.

  In this example, when the authentication result CMD specifying communication control IC information existence is received, the main control unit 323 causes the communication control IC information to be higher in the authentication information storage unit provided in the main control unit 323. It is stored in association with information (hereinafter referred to as registered presence information) specifying that the server 801 is registered. The authentication information storage unit is configured of a flash memory device, a hard disk device, and a storage medium such as a backup RAM capable of storing and holding stored information until power is turned on next time the power is turned off. On the other hand, when the authentication result CMD specifying no communication control IC information is received, the main control unit 323 specifies that the communication control IC information is not registered in the upper server 801 in the authentication information storage unit. The information is stored in association with information (hereinafter referred to as registrationless information).

  Further, in this example, when the authentication result CMD specifying the gaming machine chip information existence is received, the main control unit 323 stores the gaming machine chip information in association with the registration presence information in the authentication information storage unit. Do. On the other hand, when receiving the authentication result CMD specifying no gaming machine chip information, the main control unit 323 stores the gaming machine chip information in association with the no registration information in the authentication information storage unit. Such gaming machine chip information may be stored not in the same storage as the communication control IC information but in a different storage.

  When the host server 801 and the main control unit 323 are in the offline state, the above-mentioned registration confirmation of the communication control IC information is the communication control IC information stored in the EEPROM 808 by the main control unit 323 as described above. This is performed by collating with the communication control IC information stored in the authentication information storage unit.

  If the communication control IC information to be collated is stored in the authentication information storage unit and is registered information, it is determined that the communication control IC information is present, and execution of the communication control IC authentication sequence is permitted. Be done. Further, if the communication control IC information to be collated is stored in the authentication information storage unit and it is not registered information, it is judged as no communication control IC information, and the number of operation permitted days at CU authentication NG is Within the range, execution of the communication control IC authentication sequence is permitted. In this case, the counting of the number of operation permitted days is performed in the same manner as the on-line described above. On the other hand, when the communication control IC information to be collated is not stored in the authentication information storage unit, execution of the communication control IC authentication sequence is prohibited. In this way, authentication of the communication control IC information can be performed even in the off-line state.

  In addition, when the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 are in the offline state, the above-mentioned registration confirmation of the gaming machine chip information is the gaming machine chip information acquired by the main control unit 323 as described above, It is performed by collating with the gaming machine chip information stored in the authentication information storage unit.

  Then, when the gaming machine chip information to be collated is stored in the authentication information storage unit and is registration presence information, it is determined that the gaming machine chip information is present, and the above authentication result of the gaming machine is normal. It is permitted to transmit the notification of the gaming machine authentication result indicating that the Further, when the gaming machine chip information to be collated is stored in the authentication information storage unit and the registration absence information is present, it is determined that the gaming machine chip information is absent, and the number of operation permitted days for gaming machine authentication NG The transmission of the notification of the gaming machine authentication result indicating that the authentication result of the above-mentioned gaming machine is normal within the range of is permitted. In this case, the counting of the number of operation permitted days is performed in the same manner as the on-line described above. On the other hand, when the gaming machine chip information to be collated is not stored in the authentication information storage unit, it is determined that there is no gaming machine chip information, and execution of the communication control IC authentication sequence is prohibited. In this way, authentication of the gaming machine chip information can be performed even in the offline state.

  If the communication control IC information to be collated is stored in the authentication information storage unit and is registered information, the communication control IC authentication sequence is within the range of operation permission days at the time of CU authentication NG. Execution may be permitted. In addition, when the gaming machine chip information to be collated is stored in the authentication information storage unit and is the registered information, the gaming machine of the above-mentioned gaming machine is within the range of operation permission days at the time of gaming machine authentication NG. The transmission of the notification of the gaming machine authentication result indicating that the authentication result is normal may be permitted.

  In addition, for each of the operation permission days for CU authentication NG and the operation permission days for gaming machine authentication NG, the setting values of the days may differ depending on whether the online state is permitted or the offline state. (E.g., online state set value> offline state set value). Similarly, with regard to the number of permitted operation days at the time of gaming machine authentication NG, the setting value of the number of days may be different between when permitted in the online state and when permitted in the offline state (for example, online state setting) Value> offline state setpoint).

  As described above, even if the upper server 801 and the main control unit 323 are in the offline state, the main control unit 323 stores predetermined conditions such that the communication control IC information and the gaming machine chip information are stored. Based on the above, it is permitted to play the game within a limited period of time. Thus, even in such an off-line state, it is possible to play a game for a limited time, so that the state in which the gaming machine can not be operated can be reduced as much as possible.

  Next, an example of an error notification sequence when a base abnormality is detected based on the above-described base abnormality detection setting value will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an error notification sequence when a base abnormality is detected based on the base abnormality detection setting value.

  When the P server 2 is in the on-line state between the host server 801 and the main control unit 323, the value of the base calculated in the main control unit 323 becomes equal to or higher than the base abnormality detection setting value. When the base abnormality is determined, an error notification ATT indicating the base abnormality is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the upper server 801. In such a case, communication with the P-unit 2 is controlled to be impossible.

  Next, an example of characteristic control performed when the upper server 801 stores a point in correspondence with the card number of each card and records the point of the card directly on the card will be described. .

  Here, a control will be described in which a point at the time of failure of the CU 3 is recorded on a card owned by a player using a predetermined card accepting unit via the upper server 801. An example of recording points on a card will be described by using a POS (Point Of Sales) terminal device as a prize processing device as an example.

  A characteristic control that is performed when a configuration is employed in which a host server stores points in association with the card number of the card and records points of the card directly on the card will be described. In addition to the upper-level server, a single function type point server for managing points of cards may be provided, and the points server may store points in association with the card number of each card. . When such a point server is provided, management of the point server may be delegated to management by a third party organization other than the game arcade and the maker. FIG. 87 is a block diagram showing a main configuration in the case of performing control to record points at CU3 failure on a card owned by a player using a POS terminal apparatus via the upper server 801.

  The upper server 801 has a point management function of managing points of each player, as described above. The point management function is activated by executing the processing steps of the point management program that is executed to manage points.

  In a normal state in which CU3 has not failed, a card is inserted into CU3 and, at the start of communication between CU3 and upper server 801 based on the insertion of the card, information of the number of gaming balls read from the card is point information As CU, it is transmitted to upper rank server 801 from CU3 with information on a card number (C-ID). Then, in a normal state in which the CU3 is not broken, the game is started, and information regarding points such as the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, etc. is transmitted from P2 to CU3 together with the information of C-ID The number of game balls is updated and stored. The point information as information on the latest number of gaming balls is transmitted from the CU 3 to the upper server 801 together with the C-ID from the CU 3 to the upper server 801 at a predetermined cycle. The transmission period of the point information from the CU 3 to the upper server 801 is set to a predetermined period such as 5 seconds, for example. If the predetermined cycle in this case is set to a too short cycle, the burden of data transmission and reception processing increases in CU3 and upper server 801, and the load of update processing of point data managed in upper server 801 increases. Do. On the other hand, when the predetermined cycle in this case is set to a too long cycle, there is a disadvantage that the difference in the number of points stored and held by the upper server 801 and the CU 3 becomes large. Therefore, the transmission period of the point information from the CU 3 to the upper server 801 is set to, for example, about 5 seconds which is expected to have an average of about 1 ball. By setting the transmission period of the point information in this way, the processing load on the upper server 801 and CU3 can be reduced, and the difference between the points stored and held in the upper server 801 and CU3 can be reduced. be able to.

  The transmission cycle of the point information from the CU 3 to the upper server 801 may be set to a short cycle closer to real time, such as 5 msec, for example. In addition, transmission of point information from CU3 to the upper server 801 is performed each time the point data stored in CU3 is updated based on the point data transmitted from P unit 2. May be

  The upper server 801 stores and manages data of points corresponding to each C-ID of the card. Whenever point information from the CU 3 is received, data of points (point storage information) corresponding to the received C-ID is updated and stored. As a result, in the upper server 801, the latest points are managed for each C-ID. If such a point management function in the upper server 801 is used, control to record points at CU3 failure on a card owned by a player using the predetermined card reception means via the upper server 801 can be performed. It becomes possible.

  In the game arcade, the prize exchange office is provided with POS 810 which is a POS terminal device used as a prize processing device. The POS 810 is provided with a microcomputer, a card reader / writer, a display unit including an LCD, and an operation unit including a touch panel. The microcomputer includes a CPU 45 as a control center, a ROM 48 storing a control operation program of the CPU 45, a RAM as a work area of the CPU, an input / output interface for inputting / outputting signals to / from external devices, and image control only , A character ROM for image display, and a VRAM 49 for image display.

  When a card owned by the player is inserted into the card reader / writer unit and accepted, it is possible to carry out a process of reading out the recorded information of the card and a process of writing various information in the card.

  When the card is received by the card reader / writer unit at the POS 810, the staff member performs an operation to designate a prize exchange at the operation unit according to the player's request, thereby exchanging points stored in the card for the prize Processing is performed.

  In addition, when the player brings a card forcibly ejected at the time of failure of the CU3, when the card is received by the card reader / writer unit in the POS 810, points are scored according to the player's request. If the clerk performs an operation to designate writing in the operation unit, as described below, processing is performed to write the latest point information based on the recovery data for the forced card at the time of failure of CU3. .

  If a failure occurs in which the CU3 does not operate normally, such as in the power off state or communication off state, the latest information on various information such as points for the player-owned card inserted in the CU3 You will not be able to write In particular, since the player may suffer damage if the point information can not be updated due to the failure of the CU 3, it is necessary to perform control to prevent the player's damage. Therefore, when a failure occurs in CU3, CU failure control is performed in which the information on the latest points is written to the card owned by the player by the other card processing means via the upper server 801.

  When CU failure control is performed, when the failed CU3 is replaced with a new CU3, the recovery information (recovery data) held by the P unit 2 as described above is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3, The recovery data is transmitted from the CU 3 to the upper server 801. The recovery data transmitted in this manner includes the latest point information at the time of failure occurrence in the CU 3 at the time of failure.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart of processing executed by each of the CU 3, the upper server 801, and the POS 801 when CU failure control is performed.

  In FIG. 88, (A) shows failure processing in CU 3, (B) shows a point management process in the upper server 801, and (C) shows a point writing process in the POS 810.

  In FIG. 88, (A) shows failure processing in CU 3, (B) shows a point management process in the upper server 801, and (C) shows a point writing process in the POS 810. When CU 3 fails, the processing of point-in-time management and point writing processing are executed to write the latest point information on the card owned by the player by the POS 810 via the upper server 801. Be

  The failure process of FIG. 88A is executed by the main control unit 323 of CU3. First, it is determined whether it is at the time of failure detection by the main control unit 323 (S701). The main control unit 323 is configured to execute a process of detecting a power-off state and a process of detecting occurrence of a failure such as a process of detecting a communication-off state. When a failure is detected by such failure detection processing, a failure detection flag is set to indicate that the failure is detected, in order to perform processing to forcibly eject the card in the failure processing. In S701, whether or not a failure is detected is determined by confirming the state of such a failure detection flag. Specific examples of the failure detected in S701 include, for example, failure of the card reader / writer (operation stop, abnormal operation, etc.), abnormality of the display control unit (operation stop, abnormal operation, etc.), lending button, replay button There are various failures such as abnormalities (open circuit, sticking, etc.) of the operating means such as the return button.

  Further, in the main control unit 323, when a failure occurs, in addition to execution of the failure process, an error notification process is executed to perform a predetermined error notification to notify that a failure has occurred, etc. A process is performed to notify that a failure has occurred. As a result, the staff at the game arcade can recognize that a failure has occurred in the CU 3, and work can be performed to replace the failed CU 3 with a new CU 3.

  If it is determined in S701 that a failure has been detected, processing for forcibly discharging the card inserted in the card insertion / ejection slot 309 is performed (S702), and the processing ends. Thus, the card is forcibly returned to the player.

  In addition, when it is not at the time of failure detection at S701 (for example, when a failure has not occurred and after replacement of CU3), it is determined whether or not it is at startup of the replaced CU3. When CU3 is exchanged, security related information such as authentication operation specification information CMD is received from the upper server 801 based on the version mismatch of the security related information caused by the exchange of CU3 in the processing of the above-mentioned start-up sequence when starting up. When recovery data (including C-ID) transmitted to CU3 and determined to be not stored as a backup by CU3 itself is transmitted from P-unit 2 to CU3, when in such a state, At S703, it is determined that it is time to start the exchanged CU3. It should be noted that as the judgment when CU3 is exchanged, in the processing of the startup sequence of CU3, in the upper server 801, the authentication information of CU3 confirmed at the time of the previous authentication and CU3's confirmed at the time of the current startup. It judges whether or not the authentication information is different, recognizes that the CU3 has been exchanged when it is different, transmits a command indicating that it is the time to start the exchanged CU3 to the CU3, and such a command When received, it may be possible to determine on the CU 3 side that it is at CU startup immediately after replacement. As described above, whether or not the replaced CU 3 is activated may be determined based on the determination process of the upper server 801.

  When it is determined in S703 that it is not the time of activation of the exchanged CU3, that is, security-related information has been transmitted from the upper server 801 to CU3 at the time of activation of CU3, and CU3 itself at the time of activation of CU3. When recovery data determined not to be backed up and stored is not transmitted, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S703 that the exchanged CU3 is activated, that is, security-related information is transmitted from the upper server 801 to CU3 at the activation of CU3, and CU3 at the activation of CU3. When recovery data determined to be not stored as a backup by itself is being transmitted, a card that has been inserted at the time of failure is identified based on the recovery data transmitted from P unit 2 to CU 3. The recovery data including the ID is transmitted to the upper server 801 (S704), and the process ends.

  The point management process of FIG. 88B is executed by the upper server 801 to manage points for each C-ID. Part (B) of FIG. 88 shows, among the contents of the point management process regularly executed, a part of the process related to the failure of CU3.

  In the point management process, it is determined whether it is time to receive point information other than recovery data and data of C-ID from the CU 3 (S801). That is, in S801, it is determined whether or not the point information is received together with the C-ID when the CU 3 is operating normally. When point data other than recovery data and data of C-ID are received from CU3, the point storage information stored in the upper server 801 is searched corresponding to the received C-ID, and the corresponding point storage is stored. The information is updated and stored based on the received point information (S803), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is not time to receive point information other than recovery data and data of C-ID from CU3 in S801, it is determined whether it is time to receive recovery data including C-ID from CU3 S804). That is, in S804, it is determined whether or not recovery data to be transmitted when CU3 is replaced due to a failure is received.

  If it is determined in S804 that the recovery data has been received from CU3, the point difference between the received point information and the point storage information stored in the upper server 801 is calculated, and the point difference is calculated. Is judged whether it is within a predetermined number (S805). The predetermined number determined in step S805 is set to, for example, an upper limit value that is recognized as a holding score increased by the holding point information received from the P-unit 2 when the CU 3 is normal.

  If it is determined in S805 that the point difference is within the predetermined number, the point storage information stored by the received point information is updated (S806). As a result, the latest point information of the C-ID when a failure occurs in the CU 3 is stored as point storage information of the upper server 801 based on the recovery data. Then, processing for setting the updated point storage information to the reading permitted state from the POS 810 is performed (S 807), and the processing ends. As a result, the point storage information based on the latest point information of the C-ID when a failure occurs in the CU 3 is made readable from the upper server 801. In S805, if there is no large error from the upper limit value of the number of points to be increased by the point information received from P platform 2 when CU3 is normal, the point storage information is updated. The process may proceed to S806.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S805 that the point difference is not within the predetermined number, the process ends. This prevents the point storage information from being updated with apparently erroneous data based on the recovery data.

  If it is determined in S804 that the recovery data is not received from CU3, it is determined whether the point reading request command specifying the C-ID is received from the POS 810 or not. (S808). In the POS 810, the card brought in by the player with the card forcibly ejected at the time of failure of the CU 3 is accepted, and when a predetermined operation is performed, the read permission state is enabled in S801 corresponding to the C-ID of the card. A point reading request command for requesting reading of the held point storage information is transmitted to the upper server 801. In S808, it is determined whether or not such a point reading request command has been received.

  If it is determined in S808 that the point reading request command is not received, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S808 that the point reading request command is received, point storage information corresponding to the C-ID specified by the point reading request command is transmitted to the POS 810. (S810). Then, the reading permission state of the point storage information corresponding to the C-ID is released, and the process ends (S811).

  The point writing process shown in FIG. 88C is executed in the POS 810 to write the recovered latest point data to the card forcibly ejected at the time of failure of the CU 3 and brought by the player. Ru.

  In the point writing process, the card reader / writer unit is requested to write the latest point on the card forcibly ejected at the time of failure of the CU 3 with respect to the card to be processed. It is determined whether the point writing request operation has been performed at the operation unit of the POS 810 (S901). When it is determined in S901 that a point write request operation has been performed, a point read request command specifying the C-ID is transmitted to the upper server 801 (S902), and the process ends. As described above, when the point reading request command is transmitted, the upper server 801 performs the above-described processing of S809 to S811 to set the point storage information corresponding to the C-ID to the reading permission state. When there is, the point storage information is transmitted to the POS 810.

  If it is determined in S901 that no point write request operation has been performed, is it at the time of reception of the point storage information transmitted from the upper server 801 in response to the point read request command? It is determined whether or not (S903). If it is determined in S903 that it is not at the reception of the point storage information, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S903 that it is time to receive the point storage information, the received point storage information is written to the received card as described above (S904), and the process ends. . As described above, the player brings the card forcibly ejected by the processing at the time of failure of the CU 3 to the POS 810, and the card reader / writer unit of the POS 810 accepts the card, and the recovery data is recovered. The latest point storage information updated by the above is read from the upper server 801 and written to the POS 810. As a result, when CU 3 fails, the latest point storage information is written in the POS 810 via the upper server 801, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. In addition, it is possible to prevent the points by recovery data from being written to another card after the replacement of CU3.

  In addition to the POS 810, the latest point storage information stored in the higher-level server 801 when the CU3 breaks down is, for example, another device provided with another card reader / writer unit (card accepting means) such as CU3. It may be written on the card. In addition, the latest point storage information stored in the upper server 801 may be written in CU3 after replacement of the failed CU3. In these cases, in the apparatus that writes the latest point storage information stored in the upper server 801, the same process as the point writing process in the POS 810 is performed.

  Also, the upper server 801 used for CU failure control may be a server having a point management function, may be an independent single function type server as a point management server, and others such as a security management function The server may be a multifunctional server having the management function of and the point management function.

  In addition, as control to record points at CU3 failure on a card owned by a player using a predetermined card accepting unit via the upper server 801, the recovery data transmitted to the upper server 801 from the failed CU3 The point storage information stored in the server 801 may be transmitted to the POS 810 and stored in the POS 810 without being updated. In that case, when an operation to designate writing of a point is performed in the POS 810 at the operation unit, the C-ID of the recovery data stored in the POS 810 matches the C-ID of the card accepted in the POS 810. At the same time, the point storage information specified by the recovery data is written to the card as point data, and the data of the point storage information is sent to the upper server 801 together with the data of C-ID, The server 801 may update the point storage information of the C-ID to the received data. In this way, the security of the point storage information managed by the upper server 801 can be improved by the incorrect data such as incorrect data. Note that control is performed to cause the display unit (display 54, a predetermined display unit such as a variable display device) of the P unit 2 to display a point at CU3 failure up to the P unit 2 at which the point at failure is displayed. The clerk goes to the display of the points to confirm the points at the time of breakdown, and the clerk manually inputs the confirmed points on the POS 801 to receive the card accepted on the POS 801 (the event is accepted in CU3 at the time of occurrence of the fault) Card) to write the points. In that case, after the points are written to the card, the manually input points are transmitted from the POS 801 to the upper server 801. Then, the upper server 801 stores the manually input points sent in this way, separately from the point storage information, and stores the points based on the manually input points sent. Update stored information. In this way, based on the data stored in separate management, it is possible to manage the history in which the point storage information has been changed due to the failure. If the POS terminal is portable, control is performed to display the point at CU3 failure on the display unit (display 54, a predetermined display unit such as a variable display device) of P base 2; The clerk takes the POS terminal up to P stand 2 where the point at the time of failure is displayed, and in that case, the clerk manually enters the point at the POS terminal while the clerk sees the displayed point. The points may be written in a card received by the POS terminal (a card received by CU 3 at the time of failure). In addition, recovery data is temporarily stored in the upper server 801 without updating the point storage information stored in the upper server 801, and the point readout request information is transmitted from the POS 810. , And may be sent to the POS 810.

  In addition, data of unsent points from P 2 to CU 3 at the time of CU 3 failure (data in the case where the points have been updated on P 2 in the game but the updated data has not been transmitted to CU 3 yet) If there is a problem, the display unit (display 54, a predetermined display unit such as a variable display device) of P platform 2 performs control to display the data of the unsent point, and the unsent when it fails The staff in charge goes to the display of the points until P unit 2 where the data is displayed, confirms the unsent points at the time of failure, and manually confirms the confirmed points at POS 801 to be accepted by POS 801. The points stored in the card (card received in the CU 3 at the time of failure) may be added and updated with the manually input points to correct the points. In that case, after the points are written to the card, the manually input points are transmitted from the POS 801 to the upper server 801. Then, the upper server 801 stores the manually input points sent in this way, separately from the point storage information, and stores the points based on the manually input points sent. Add and update stored information.

  Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. Referring to FIG. 89, in the slot machine 2S, the front door 2b is provided so as to be able to open and close with respect to the main body frame 2a with the left edge thereof as a swing center.

  A pair of upper and lower engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS are provided near the end edge of the front door 2bS on the opposite side to the swinging center. The engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS are provided at positions of the main body frame 2aS opposed to the engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS. By pressing the front door 2bS in the open state against the main body frame 2aS, the engagement projections 6aS, 6bS ride over the engagement receiving pieces 7aS, 7bS, and in a state of riding over the engagement reception tabs 7aS, 6bS downward due to the biasing force of the spring. Move and lock.

  A front door open solenoid 110 (not shown) is provided on the back side of the front door 2bS, and the front door open solenoid 110 is excited to excite the front door open solenoid 110 against the biasing force of the spring. The projections 6aS, 6bS are pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement of the engagement projections 6aS, 6bS with the engagement receiving pieces 7aS, 7bS is released, the lock release state is established, and the front door 2b is opened.

  A front door closing detector 112 (not shown) is provided at a position contacting the front door 2bS in the upper part of the main body frame 2aS, and it is detected that the front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS and becomes locked. Be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, main ones of various data stored in each of the CU side and the S base side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, on the CU side, the fluctuation of the S-point holding points is calculated to manage the current holding points. The S-point side also calculates and stores the current points earned. However, on the S side, the number of points is only to prevent the game from starting as soon as possible when the number of points becomes less than the minimum required number (for example, 0) for setting the number of bets. It is a secondary thing used for In the present embodiment, since the main management of the number of points is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of points on the S side, and the cost of the S units is maximized accordingly It can be suppressed.

  In particular, compared with CU, the S has a short replacement cycle in the game arcade and replacement is performed early. In relation to that, by giving the main management function on the S side to the CU side to reduce the cost of the S side, the running cost of the game arcade introducing the S can be reduced. is there.

  FIG. 90 shows the storage data of the RAM provided in the main control unit 323 on the CU side and the storage data of the RAM mounted on the payout control unit 117 on the S side. First, when the power is started in a state where the S unit (slot machine 2S) and the CU (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game arcade, the payout control unit 117 on the S unit side The main chip ID is sent from the main control board 116, and the main chip ID is sent to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored by the payout control unit 117 itself is sent to the CU side.

  The CU side stores the transmitted main chip ID and the payout chip ID. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time when the CU side and the S side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the S side, and the S side stores the transmitted connection time. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the S base side. After that, when the power is turned on, those three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data, are transmitted from the S-unit side to the CU side.

  The CU side collates the transmitted data with the already stored data, and determines whether the same S-unit as the previous one is connected. As for connection time data, new connection time data for which communication between CU side and S side is started every time the power is raised is sent from CU side to S side and the new connection time data Is stored on the S platform side.

  Also, every time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted on the CU side and S side, the sequence number (SQN) is added and updated by one each on the CU side and the S side, and the sequence number is updated on the CU side. And stored on the S platform side. This SQN is a communication number for checking whether the number is updated and communication is properly performed whenever data is transmitted / received between the CU and the S unit. The SQN is the last updated number of the updated communication number.

  A specific aspect of backup of SQN in CU and S in this embodiment will be described. The CU back-stores the SQN transmitted to the S in response to the operation instruction, and then, upon receiving the SQN from the S, rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup into the received SQN. Then, when transmitting the next operation instruction, the SQN stored in the backup storage is updated by 1 and transmitted to S, and the transmitted SQN is stored in a backup storage. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, the SQN received from the CU in the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and then when the operation response is transmitted from the S unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by one and transmitted. Backup and store sent SQN. Then, when the next operation response is received, the backup SQN is rewritten to the received SQN and stored. Such processing is repeated on the S unit.

  Then, when a communication break occurs in the middle of communication, SQN is backed up and stored until communication reconnection, but on the S unit side, the operation response is always sent regardless of the time of the communication break. Because of this, the SQN stored as a backup until communication reconnection is always the last transmitted SQN. On the other hand, on the CU side, since the operation instruction has been sent or the operation instruction has been received according to the time of occurrence of communication disconnection, the SQN that has been backup-stored until communication reconnection is sent last Or the last received one.

  For example, the CU side transmits a certain operation instruction to the S side, and transmits the sequence number n at that time, and the S side stores the transmitted sequence number n. Then, when an operation response is returned from the S-unit side to the CU side, the one (n + 1) obtained by adding 1 to the stored sequence number n is also transmitted. On the CU side, it is judged that data communication has been normally performed because 1 is added to the already-stored sequence number n + 1, and the sequence number is incremented by one when the operation instruction is sent next time. Then, the n + 2 sequence number is sent to S side.

  Next, the current point related information (point related information in counting) is transmitted from the S-base side to the CU side. This current point related information is stored by each counter in the current point related information storage area of the RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 90, a total of four types of counters, ie, an addition counter, a subtraction counter, an external output information counter, and a holding point counter, are provided in the current holding related information storage area of the RAM. There is.

  The addition number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be added according to the occurrence of the winning. When a winning occurs on the S-th car, the main control board 116 transmits an addition number signal capable of specifying the point addition number to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the addition number counter based on the addition number signal.

  The subtraction number counter is a counter for counting holding points to be subtracted according to the bet number setting. When the bet number setting operation is detected, the bet number setting signal is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the subtraction number counter based on the bet number setting signal.

  The external output information counter is a counter for counting the number of times that the game state has changed. As an external output information counter, a counter that counts the number of bets set by the operation of the one-piece BET switch 500 or the MAX BET switch 600, a counter that counts up when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, and a start operation A counter that counts the internal winning combinations for each winning combination when the internal lottery is executed, a counter that counts the operations for each of the first to third stopping operations when the reel stop operation is performed, and the display result is determined The counter includes a counter that counts up at a time, a counter that counts up according to the gaming state when the gaming state changes, and a counter that counts up according to the error type when an error occurs.

  Note that the counters that count up according to each gaming state when the gaming state changes include a counter corresponding to BB, a counter corresponding to RB, a counter corresponding to RT, and the like. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the corresponding external output information counter based on various external output information transmitted from the main control board 116.

  The point counter is a counter for storing the player's point (the total number of points) at the present time. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the holding point counter by the addition of the addition counter when adding and updating the addition counter, and adds and updates the holding point counter when the addition counter of the subtraction counter is added and updated. Subtract and update.

  A command is sent from the CU to the S units at regular time intervals to request data transmission. Unit S transmits the values of the four types of counters (addition number counter, subtraction number counter, external output information counter, and holding point counter) to CU at the timing when the command is received. Furthermore, for each of the three types of counters except the number-of-points counter among the four types of counters, the S unit backs up the counter value in the storage area of “previous point-related information” each time data is transmitted.

  That is, the value of the addition number counter is stored as "addition number", the value of the subtraction number counter is set as "subtraction number", and the value of the external output information counter is stored as "external output information" respectively. It is stored in the area. In addition, at the time of storage in the storage area, data previously stored is erased. That is, new data is overwritten and stored (rewritten) in the storage area of the "previous point related information".

  The addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, and the external output information counter whose counter values are backed up in the storage area of "previous point related information" are then initialized (0 clear) to prepare for the next data count. Be

  As a result, in the addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, and the external output information counter, the amount of change (non-transmission to CU) of each data (point, external output information) after data transmission to CU last time Data) will be stored. Then, when the data transmission request is received from the CU next time, the amount of change of the data from when the data transmission request was received last time to when the data transmission request is received this time is sent to the CU. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the total number of points at the current stage is stored in the point counter that is not initialized for each data transmission. Then, every time a transmission request for data is received from the CU, the total number of points at the current stage is transmitted to the CU. That is, every time the S receives a command instructing transmission of the data change amount, it transmits the data change amount between the previous reception of the command and the current reception.

  In other words, data of addition number, subtraction number, external output information, which is the current holding related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before in the storage area of the last holding related information (the current holding related information transmitted immediately before) Are stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each counter at this time but also the value of each previous counter that was not transmitted in the next transmission when the current holding related information is not transmitted from the S unit to the CU side. Is also intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, the total addition number (addition total), total subtraction number (subtraction total), external output information total, and holding points are stored in the total data storage area in the RAM.

  The CU updates the total addition number and the number of remaining points based on the value of the addition number counter transmitted from the S-unit side. Further, the total subtraction number and the holding points are updated based on the value of the subtraction number counter transmitted from the S-unit side. Furthermore, the cumulative total number of external output information is updated based on the value of the external output information counter transmitted from the S-unit. The total number of external output information is updated according to the type of each external output information counter. As a result, on the CU side, according to "number of bets", "reel start", "internal winning by winning combination", "first to third stop operation", "display result", and "change in gaming state" The number (count) is accumulated.

  As described above, the CU can manage the latest holding points by updating the holding points according to the current holding related information transmitted one by one from the S-unit. Similarly, the CU can manage the latest information by updating the total addition number, the total subtraction number, and the total number of external output information according to the current holding related information transmitted one by one from S. Become.

  Although the CU receives the count value of the holding point counter in addition to the values of the addition number counter and the subtraction number counter from the S side, the holding points stored by itself are the values of the addition number counter and the subtraction number counter. The value is updated based on the value, and the count value of the holding point counter sent from the S base is not used. Therefore, even if the points sent from the S unit do not match the points managed by the CU, the points held by the CU are updated with the points sent from the S unit. It will not be done.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the holding point counter transmitted from the S-unit side with the current holding points updated on the CU side, and determines the consistency as to whether or not they match.

  The CU transmits normal (normal) operation request (command) and normal (normal) operation response with the S unit, on condition that determination that the unit matches (consistent confirmation) is performed. Continue receiving the response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to an error state, for example, an error notification is performed by the display unit 312, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management computer An error notification may be issued according to 1), or a predetermined notification may be given to prompt an artificial response by a person in charge.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU may generate a command for correcting the holding points to the holding points managed by the CU, and then transmit the command to the S-unit. Conceivable. In this case, the S unit is provided with a function of correcting the number of points stored in itself according to the correction instruction command. Note that, as the correction instruction command, even as a command specifying the number of points managed on the CU side, or the difference between the number of points managed on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S-unit side It may be a command indicating.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the S-unit side, and calculates and manages the current points, particularly based on the values of the addition / subtraction counters. have. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function on the S-unit. By that amount, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Note that, in the present embodiment, the holding points are stored also on the S side for the purpose of enabling to prohibit the game immediately when the holding points become zero. However, it is possible not to provide the holding point counter for storing the holding points on the S-unit side.

  The CU does not match the function of performing a match score determination process that checks whether the calculated current score at the current point in time and the value of the score counter transmitted from the S base are matched or not. It has a function to perform control to shift to an error state (error control at non-coincidence).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the holding points are stored also on the S base side, it can be determined whether or not the holding points are consistent with the holding points managed and stored on the CU side. Yes (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the credit points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the credit points managed and stored on the CU side due to an unfair act or other circumstances, that effect can be checked. Here, although the determination function is provided on the CU side, for example, the points stored on the CU side and the points stored on the S base side are stored by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. And may be determined to determine whether or not both are consistent.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 90, the CU further has a storage area for storing the medals and a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) prepaid card (game card). The main control unit 323 of the CU subtracts a predetermined number of stored medals from the storage area storing the stored medals according to the input requesting use of the stored medals (for example, the input of pressing the replay button 319 provided for the CU). Do. In addition, the main control unit 323 of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from the storage area storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to use for a game by deducting the value from the game-owned value (for example, the prepaid balance, the points recorded on the card, or the number of stored medals) owned by the player, The number of requested additions for adding holding points for the withdrawal amount to the holding point counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S-base side. On the S side, in response to that, the holding point counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation is performed to order a so-called wagon service or the like in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink etc., the number of requested withdrawals for the gaming value owned by the player is from the CU side. It is sent to S side. In response to that, on the S side, the holding point counter is decremented and updated.

  FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram corresponding to storage control of gaming history data in P units and CUs shown in FIG. 3, and is a diagram showing storage control of gaming history data in S units and CU. The control similar to FIG. 3 is performed, and it is a point which becomes S stand instead of P stand. Since the others are similar, only the disclosure of the drawings will be omitted here to repeat the description.

Next, modifications and feature points in the embodiment described above will be described below.
(1) FIG. 92 shows a modification of the card unit 3 shown in FIG. 1, and shows one in which the card unit 3 is incorporated inside the pachinko machine 2.

  At a lower position of the game area 27, a card unit 3 is incorporated as shown by a broken line. The player can insert a card from the card insertion / discharge port 309 provided in the card unit 3, and the player can insert a banknote from the bill insertion port 302 provided in the card unit 3. ing. Further, the display 312 of the card unit 3 is provided next to the display 54 of the gaming machine in a state where the player can visually recognize. In the figure, 320 is an IR photosensitive unit, 319 is a replay button, 321 is a lending button, 322 is a return button, and 798 is a calling button.

  Although the modification of the card unit shown in FIG. 92 shows one incorporated in the pachinko machine 2 as an example of a gaming machine, the gaming machine to be incorporated is not limited to the pachinko machine 2, and FIGS. It may be the slot machine 2S shown at 91.

  (2) Next, a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 3, 23, and 91 will be described. FIG. 93 is an explanatory view for explaining a modification of the control mode for storing the game history data of each of the CU side and the P base side shown in FIG. Here, differences from FIGS. 3, 23, and 91 will be mainly described.

  In the case of FIG. 3, the game history data is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 293 provided in the P-base 2. However, in the modification shown in FIG. 93, the hall management computer 1 is used. The game history data is cleared based on the clear command transmitted to the CU 3 from the. It is necessary to clear the game history data for each gaming machine installed in the game arcade before the start of business of the game arcade. Therefore, it is more convenient to clear the game history data not by the operation of the RAM clear switch installed for each gaming machine but by simultaneous distribution of the clear command signal from the hall management computer 1 to each CU 3.

  The hall management computer 1 is operated by the hall management computer 1 or the clock function built in the hall management computer 1 causes the hall management computer 1 to be at a predetermined time before the start time of the game hall operation. A clear command signal is simultaneously distributed to each CU3. The CU 3 that has received the clear command signal erases the storage of the corresponding P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 by the function of the clear processing unit provided in the gaming history data management unit 391. As a result, the display of the current P game history data by the display unit 312 is erased (cleared). Further, the clear command signal is transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the P-unit 2 by the function of the clear processing unit.

  The game history data management unit 291 which has received the clear command signal erases the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the effect control unit for display 292 by the function of the clear processing unit, and the P game history data of this P unit The oldest stored data is erased from the stored data for 10 days of the storage unit, and the remaining 9 days of stored data is shifted and stored in the storage area of the older day one by one. As a result, the newest storage area (storage area on the current day) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this vacant area (storage area on the day).

  Further, in the modified example shown in FIG. 93, after the player has left the seat, the determination of the identity between the player who left the seat and the player who will play the next game is performed on the CU 3 side. The current player gaming history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 stores C-ID, which is player identification information of the player who has left the seat. Thereafter, when the player inserts a card into the CU 3 to play a game again on the P stand 2 which has left the seat, the information of the inserted card is read and the C-ID included in the inserted card information and the current player The C-ID of the player who has left the seat stored in the game history data storage unit is compared to determine whether or not both match. When it is determined that the two match, the same command is transmitted from the gaming history data management unit 391 of CU3 to the gaming history data management unit 291 of the P-base 2, but it is determined that the two do not match. The difference command is sent.

  If the game history data management unit 291 receives the same / different command, in the case of the same command, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and the game history data are stored in the current player game history data storage unit. Control to restore and store. On the other hand, when a different command is received, control is performed to delete backup data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram of a modification corresponding to storage control of gaming history data in P units and CUs shown in FIG. 93, and is a view showing storage control of gaming history data in S units and CU. The same control as that of FIG. 92 is performed, and the difference is that S units are used instead of P units. Since the others are similar, only the disclosure of the drawings will be made here and the repetition of the description will be omitted. Also in FIGS. 93 and 94, as in the case of FIGS. 3 and 91 described above, the identity of the player is confirmed only when the C-ID of the member card is read, not the visitor card, and the current player gaming history is confirmed. It memorizes in the data, it inherits the game history, it counts.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing control of insertion processing in the modification shown in FIGS. 93 and 94. The control of FIG. 95 is a modification of a part of the control shown in FIG. 23. The same control steps are assigned the same step numbers, and the differences will be mainly described here. Also in FIG. 95, the solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the arrows of the two-dot chain line indicate the flow of transmitted information. In FIG. 95, the CU executes the steps S1, S2, S4 to S7, S20, and S21, and the P units execute S22, S10, S12, S13, and S15.

  If it is determined in S1 that the process is not interrupted, the control proceeds to S20, in which C-IDs of the currently inserted card and the previously inserted card are compared to determine whether they match. Next, at S21, control is performed to transmit a command based on the determination result to the P-unit. Specifically, the same command is transmitted in the case of the determination result of the match, and the difference command is transmitted to the Ps in the case of the determination result of the non-coincidence.

  In the P unit, it is determined in S22 whether the transmitted command is a match command or not, and the game history data of the backup area (backup data storage unit) is stored in the current area (condition that matches). A control (S12) is performed to return to the current player gaming history data storage unit) and resume updating of the gaming history data.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 95, the control of S14 shown in FIG. 23 is not executed.

  In this modification, instead of transmitting the same command as described above, the gaming history data a stored in the current area (current player gaming history data storage unit) of the data storage unit 392 is It may be transmitted to the platform 2S). The gaming machine (P 2 and S 2 S) that has received the gaming history data a stores the received gaming history data a in the current area (current player gaming history data storage unit) and takes over the gaming history data a. Add and update new game history data. In this case, a backup area (backup data storage unit) is not necessary in the gaming machine (P unit 2 or S unit 2S).

(3) The invention of the following composition is indicated by the embodiment mentioned above.
A gaming system comprising a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) communicably connected to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
First control means (main control boards 16, 116) for controlling the gaming machine;
And second control means (LSI 799,999) communicably connected to the first control means, and
The first control means is
Error determination means (CPU of main control boards 16 and 116) for determining an error occurring during control of the gaming machine;
Abnormality notification control means (CPU of main control boards 16 and 116, I / O port) for performing control to notify an abnormality when the occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means;
The second control means is
Communicably connected to the gaming device (connected by connectors 380 and 20 or connectors 330 and 220);
An abnormality determining unit (an authentication sequence of FIG. 8) for determining an abnormality of the first control unit;
Output means for outputting abnormality notification information for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality to the game device when the abnormality determination means determines that the first control means is abnormal (an abnormality of the main control board 16, 116 The detected payout control units 17 and 117 include the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82 to notify the CU communication control unit 80),
The gaming apparatus is characterized in that control is performed to notify an abnormality when the abnormality notification information is received.

  According to such a configuration, the second control means determines the abnormality of the first control means itself having a control function of notifying an abnormality when an error occurs during control of the gaming machine. A first control having an abnormality notification control function at the time of occurrence of an abnormality in order to perform control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality of the control means itself to the game apparatus from the first control means and to notify the abnormality in the game apparatus Even when there is an abnormality in the means itself, abnormality notification control can be performed well.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the CU communication control unit 80 and the P communication control unit 81 receive the information sent from the main control unit 323 and the payout control unit 17 and use that information as they are. Although transmitted to the CU, the received information may be processed (protocol conversion, serial / parallel conversion, etc.) and the processed information may be transmitted.

  (5) Although the authentication sequence and the task message sequence in FIGS. 7 to 20 are the control of the main control unit 323 and the communication control unit 80, the control of the authentication sequence and the task message sequence in FIGS. It may be performed by the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 and the P unit communication control unit 81, or may be performed by the payout control unit 117 and the S unit communication control unit 82 of the slot machine 2S. The present invention may be carried out in other gaming machines (card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.) installed in the

  In addition, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 20 may be performed between, for example, an island computer connected to hall computer 1 and the computer of the gaming machine, and further includes a main control unit and a communication control unit. In the Z counter, the communication control unit is connected to the prize management device, and may be performed between the main control unit and the communication control unit. Furthermore, for example, a communication control unit connected to the ball storage management device may be provided in the card unit, and the business message sequence shown in FIG. 20 may be executed between the communication control unit and the main control unit of the card unit.

  (6) The BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 16 is authentication using two types of SIDs, the SID of the main control unit and the SID of the CU communication control unit, but one type of SID (for example, SID for CU ) May be used to authenticate the main control unit and the CU communication control unit. In this case, authentication of storing the same SID is performed.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the number of gaming balls is displayed by the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the number of gaming balls is displayed by the display 54 on the P base side. There is. When the number of game balls is displayed by the display on the CU side, there is an advantage that the number of game balls can be displayed by applying the CU in the present embodiment to P units without a display unit. On the other hand, when the game ball number display unit is provided on the P-base side, the display control may be performed on the CU side. Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the P side. When the display control is performed on the P side, the information on the number of game balls to be displayed is received from the CU side, and the number of game balls managed in CU is displayed on the number display portion of game balls. It is possible to In addition, as described above, when the display control is performed on the P side, there is an advantage that it is possible to display the number of decorative (rendering) high value game balls. When the display control is performed on the P platform side, information on the number of gaming balls to be displayed is not received from the CU side, but based on the value of the gaming ball number counter stored in the P itself. The display control of the number may be performed.

  (8) In FIG. 32, although what provided the weight of 10 seconds for floating ball processing waiting time by P stand side was shown, the number of firing balls-far ball number-out balls by P stand side instead Even if it is determined that the processing of the floating balls is completed, it is determined that the number of balls-number of balls = zero, or the number of balls-number of balls-number of balls detected by the out ball detection switch = 0. Good.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the drive of the bat firing motor (not shown) is stopped on the P base which received the command of the prohibition request to stop the bat firing and the stop of the variable display device during fluctuation or Although the change of the variable display based on the start winning memory is not stopped, the change of the variable display may also be stopped instead.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, when the game balls are subtracted by the wagon service etc., as described based on FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of gaming balls stored on the CU side is sufficiently large compared to the number of balls of the subtraction request (for example, larger than 30 balls), the CU without waiting for a response from P units. The game balls may be subjected to subtraction processing alone, and then an operation instruction of a subtraction request may be transmitted to P units.

  (11) In the embodiment described above, the command is sent from the CU to the P unit, and the P unit responds to it, and the response is sent back to the CU. Conversely, the command is sent from the P unit to the CU Also, it may be a communication form in which the CU responds to it and returns a response to the P unit.

  Specifically, the command (operation instruction) generated by the payout control unit 17, 117 is transmitted to the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication control unit 82, and the command (operation instruction) is sent to the P-unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit 82 transmits to CU. A response (operation response) corresponding to the command (operation instruction) is sent from the CU to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82, and the response (operation response) is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit 81, S unit The communication control unit 82 transmits to the payout control units 17 and 117.

  In this case, the payout control unit 17 or 117 executes retransmission (not shown) of the command. That is, when the payout control unit 17 117 can not receive a response from the P communication control unit 81 and the S communication control unit 82 for one second after the command transmission, the P communication control unit 81 transmits the command to the S communication. Retransmission to the control unit 82 is performed. Further, the delivery control unit 17 and 117 also execute transmission of the communication state request and retry of confirmation of the communication state shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b). That is, the payout control units 17 and 117 transmit the operation instruction to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82 and then transmit the communication state request, and the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82. The communication status is confirmed based on the communication status response returned from. Then, if it is determined that the confirmation result is abnormal, the operation instruction is transmitted again, and then the communication state request is transmitted, and the communication state confirmation retry is executed.

  (12) Furthermore, in the above embodiment, communication is performed between the CU and P units periodically (for example, 200 ms), but instead, when the need for communication arises, CU Alternatively, data may be transmitted from one of the P units to the other for communication.

  (13) In the above-mentioned embodiment, the operation response including the refusal signal not complying with the request such as addition refusal ON, subtraction refusal ON, clear refusal ON from P to CU is sent back to CU, Is to determine that the request is rejected based on the rejection ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of sending back an operation response of rejection ON, the operation response including the number of addition / subtraction balls and game balls not complying with the request from the CU is sent back to the CU. On the side, it is determined whether the returned data (the number of added balls, game balls, etc.) is the one according to the request, and it is determined whether the request is rejected or not. Good.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, when the power-off at the CU or the communication disconnection between the CU and the P-unit is detected, the bat unit firing is stopped on the P-unit side to put the play stop state Although what was shown, it is not limited to it and you may control to the state which can continue a game, without stopping a batted ball shot in P side. In that case, the cumulative subtraction memory of the number of added subtraction balls and the number of starting openings generated with the continued game from the occurrence of the communication interruption until the recovery and activation of these abnormalities is accumulated on P side Alternatively, the data and the game ball data may be transmitted to the CU at startup to correct the backup value of the data on the CU side.

  (15) In the above-mentioned embodiment, when no command from the CU is transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), the P-unit determines that the communication is disconnected by a predetermined process. However, the communication disconnection may be determined in the following manner.

  The pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection detector for detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 are electrically connected. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are connected by the signal line as described above, but in addition to the signal line, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) from the card unit 3 is input to the pachinko machine 2 side Connection detection signal lines. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are constituted by the same cable, and the disconnection of the cable or the disconnection of the connectors 330 and 20 and the card unit 3 When the power is cut off, the voltage of the connection detection signal line becomes 0 V, so that the connection detector detects it and the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 determines that the disconnection of the cable or the detachment of the connectors 330 and 20 and the power supply of the card unit 3 have occurred due to the input of the detection signal.

  (16) In the process of FIG. 21, when the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received, the P unit is programmed so that the correction request can not be rejected by the P unit. However, in P units, despite receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, there may be a case where a serious error in which the game ball etc. can not be corrected has occurred. In consideration of such a severe error condition, the CU side checks the content of the operation response transmitted from P after transmitting the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, and the P side It may be determined whether or not the game ball or the like is properly corrected, and if it is not corrected, control may be performed to shift to an error state.

  In other words, the CU is determined in advance when it is determined that addition of gaming balls can not be made in the gaming machine (for example, P units) even after the communication start request (correction request) including correction ON shown in FIG. 21 is received. Error control means for performing control to shift to the specified error state.

  As control to shift to an error state, for example, the display unit 312 notifies a severe error, and the hole management computer 1 notifies that a serious error has occurred, and the hole management computer 1 issues an error notification. It is possible to do it and urge human resources to respond by personnel.

(17) On the P base side, the number of added balls may be counted as follows.
A counter A and a counter B are provided on the side of P as counters for counting the number of added balls. First, the number of added balls is counted by the counter A. At the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of added balls is counted by the counter B. At the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, while maintaining the value of the counter B, the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0, and thereafter, the counter A counts the number of added balls. Thereafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used to count the number of subtraction balls on the P-unit side. Alternatively, it may be used to count the number of starting opening 1 winnings and the number of starting openings 2 winnings.

  (18) The P unit does not transmit two pieces of information of the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls to the CU, but transmits one piece of information after adding and subtracting the number of added balls and the number of reduced balls to the CU It is also good. That is, "update information capable of specifying the amount of change" is also configured by such information.

  (19) The communication method is not limited to the above command-response method. The P unit may transmit ball-related information such as game balls to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, instead of transmitting ball-related information at predetermined time intervals, the P-unit may transmit ball-related information to the CU each time a predetermined amount of information is obtained. For example, in the case of an addition ball, it is conceivable to configure to transmit the number of addition balls to the CU each time one or two or more predetermined numbers of addition balls are generated.

  (20) In the present embodiment, two counters, the addition ball number counter and the subtraction ball number count, are provided on the P base side. However, instead of these two counters, one addition / subtraction counter may be used which is added by the increase of the game balls (the occurrence of winning or the like) and is decremented by the decrease of the game balls (the bullet release, etc.). In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from P to CU.

(21) The present embodiment includes the following configuration.
After the gaming device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the gaming machine, the gaming device reestablishes a communication connection with the gaming machine before receiving a response to the command. If it has shifted to the above, it is determined whether or not the command for instructing subtraction of points has reached the gaming machine based on the data transmitted from the gaming machine side in the process of reestablishing the communication connection. And the command transmission unit cancels the instruction to subtract the point by the command when it is determined by the arrival determination unit that the command to instruct subtraction of the point has arrived. Command is transmitted to the gaming machine, and the additional point updating means cancels the subtraction instruction of the points by the command for instructing the subtraction of the points. When a command is received, whether the point has already been subtracted based on the command for instructing subtraction of points or the point is not subtracted due to lack of points, either The point corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction is added to the point stored in the point storage means.

  (22) In the present embodiment, by operation of the return button 322, a signal requesting the end of the game is input to the CU. However, the CU may be configured to be able to input a signal requesting game termination from the management computer or the like.

(23) The CU and the P may be communicably connected not by wired connection but by wireless.
(24) The payout control unit 17 may not be provided on the pachinko machine 2 by providing the function of the payout control unit 17 on the main control board 16.

  (25) The payout control unit 17 performs control to stop the driving of the bat firing motor (not shown) when the gaming ball number counter stored on the pachinko machine 2 side becomes 0. However, the payout control unit 17 may execute the control when the gaming ball counter reaches a predetermined value other than zero. For example, the player can designate and input the predetermined value in advance using a predetermined operation switch of the gaming machine. The payout control unit 17 stops driving the bat firing motor (not shown) when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. Thus, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of game balls reaches the number of balls specified in advance.

  (26) In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 is provided with the effect part, and various displays are made by the display 54. However, the pachinko machine 20 does not include the effect part. It is also good. In that case, even if a command including an operation instruction such as card insertion processing ON, addition display ON, computer display ON, clear display ON, etc. is sent to P base 2, in P base 2, Display control according to the command is not performed, and the display is performed only by the display 312 on the CU side.

  (27) Instead of the RAM clear by manual operation by the RAM clear switch 293 shown in FIG. 3, a clock function may be provided so that the RAM clear signal is automatically output at the business start time of the game arcade. The game history data is cleared as described above by the RAM clear signal that is automatically output.

  (28) In the embodiment described above, in the recovery process of the number of game history balls such as the number of determined symbols 1, 2 and the starting openings 1 to 3, the big winning openings 1 and 2, the winning openings 1 to 4, etc. Although control to match the data is performed, since these game history data are information managed by the P unit, basically based on the game history data held by the P unit side regardless of the match or mismatch. Control may be performed to update the game history data on the CU side. However, the data on the total number of game balls, the cumulative addition balls, and the cumulative subtraction balls are matched with the stored data on the CU side.

  (29) In the embodiment described above, the transition to the trial mode was performed by remote control operation by a game arcade clerk, but instead or in addition to that, the test mode is inserted by inserting a test card into the CU. It may be controlled to perform the transition of Such transition to the trial hitting mode by the remote control operation can be shifted to the trial hitting mode by the remote control operation while waiting for a customer (may be a definite change). Then, two types of test modes, a first test mode used as an event outside the business in the game arcade, and a second test mode for confirmation after nail adjustment may be provided as the test mode.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when there are no game balls (or points) in the trial mode, the CU sends a game ball addition command (or a point addition command) to P (or S). Enables addition of game balls (or addition of points) to enable games, but in P units (or S units) without sending a game ball addition command (or hold point addition command) from the CU side The game may be controlled so that the game can be continued even if the game ball (or the number of points held) is lost.

  (30) The C-ID described above is composed of fixed code data that never changes, but instead, the C-ID read from the card changes dynamically according to the reading time It may be an ID code. Then, when a card is inserted into the CU and the CU reads the C-ID, the CU stores the C-ID together with the read time, and the player is based on both the read time and the C-ID data. May be configured to be identified. For example, when the CU reads a C-ID, the current time T is input to the card, and in the card, the C-ID is encrypted with T using ET (C-ID), and the ET (C-ID) and T And in pairs. CU deciphers its ET (C-ID) with T and extracts a C-ID by DT (ET (C-ID)).

  (31) In the above embodiment, the player is specified based on the C-ID to determine whether the same player is playing a game, but instead or additionally To provide biometric information reading means for reading biometric information such as fingerprints and veins of the player on the CU or P, and determine the identity of the player based on the biometric information reading means read by the biometric information reading means Biometrics authentication may be employed.

  (32) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the data stored in the current player gaming history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored along with the return of the card. However, in response to the return of the card, the current player gaming history data storage unit is switched to the backup data storage unit and the backup data storage unit is switched to the current player gaming history data storage unit. You may control as follows. In that case, the stored data of the switched current player gaming history data storage unit is displayed by the display 54.

  (32a) In the above embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 3 and the like, C-ID match determination is performed on the P base side, but the match determination may be performed on the CU side. In that case, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit of P unit 2 is sent to the CU side, and the C-ID recorded on the inserted card is received on the CU side that received it. To determine whether the read C-ID matches the C-ID transmitted from the P-unit. Then, if it is determined in CU3 that the C-IDs do not match, a clear command is transmitted to P base 2. In the P-unit 2 that has received the clear command, the data stored in the backup data storage unit is erased.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in CU3 that the C-IDs match, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is returned to the current player game history data storage unit with respect to P unit 2 Command information for performing addition update of new game history data is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2 by taking over the game history data. This command information may be code data such as handover command information or the like, but the backup gaming history data for handover is stored on the CU side, that is, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit of P unit 2 Alternatively, the backed up game history data may be transmitted to the P-unit 2 as handover command information. In that case, the backup data storage unit in P units is not necessary.

  (33) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45 to FIG. 47, FIG. 50, FIG. 51, FIG. 54, FIG. 55, FIG. Although what is performed on the side is shown, this identity determination may be performed on the P base side. That is, the gaming machine may have the following configuration.

It is possible to play a game by means of points, a game medium is fired in the game area to play a game, and a communication unit for communicating with a game device for adding points using game value owned by a player is provided, and winning is achieved A gaming machine to which points are added according to the occurrence of
Specifying means for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for games and occurrence of winnings;
Point storage means for storing points;
Point updating means for updating the points stored in the point storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the update information capable of specifying the amount of change and the points stored in the point storage means from the communication unit to the gaming apparatus;
Player specifying information storage means for storing player specifying information for specifying a player who plays a game;
The same as the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storing means when communication is started by being connected to the gaming apparatus Same determination means for determining whether or not a player of
A game machine comprising: an identical determination result transmission control means for performing control to transmit a determination result by the identical determination means from the communication unit to the gaming apparatus.

  (34) In the embodiment described above, the C-ID is included in the operation instruction and the operation response for transmission and reception. When a different C-ID is transmitted from P to the CU during the transmission / reception, it may be determined as an error, and the CU may be controlled not to update the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls. . When controlled in this manner, C-ID may become temporarily out-of-order data due to noise during transmission and reception of commands and responses. In that case, if, for example, the C-ID contained in the operation response received on the CU side is different from the C-ID transmitted as a command, the CU side determines that it is an error and transmits it. Addition / subtraction update control is not executed based on the number of added balls or the number of subtracted balls included in the motion response. As a result, when a C-ID not corrupted due to noise is transmitted from the P base in transmission and reception of the next command and response, the operation response is obtained even though it is determined that the C-ID matches and is normal. The game ball count (total game ball count) included in and the total game ball count stored in the CU will be inconsistent, and in the above embodiment, in such a case, the CU stores A command to correct the number of existing game balls is transmitted to the P-unit, and the number of game balls stored in the P-unit is rewritten to the number of stored balls on the CU side. As a result, the number of P game balls is rewritten to the previous number of old game balls updated based on the response immediately before the C-ID goes mad due to noise, and the game with the incorrect number of game balls is incorrect. There are cases where the number of balls can be rewritten.

  Even if the C-ID included in the response is different from the C-ID on the CU side in order to eliminate such inconvenience, it is not determined by only one response, but several times (for example, twice) It is desirable to control so that it is judged as abnormal only when the C-ID in the response goes wrong with the C-ID on the CU side. The following two methods can be considered as a concrete method of realizing this.

  First, as a first method, if the C-ID contained in the first response is inconsistent with the C-ID on the CU side, when sending the next command, the SQN is added to P without modification. Send. Then, in the P-unit, as described based on FIG. 36, it is determined that the response has not reached the CU, the transmission data is added to the number of added balls last time, and the number of added added balls etc. Control to transmit to CU as the next response is performed. In the CU, when the C-ID included in the next response matches the C-ID on the CU side, it is determined that it is appropriate and the number of added balls to which the previous transmission data has been added, etc. Update control of the number of balls is performed based on it. As a result, it is possible to update to the correct number of game balls. On the other hand, if the C-ID included in the next response is also different from the C-ID on the CU side, the CU is determined to be abnormal because the C-ID is different twice consecutively. The number of game balls may not be updated based on the number of added balls or the number of subtracted balls included in the response, and thereafter predetermined error processing control may be performed.

  As the second method, during C-ID mismatch, the CU side adds and updates separately, and when the correct C-ID is received, the data separately added and updated is the total number of game balls, etc. Update collectively.

It will be as follows if the structure of the modification demonstrated above is put together.
The gaming device is
Point storage means for storing points;
Gaming apparatus side identification information storage means for recording predetermined identification information;
Game device identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the gaming device side identification information storage means to the gaming machine;
The gaming machine is
Specifying means for specifying the amount of change in points according to use for games and occurrence of winnings;
Information transmitting means for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
Gaming machine side identification information storage means for storing the identification information transmitted under the control of the gaming apparatus side identification information transmission control means;
A gaming machine side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the gaming machine side identification information storage means to the gaming apparatus;
The gaming device is
Information receiving means for receiving the update information;
Point updating means for updating points stored in the main point storage means based on the update information;
Match the identification information sent under the control of the gaming machine side identification information transmission control means with the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus side identification information storage means to match or not match Determination means,
The determination result of the matching determination means includes abnormality determining means for performing an abnormality determination when it is determined that the matching has not been made a predetermined number of times consecutively
The point updating means is
When the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination means is performed, the update of the points corresponding to the total of the change amount of the points in the gaming machine during the period determined to be inconsistent by the alignment determination means Without doing
When it is determined that the consistency determination means is normal based on the identification information transmitted before the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination means, the consistency determination means determines that there is an inconsistency. The points are updated on the basis of the total amount of change in points of the gaming machine during the period.

  According to such a configuration, the game apparatus erroneously determines that the game apparatus is abnormal and the update information is updated even if the identification information that has been temporarily misplaced due to noise or the like is received despite the proper identification information being transmitted. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by not updating the points based on the above.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, the operation history is re-aggregated in the trial mode by the touch operation on the operation button icon such as the recounting button displayed on the display unit 312. Alternatively, or in addition to that, by detecting the opening of the glass door 6, the game history data may be controlled to be re-aggregated again in the trial run mode.

  (36) The contents of the above-described embodiment can be applied not only to pachinko machines but also to gaming machines such as slot machines.

  Here, a pachinko gaming machine type gaming machine receives a recording medium (card) and has a player-owned value (prepaid balance, the number of balls, or a player-owned value specified by recording information recorded in the recording medium) A gaming machine including a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81) for communicating with a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that enables the use of the number of stored balls for playing a game, and playing game media by firing game media in the gaming area It is a pachinko machine 2).

  In other words, with a pachinko gaming machine type gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with points, and a game medium is fired in the game area to play a game, and the gaming value owned by the player is A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) including a communication unit that communicates with a gaming apparatus that uses points to add points, and points are added according to the occurrence of a winning.

  On the other hand, a slot machine type gaming machine is a player-owned value-value prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls specified by the recording information received and recorded on the recording medium (card). Includes a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81) for communicating with a game device (card unit 3) that enables the game to be used for playing a game, and a variable display device whose display state can be changed. The game can be started by setting “1”, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, and one game is ended, and the display result derived and displayed becomes a predetermined specific display result. It is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S) in which winning can occur.

  In other words, a slot machine type gaming machine can play a game with points, and a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that adds points using a gaming value owned by a player (S communication control unit 82) and a variable display device capable of changing the display state, the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is When one game is ended by being derived and displayed, and when the display result derived and displayed becomes a predetermined specific display result, winning can be generated, and points are added according to the occurrence of winning. It is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S).

  (37) In the above embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 2 and FIG. 90, the number of game balls stored and the number of points held by the CU, and the number and the number of game balls sent from the game machine are The CU determines whether they match or not, and if they do not match, it transmits a command for correction to adjust the number of gaming balls on the gaming machine side or the number of points held on the gaming machine to the number of game balls on the CU side or the number of points held. C-ID match / mismatch may be further added as a judgment criterion of. For example, even if the number of game balls stored and the number of points stored by the CU do not match the number of game balls and the number of points sent from the game machine, that alone does not transmit a correction command, and further from the game machine If the CU determines that the sent C-ID does not match the stored C-ID of the CU, it transmits a correction command. Thus, when an abnormality such as noise or the like that causes C-ID data to go wrong is generated, a correction command is transmitted to correct the number of game balls and the number of points held on the gaming machine side to a correct value. Can.

  Furthermore, when the CU determines that the C-ID sent from the gaming machine matches the stored C-ID of the CU, a correction command may be transmitted. Thus, when an abnormality occurs such that the number of gaming balls on the gaming machine and the number of points in the gaming machine go out without the player being replaced, a correction command is transmitted to set the number of gaming balls and the number of gaming points on the gaming machine side. It can be corrected to the correct value.

  (38) In the above embodiment, the oldest stored data is erased from the stored data for 10 days of the P game history data storage unit by the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293, and the remaining 9 days Although one minute of memory data is shifted and stored in the memory area of an old day one by one, it is a time zone before the opening of the game arcade as a condition to execute the shift control of such P game history data It may be added. That is, on the condition that the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 is performed in a predetermined time zone before the opening of the game arcade, shift control of the P game history data is executed.

  (39) In the above embodiment, the serial ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, but in addition to that, the LSIs 799 and 999 of the gaming machine and the main control board 16 and 116, it may be executed between the payout control unit 17, 117 and the P-unit communication control unit 81, 82.

  (40) In the modification described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94, the clear command transmitted from the hall management computer 1 is shown to be input to the CU3. Alternatively or additionally, the clear command may be input to the CU3. By providing a clear switch and operating the clear switch, the above-described processing of clearing the game history data may be performed. The game history data may be cleared by remote control operation. Specifically, when the staff of the game arcade directs the remote control to the IR photosensitive unit 320 of CU3 to perform a clear operation, the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives the operation signal (infrared) and clears the game history data. Do.

  (41) In the above embodiment, the slot machine that does not need to use any physical game media such as medals in the game has been described as an example of the slot system of the point system. When such a slot machine is adopted, since the game medium is not required, it is not necessary to provide a transport path for the game medium and a storage unit for the game medium in the slot machine. As a result, the structure of the slot machine can be simplified, and the slot machine can be miniaturized or reduced in cost.

  However, in place of such a slot machine, a slot machine is adopted in which the points are updated in conjunction with moving a game medium such as a medal or a game ball in a predetermined direction while adopting the point system. It is also conceivable to do.

  For example, the gaming machine is enclosed in a slot machine, and a circulation path is provided for circulating the enclosed gaming medium in a predetermined direction. In addition, you may provide the discharge | emission / insertion part which can discharge | release and insert a game medium as needed at the predetermined location of a circulation path.

  When the condition for adding points is established, the slot machine generates a number of game media according to the number of points to be added among the plurality of game media in the circulation path, from the predetermined first place in the circulation path to the second one. While moving to a location, add and update stored points, and send a response command for adding points to the CU. The CU adds and updates the stored holding points.

  In addition, when the condition for subtraction of points is established, the slot machine selects the number of game media corresponding to the number of points to be subtracted among the plurality of game media in the circulation path from the second location in the circulation path. While moving to one location, the stored point is memorized and updated, and a response command for subtracting the point is sent to the CU. The CU subtracts and updates the stored holding points.

  Note that even when the subtraction condition is satisfied, the game medium may be moved from the first place to the second place as in the case where the addition condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the game medium may be moved only when the addition condition is satisfied, or the game medium may be moved only when the subtraction condition is satisfied.

  In addition, it is possible to see through the game medium moving between the first place and the second place in order to make the player recognize that the points are updated corresponding to the movement of the game medium. It is desirable to provide the see-through portion at a predetermined position on the front side of the slot machine.

  Furthermore, if a plurality of moving paths for moving game media are provided between the first portion and the second portion, the holding path should be updated under the condition of one addition or subtraction condition. A game medium corresponding to the number of point renewals when the number of point renewals is large (for example, when the number of payouts based on winnings is large, when the number of additions based on the lending instruction is large, when the number of bets is the MAX value) Can be moved quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation having a sense of discomfort such that the movement of the game medium continues endlessly even though the update display of the points is ended.

  In addition, if the first portion and the second portion are arranged so as to be in the relationship between the upper portion and the lower portion in the vertical direction, the game medium is naturally moved by its own weight from the first portion to the second portion. It can be dropped and the movement mechanism of the game media can be simplified. In this case, it is assumed that the game medium is made to flow from the first place to the first place in both the addition update and the subtraction update of the points. Alternatively, the game medium may be made to flow from the first portion to the first portion only in one of the point addition update and the point subtraction update. Alternatively, a flow-down path for point addition update and a flow-down path for point subtraction update may be separately provided, and a perspective window for addition update visual check and a perspective window for subtraction update visual check may be respectively provided. Good.

  In particular, when a game ball is used as the above-mentioned game medium, since the game medium is spherical, circulation of game medium can be performed more smoothly than when medals are used. In addition, as the game ball, it is conceivable to adopt a pachinko ball normally used in a game arcade. In this case, for example, assuming that five pachinko balls correspond to the value of one medal of the slot machine (value of holding point = 1), the updating holding score of 5 when the holding points are updated. Double pachinko balls will be moved between the first place and the second place. In addition, pachinko balls that are viewed from the see-through window provided between the first place and the second place are "show balls" exclusively for showing the player that the points are being updated. Will function as

  (42) In the embodiment described above, when the payout control unit 17 detects that the launch ball detection switch 903 is on for the specified time or more (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of supplied game balls It is determined that an error has occurred that is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 50), but the shot ball detection switch 903 itself is broken instead of the on state continuing because there are too many game balls. There is also a possibility that the detection signal is continuously output. Therefore, the light emitting and receiving portion of the discharge ball detecting switch 903 of the light emitting and receiving method may be slightly offset aside from the center line through which the balls of the collection ball passage path 901 pass. When configured in this way, light is projected from a position slightly offset aside from the center line of the game ball in which there are too many sealed balls and the beads are connected, and the light is received. A detection signal pulsating from the firing ball detection switch 903 is input to the payout control unit 17 as the game ball is fired and moved downward, and the payout control unit 17, based on the input of the pulsation signal, Control may be performed to determine that an abnormality has occurred in which the number of enclosed balls is too large, not the failure of the launch ball detection switch 903.

  (43) In the embodiment described above, the launcher (not shown) uses the motor (launch motor 18) as a drive source, but instead, a solenoid may be used as a drive source. In that case, the plunger position in the non-excitation state of the solenoid is detected by the origin sensor as the origin, and the payout control unit 17 determines various errors described above based on the detection output of the origin sensor. Good.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, it has both the step of "the customer waiting state is 60 seconds abnormal progress?" Of S101 and the step of "inserting a card?" Of S102 (or the step of "point = 0?" Of S102A). Instead of that, only the step of "Sorry of waiting for 60 seconds abnormal?" In S101, or the "inserting card in S102" (or "point = 0?" In S102A). It may be a step only.

  (44) In the embodiment described above, loading the pachinko balls by driving the transport motor 40 at the time of installation of the pachinko machine 2 by operating the ball removal switch 922 provided on the relay substrate 921; The ball removal of the enclosed ball is performed by driving the 195a, but alternatively or additionally, the infrared ray of the card unit 3 is emitted by operating the remote control possessed by the attendant of the game arcade When the unit 320 receives light, a predetermined command is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the pachinko machine 2, and the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 receiving it drives the transport motor 40 at the time of installation of the pachinko machine 2. The loading of pachinko balls or the removal of the enclosed balls by driving the deburring motor 195a may be performed.

  (45) At the time of shipment of the gaming machine, a chip ID (main chip ID, payout chip ID) as an example of identification information for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine is transmitted from the gaming machine manufacturer to the upper server 801 to the upper server 801 At the time of registration, a chip ID with an electronic certificate by a gaming machine manufacturer may be transmitted to prevent unauthorized registration by persons other than the maker of the gaming machine to be registered.

  (46) In the SE2 mode encryption method described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75, the common key encryption method is employed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a public key encryption method may be employed. Specifically, a message (plaintext) is encrypted with a public key and transmitted, and the receiving side decrypts it with a secret key. Then, the pair of the public key and the secret key is mutually updated each time the ciphertext is transmitted and received, thereby improving the security.

  (47) In the above-described embodiment, the change to the non-operation mode such as the test hitting mode is performed by remote control operation, but instead or in addition thereto, a card for changing to the non-operation mode (test card) May be inserted into the CU to change the mode.

  (48) In the above-described embodiment, the session key is generated using data that changes, such as random numbers and time information, and the authentication key, but another example of data that changes is up to the present time. It may be the number of session establishments.

  (49) In the above embodiment, encryption using the authentication key and session key is performed in the SE2 mode, but the encrypted version is further processed by the value of the initial vector unit R, the message counter unit N , Or the value of the encryption block counter unit I may be used as a key for encryption (duplicate encryption). When the above-mentioned exclusive OR is used as an algorithm of the duplicate encryption, decryption can be performed by performing exclusive OR operation using the same keys as a plurality of keys used for the encryption.

  (50) In the above embodiment, in the SE2 mode, if the result of the MAC check is abnormal, the counter repair process or initialization process is performed. However, the MAC check is not necessarily essential, and the ciphertext receiver Since the decoding can not be performed in step S.7, the counter repair process or initialization process may be performed.

  The following will list the effects obtained from combinations of various means and the like included in the present embodiment.

(1-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) which can play a game by holding points and to which points are added according to the occurrence of a prize, and gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, etc.) owned by the player Alternatively, the gaming system includes a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) which adds points by using the number of balls and is communicably connected to the gaming machine (connection wiring with the connectors 330 and 20).
The gaming machine is
Specification means (microcomputer for game machine control, number-of-additions ball counter, number-of-balls counter) for specifying the amount of change of points (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) according to use for games and occurrence of winnings;
Information transmitting means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change to the game apparatus;
The gaming device is
Main point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing the number of game balls);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
And a point update means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the main point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

(1-2) The gaming machine is
Secondary point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
And D. point updating means (disbursement control unit 17) for updating the points stored in the additional point storage means according to the amount of change.
The game machine performs game control based on the points stored in the additional point storage means (stopping of the ball striking motor (not shown) when the game ball counter reaches 0),
When the signal for requesting the end of the game (the operation signal of the return button 322) is input, the gaming device determines the points stored in the main point storage means as the points at the end of the game. It includes point determination means (main control unit 323; FIG. 29).

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are decided on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point deciding function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much It can be suppressed.

(1-3) The gaming device is
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored in the main point storage means;
Instruction information transmitting means (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the gaming machine;
The gaming machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (payment control unit 17) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information;
Each time the information transmission means receives the information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmission means updates the amount of change (current ball related information) from the previous reception of the information to the current reception. Information is transmitted (values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter in FIG. 2, FIG. 27).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, the gaming machine transmits, to the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change based on the previous transmission of the update information. . For this reason, the gaming device can perform the latest point management by updating the points by the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-4) The information transmission means transmits the points (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the additional point storage means to the gaming apparatus (the value of the game ball counter of FIG. 2) , Figure 27),
The gaming device is
It includes a determination means (FIG. 2; determination of coincidence of the number of game balls) for determining the consistency between the points stored in the main point storage means and the points stored in the additional point storage means. ,
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification by the display unit 312, recovery processing is performed, and the data correction request Bit 2 is “1” data (playing ball correction ON) And a communication start request including data of the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P unit, and correction of matching the storage of the number of game balls in the P unit with the number of game balls of the CU is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored in the gaming machine are not consistent with the points stored in the gaming apparatus. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to cope with the processing when there is an inconsistency.

(1-5) The instruction information transmitting unit stores, when the determination unit determines that there is a mismatch, the main point storage unit stores the points stored by the additional point storage unit. Sending correction information (a communication start request including the game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) for correcting to a point to the gaming machine,
The instruction information transmission means transmits the correction information to the gaming machine (transmission of a communication start request including the game ball correction ON and the number of game balls to P).
The gaming machine is a point correction means for correcting the points stored in the additional point storage means based on the correction information. Correction according to.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(1-6) The gaming machine is a ball and ball gaming machine (pachinko machine 2),
The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at intervals shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at intervals shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, the change amount of the points notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to finely notify the amount of change in points to the gaming device.

  (1-7) The gaming machine determines whether or not the remaining number of remaining points required to continue the game based on the points stored in the additional point storage means (the payout control means (payout control) Section 17, FIG. 28).

  According to such a configuration, since the transmission of the update information is not in time at the time of determination, the points stored in the gaming apparatus and the actual points (the number of gaming balls stored in the gaming machine) and Even if there is a gap between them, it is possible to make a judgment based on the actual points.

(1-8) The instruction information transmission means transmits information for instructing a game prohibition to the gaming machine (operation instruction (with prohibition request) in FIGS. 31 to 33).
When the game machine receives information for instructing to prohibit the game, the game prohibiting means (the payout control unit 17 drives a hit ball firing motor (not shown)) for making the game by the points not be performed. Stop, and "play prohibited" in FIGS.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming apparatus can control the prohibition of the game by the gaming machine.

(1-9) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing the gaming machine to set the value of the points stored in the additional point storage means to the initial value (see FIG. 29). Operation instruction (with clear request)),
In the gaming machine, the additional point storage means stores the information based on receipt of information for instructing the value of the points stored in the additional point storage means to be an initial value. It includes point initialization means (FIG. 29 (the payout control unit 17 initializes the value of the game ball counter to 0) that sets the value of the point to the initial value.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to instruct the gaming apparatus side to initialize the points stored in the gaming machine.

(1-10) A connection portion (connector 330) for communicably connecting to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing a game with points and having points added according to the occurrence of a prize is provided. A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that adds points by using game-owned value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by a player,
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving from the gaming machine update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize;
And a point update means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  (1-11) Points that the points stored in the point storage means are determined as points at the end of the game when a signal (operation signal of the return button 322) requesting the end of the game is input A determination means (main control unit 323; FIG. 29) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are decided on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point deciding function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much It can be suppressed.

(1-12) When points received by the gaming machine are received from the gaming machine according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize, the received points and the point storage means Including determination means for determining the consistency with the stored points (FIG. 2; determination of coincidence of the number of game balls),
When it is determined by the determination means that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification by the display unit 312, recovery processing is performed, and the data correction request Bit 2 is “1” data (playing ball correction ON) And a communication start request including data of the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P unit, and correction of matching the storage of the number of game balls in the P unit with the number of game balls of the CU is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored in the gaming machine are not consistent with the points stored in the gaming apparatus. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to cope with the processing when there is an inconsistency.

  (1-13) The correction information for correcting the points stored in the gaming machine to the points stored in the point storage means when the determination means determines that the points are inconsistent It includes correction information transmission means (transmission of game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) to be transmitted to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, an abnormality occurs in the size of the memory point stored on the game machine side due to an illegal act or other causes, and the memory point stored on the game apparatus side and the game machine side Even when the stored points do not match, the points stored on the gaming machine can be corrected to the points stored on the gaming apparatus side.

(1-14) The gaming machine sequentially transmits the information for instructing transmission of the update information at intervals shorter than a firing time interval (one shot at 0.6 s) of gaming balls in the gaming machine. Send to
The point update means sequentially updates the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information received sequentially (main control unit 323, FIG. 27).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball, the game device has the change in the points on the game machine side reflected finely. Point management becomes possible.

(2-1) In the present invention, the management server (upper level server 801), a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and the management server and the gaming machine are communicably connected. A gaming system (card unit 3) for enabling the gaming machine to play a game using a valuable value owned by a player,
The management server includes identification information registration means (authentication information storage unit) for registering identification information (main chip ID, payout chip ID) for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine.
The gaming device is
Registration confirmation means (game machine chip information inquiry in FIGS. 83 and 84) for performing a confirmation process for confirming whether or not the identification information of the gaming machine has been registered in the management server;
When it is already registered as a result of confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means, it includes a game allowance means (card insertion / payment acceptance processing of FIG. 83) for permitting a game by the gaming machine,
The game allowing means is a limitation allowing means (see FIG. 84) for allowing the game by the gaming machine to be performed within the range of a predetermined limited period when it is not possible to confirm registration as a result of confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means. Includes card insertion and deposit processing.

  According to such a configuration, when the result of confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the identification information of the gaming machine is registered in the management server is registered, while the game by the gaming machine is permitted, the confirmation processing is performed. Even if the result of registration has not been confirmed, the gaming server based on the identification information is genuine by the management server, because the gaming machine is permitted to play the game within the predetermined limited period. It is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the inconvenience that the gaming machine can not be operated when it is not possible to obtain the certification.

(2-2) In the gaming system according to (2-1), the gaming device is
Permitted period determination means for determining whether or not a game in a gaming machine for which a game is permitted by the limited permit means is within the limited period (within the permitted days of operation control time without communication control IC information in FIG. 84 Processing to carry out authentication with the CU communication control unit, if any),
When it is determined that the limited period is exceeded by the allowable period determination means, a game prohibition means for prohibiting a game by the gaming machine (if it is outside the operation permission days range when there is no communication control IC information in FIG. And a process of transmitting an error notification ATT to the upper server without performing authentication with the CU communication control unit.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the game to the gaming machine for which the game is permitted within the limited period has exceeded the limited period, the game by the gaming machine is prohibited. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the decrease in security due to allowing the game beyond the limited period.

(2-3) In the gaming system according to (2-1) or (2-2), the gaming device is
Permitted period determination means for determining whether or not a game in a gaming machine for which a game is permitted by the limited permit means is within the limited period (within the permitted days of operation control time without communication control IC information in FIG. 84 Processing to carry out authentication with the CU communication control unit, if any),
Abnormality notification means for notifying the management server that an abnormality has occurred when it is determined by the allowable period determination means that the limited period has been exceeded (range of operation permission days when no communication control IC information shown in FIG. If it is outside, the process of transmitting an error notification ATT to the upper server without performing authentication with the CU communication control unit is included.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the game in the gaming machine in which the game is permitted within the limited period has exceeded the limited period, notification that an abnormality has occurred to the management server Therefore, the occurrence of abnormality exceeding a limited period can be grasped in the management server, and security can be improved.

(2-4) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (2-1) to (2-3), the gaming device is
Identification information storage means (processing for storing gaming machine chip information in FIGS. 83 and 84) for storing identification information to be checked when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed.
After the identification information is stored in the identification information storage unit, the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit is in the offline state with the management server when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation unit is performed. Offline time confirmation means for performing confirmation processing by collating with the identification information of the gaming machine (gaming machine chip information stored in the authentication information storage unit with gaming machine chip information stored in the EEPROM of the main control unit 323 at the off-line time) Match.

  According to such a configuration, the identification information which is the target of the confirmation when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed is stored in the gaming apparatus, and thereafter, when the registration confirmation processing is performed, the management server And when it is in the off-line state, the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus is compared with the identification information of the gaming machine, and the confirmation processing at the off-line time becomes possible, thereby preventing the security deterioration at the off-line time as much as possible. be able to.

(2-5) In the gaming system according to (2-4), when the identification information storage unit stores the identification information to be confirmed, the identification information is registered identification information by the management server or is not registered. (Also store the communication control IC information in the authentication information storage unit of the main control unit 323 in association with the registered information),
The limited permission means allows a game within the limited period when it is determined that the gaming machine corresponds to unregistered identification information as a result of confirmation processing by the off-line time confirmation means If the communication control IC information to be collated is stored in the authentication information storage unit and it is not registered information, it is judged that the communication control IC information is absent, and within the range of operation permitted days at CU authentication NG Execution of the communication control IC authentication sequence is permitted).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming apparatus stores the identification information to be confirmed, the identification information as registered or unregistered identification information by the management server is also stored and stored. When it is determined that it corresponds to the unregistered identification information as a result of the confirmation processing in the gaming device in, in order to allow the game within the limited period, it is limited within the limited period even when offline The game can be realized, and a drop in security when off-line can be prevented as much as possible.

(2-6) Another aspect of the present invention is a management server (upper server 801) for registering identification information (main chip ID, payout chip ID) for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine and the above-mentioned gaming machine (pachinko machine) 2. A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that includes a communication unit capable of communicating with the slot machine 2S), and enables gaming by the gaming machine using a valuable value owned by the player,
Registration confirmation means (game machine chip information inquiry in FIGS. 83 and 84) for performing a confirmation process for confirming whether or not the identification information of the gaming machine has been registered in the management server;
A game allowing means (card insertion / payment enabling process in FIG. 83) for allowing a game to be played by the gaming machine when registered as a result of confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means,
The game allowing means is a limitation allowing means (see FIG. 84) for allowing the game by the gaming machine to be performed within the range of a predetermined limited period when it is not possible to confirm registration as a result of confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means. Includes card insertion and deposit processing.

  According to such a configuration, when the result of confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the identification information of the gaming machine is registered in the management server is registered, while the game by the gaming machine is permitted, the confirmation processing is performed. Even if the result of registration has not been confirmed, the gaming server based on the identification information is genuine by the management server, because the gaming machine is permitted to play the game within the predetermined limited period. It is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the inconvenience that the gaming machine can not be operated when it is not possible to obtain the certification.

(2-7) In the gaming apparatus of (2-6), the permissible period determining means for determining whether or not the game in the gaming machine whose gaming is permitted by the limitation permitting means is within the limited period. (Process of performing authentication with the CU communication control unit if it is within the operation permission days within the absence of the communication control IC information of FIG. 84),
When it is determined that the limited period is exceeded by the allowable period determination means, a game prohibition means for prohibiting a game by the gaming machine (if it is outside the operation permission days range when there is no communication control IC information in FIG. And a process of transmitting an error notification ATT to the upper server without performing authentication with the CU communication control unit.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the game to the gaming machine for which the game is permitted within the limited period has exceeded the limited period, the game by the gaming machine is prohibited. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the decrease in security due to allowing the game beyond the limited period.

(2-8) In the gaming apparatus of (2-7), the permissible period determining means for determining whether or not the game in the gaming machine in which the gaming is permitted by the limitation permitting means is within the limited period. (Process of performing authentication with the CU communication control unit if it is within the operation permission days within the absence of the communication control IC information of FIG. 84),
Abnormality notification means for notifying the management server that an abnormality has occurred when it is determined by the allowable period determination means that the limited period has been exceeded (range of operation permission days when no communication control IC information shown in FIG. If it is outside, the process of transmitting an error notification ATT to the upper server without performing authentication with the CU communication control unit is included.

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the game in the gaming machine in which the game is permitted within the limited period has exceeded the limited period, notification that an abnormality has occurred to the management server Therefore, the occurrence of abnormality exceeding a limited period can be grasped in the management server, and security can be improved.

(2-9) In the gaming apparatus of (2-7) or (2-8), identification information storage for storing identification information to be checked when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation unit is executed. Means (storage processing of gaming machine chip information in FIG. 83, FIG. 84);
After the identification information is stored in the identification information storage unit, the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit is in the offline state with the management server when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation unit is performed. Offline confirmation means for performing confirmation processing by collating the identification information of the gaming machine (communication control IC information stored in the authentication information storage unit, communication control IC information stored in the EEPROM 808 of the main control unit 323 at the time of offline) Match.

  According to such a configuration, the identification information which is the target of the confirmation when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed is stored in the gaming apparatus, and thereafter, when the registration confirmation processing is performed, the management server And when it is in the off-line state, the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus is compared with the identification information of the gaming machine, and the confirmation processing at the off-line time becomes possible, thereby preventing the security deterioration at the off-line time as much as possible. be able to.

(2-10) In the gaming apparatus of (2-9), when the identification information storage means stores the identification information to be confirmed, the identification information is registered identification information by the management server or is not registered. (Also store the communication control IC information in the authentication information storage unit of the main control unit 323 in association with the registered information),
The limited permission means allows a game within the limited period when it is determined that the gaming machine corresponds to unregistered identification information as a result of confirmation processing by the off-line time confirmation means If the communication control IC information to be collated is stored in the authentication information storage unit and it is not registered information, it is judged that the communication control IC information is absent, and within the range of operation permitted days at CU authentication NG Execution of the communication control IC authentication sequence is permitted).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming apparatus stores the identification information to be confirmed, the identification information as registered or unregistered identification information by the management server is also stored and stored. When it is determined that it corresponds to the unregistered identification information as a result of the confirmation processing in the gaming device in, in order to allow the game within the limited period, it is limited within the limited period even when offline The game can be realized, and a drop in security when off-line can be prevented as much as possible.

(3-1) The present invention uses the management server (upper level server 801), a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and the gaming machine using the valuable value owned by the player A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming with a game machine,
The gaming device is
First control means (main control unit 323) capable of communicating with the management server;
A second control unit (CU communication control unit 80) capable of communicating with the gaming machine;
The management server is gaming machine identification information (main chip ID, payout chip ID) for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine, and control means identification information (CU communication for confirming the authenticity of the second control means Includes identification information registration means (authentication information storage unit) for registering the communication control IC information (SID) of the control unit 80, and
Further, the gaming device may
Registration confirmation means for performing confirmation processing to confirm whether the gaming machine identification information and the control means identification information have already been registered in the management server Chip information inquiry),
Mutual authentication processing means (CU communication control unit authentication sequence in FIGS. 78 and 79) for performing authentication processing between the first control means and the second control means;
It includes a game allowing means (card insertion / payment enable process in FIGS. 78 and 79) for permitting a game by the gaming machine based on the result of the confirmation process and the authentication process.

  According to such a configuration, the management server registers not only gaming machine identification information but also control means identification information for confirming the authenticity of the second control means provided in the gaming apparatus. And checking processing as to whether or not not only gaming machine identification information but also control means identification information has been registered in the management server, the first control means and the second control means provided in the gaming apparatus In order to perform authentication processing between the two and perform control for permitting a game by the gaming machine based on the result of the confirmation processing and the authentication processing, the registration confirmation of the gaming machine identification information based on the injustice to the gaming apparatus itself It is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the inconvenience that the credibility of the processing result is reduced.

(3-2) In the gaming system according to (3-1), the mutual authentication processing means
A challenge code (challenge code A in FIG. 17) is generated in the second control means and transmitted to the first control means (CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 1), and stored in the first control means A response code (response code A in FIG. 17) is generated from the received challenge code using the identified information (SID of the CU communication control unit) and sent back to the second control means, the second control First challenge / response authentication processing (in the CU communication control unit 80, the suitability of the received response code is determined using the stored identification information (SID of the CU communication control unit) to determine whether the received response code is appropriate or not Is determined using the SID of the CU communication control unit),
A challenge code is generated in the first control means and transmitted to the second control means (challenge code in FIG. 16), and identification information (SID of main control unit) stored in the second control means 16 generates a response code (response code in FIG. 16) from the received challenge code and sends it back to the first control means (BB serial ID authentication response 2), and the first control means stores it. The second challenge response authentication process (the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the received response code using the SID of the main control unit) to determine the suitability of the received response code using the identification information .

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means transmit the challenge code from one control means to the other control means and use the identification information stored in the other control means. And challenge code and response code transmitted and received between the two control means are leaked because authentication of the challenge response method is performed in which a response code is generated from the received challenge code and sent back to one of the control means. Even in this case, it is difficult to specify the stored identification information, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the control means caused by leakage of the identification information as much as possible.

(3-3) In the gaming system according to the above (3-1) or (3-2), the first control means and the second control means are pair authentication information used for mutual authentication ((3-3) or (3-2)). Store the authentication key (the common key),
The mutual authentication processing means further includes
The first control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the second control means (the main control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM) The encrypted random number B generated by the random number B is generated and transmitted together with the MAC as the device authentication request 2 to the CU communication control unit 2), the second control means performs an operation on the result data using the authentication information Processing is performed and the result data of the arithmetic processing is returned to the first control means, and the first authentication means checks the consistency between the result data returned in response and the transmitted result data Processing (the CU communication control unit determines the consistency with the MAC as the random number B of the plaintext obtained by combining the received random number B),
The second control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the first control means (the CU communication control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM) To generate the encrypted random number A and transmit it to the main control unit as the device authentication response 1 together with the MAC), the first control means performs an operation on the result data using the authentication information A second authentication process is performed to check the consistency with the result data by performing a process (in the main communication control unit, the consistency with the MAC is judged as the random number A of the plaintext composited with the received random number A) .

  According to such a configuration, the authentication process using the pair authentication information used for the mutual authentication stored in the first control means and the second control means is also executed. Security can be improved. Moreover, since this authentication process also transmits and receives data as a result of execution of arithmetic processing using stored authentication information, even if the result data to be transmitted and received leaks, authentication information from it Is difficult to identify, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible tampering with the control means caused by information leakage.

(3-4) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (3-1) to (3-3), the gaming device is
Identification information storage means for storing identification information that is the object of confirmation when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed (storage processing of communication control IC information in FIG. 78 and FIG. 79 and storage processing of gaming machine chip information )When,
After the identification information is stored in the identification information storage unit, the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit is in the offline state with the management server when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation unit is performed. Off-line confirmation means for performing confirmation processing by collating with the identification information of the gaming machine (the communication control IC information and the gaming machine chip information stored in the EEPROM of the main control unit 323 at the offline time are stored in the authentication information storage unit; Communication control IC information and gaming machine chip information).

  According to such a configuration, the identification information which is the target of the confirmation when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed is stored in the gaming apparatus, and thereafter, when the registration confirmation processing is performed, the management server And when it is in the off-line state, the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus is compared with the identification information of the gaming machine, and the confirmation processing at the off-line time becomes possible, thereby preventing the security deterioration at the off-line time as much as possible. be able to.

(3-5) Another aspect of the present invention includes the first control unit (main control unit 323) and the second control unit (CU communication control unit 80), and uses a player-owned valuable value A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming by a gaming machine,
The first control means is a management server (upper server that registers gaming machine identification information for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine, and control means identification information for confirming the authenticity of the second control means Can communicate with 801)
The second control means can communicate with the gaming machine (FIG. 4; CU communication control unit 80 and P unit communication control unit 81 can communicate),
Further, the gaming device may
Registration confirmation means for performing confirmation processing to confirm whether the gaming machine identification information and the control means identification information have already been registered in the management server Chip information inquiry),
Mutual authentication processing means (CU communication control unit authentication sequence in FIGS. 78 and 79) for performing authentication processing between the first control means and the second control means;
It has a game allowing means (card insertion / payment enabling process in FIGS. 78 and 79) for permitting a game by the gaming machine based on the result of the confirmation process and the authentication process.

  According to such a configuration, the management server registers not only gaming machine identification information but also control means identification information for confirming the authenticity of the second control means provided in the gaming apparatus. And checking processing as to whether or not not only gaming machine identification information but also control means identification information has been registered in the management server, the first control means and the second control means provided in the gaming apparatus In order to perform authentication processing between the two and perform control for permitting a game by the gaming machine based on the result of the confirmation processing and the authentication processing, the registration confirmation of the gaming machine identification information based on the injustice to the gaming apparatus itself It is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the inconvenience that the credibility of the processing result is reduced.

(3-6) In the gaming apparatus of (3-5), the mutual authentication processing means
A challenge code (challenge code A in FIG. 17) is generated in the second control means and transmitted to the first control means (CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 1), and stored in the first control means A response code (response code A in FIG. 17) is generated from the received challenge code using the identified information (SID of the CU communication control unit) and sent back to the second control means, the second control First challenge / response authentication processing (in the CU communication control unit 80, the suitability of the received response code is determined using the stored identification information (SID of the CU communication control unit) to determine whether the received response code is appropriate or not Is determined using the SID of the CU communication control unit),
A challenge code is generated in the first control means and transmitted to the second control means (challenge code in FIG. 16), and identification information (SID of main control unit) stored in the second control means 16 generates a response code (response code in FIG. 16) from the received challenge code and sends it back to the first control means (BB serial ID authentication response 2), and the first control means stores it. The second challenge response authentication process (the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the received response code using the SID of the main control unit) to determine the suitability of the received response code using the identification information .

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means transmit the challenge code from one control means to the other control means and use the identification information stored in the other control means. And challenge code and response code transmitted and received between the two control means are leaked because authentication of the challenge response method is performed in which a response code is generated from the received challenge code and sent back to one of the control means. Even in this case, it is difficult to specify the stored identification information, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the control means caused by leakage of the identification information as much as possible.

(3-7) In the gaming apparatus according to (3-6), the first control means and the second control means are used for mutual authentication of pair authentication information (authentication key comprising common key) Remember))
The mutual authentication processing means further includes
The first control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the second control means (the main control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808) The encrypted random number B generated by the random number B is generated and transmitted together with the MAC as the device authentication request 2 to the CU communication control unit 2), the second control means performs an operation on the result data using the authentication information Processing is performed and the result data of the arithmetic processing is returned to the first control means, and the first authentication means checks the consistency between the result data returned in response and the transmitted result data Processing (the CU communication control unit determines the consistency with the MAC as the random number B of the plaintext obtained by combining the received random number B),
The second control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the first control means (the CU communication control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813) To generate the encrypted random number A and transmit it to the main control unit as the device authentication response 1 together with the MAC), the first control means performs an operation on the result data using the authentication information A second authentication process is performed to check the consistency with the result data by performing a process (in the main communication control unit, the consistency with the MAC is judged as the random number A of the plaintext composited with the received random number A) .

  According to such a configuration, the authentication process using the pair authentication information used for the mutual authentication stored in the first control means and the second control means is also executed. Security can be improved. Moreover, since this authentication process also transmits and receives data as a result of execution of arithmetic processing using stored authentication information, even if the result data to be transmitted and received leaks, authentication information from it Is difficult to identify, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible tampering with the control means caused by information leakage.

(3-8) In the gaming apparatus of (3-7), identification information storage means (FIG. 85, FIG. 85) for storing identification information to be checked when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed. Storage processing of communication control IC information of 86 and storage processing of gaming machine chip information);
After the identification information is stored in the identification information storage unit, the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit is in the offline state with the management server when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation unit is performed. Off-line confirmation means for performing confirmation processing by collating with the identification information of the gaming machine (the communication control IC information and the gaming machine chip information stored in the EEPROM of the main control unit 323 at the offline time are stored in the authentication information storage unit; (Verify with the communication control IC information and the gaming machine chip information).

  According to such a configuration, the identification information which is the target of the confirmation when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed is stored in the gaming apparatus, and thereafter, when the registration confirmation processing is performed, the management server And when it is in the off-line state, the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus is compared with the identification information of the gaming machine, and the confirmation processing at the off-line time becomes possible, thereby preventing the security deterioration at the off-line time as much as possible. be able to.

(4-1) In the present invention, the first control means (main control unit 323 or CU3, P stand 2, Z counter, POS terminal, etc.) and the second control means (CU communication control unit 80) that can communicate with each other Or CU3, a P unit 2, a Z counter, a POS terminal etc.)
Mutual authentication means (CU communication control unit authentication sequence in FIGS. 83 and 84) performing mutual authentication with the first control means and the second control means;
A communication key generation unit (FIG. 7) that generates a communication key used for encryption communication between the first control unit and the second control unit on condition that the authentication result by the mutual authentication unit is proper. Generating the session key of FIG. 20 from the main authentication key and a random number),
The first control means and the second control means perform cryptographic communication using the communication key generated by the communication key generation means (communicate using the session key in FIGS. 7 and 20) .

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means perform authentication by the mutual authentication means, and the first control means and the second control means on condition that the authentication result is appropriate. The communication key used for the encryption communication between is generated and the encryption communication is performed, so that the mutual authentication result to the effect that the communication key used for the encryption communication is appropriate is obtained, even if the encryption communication is performed. Even if the communication key is leaked at the same time, the key can be abused to prevent the fraudulent act of monitoring the mutual authentication as much as possible, and security vulnerability can be overcome as much as possible.

  (4-2) In the gaming system of (4-1), the communication key generation unit repeatedly generates the communication key when the predetermined condition is satisfied (the sequence at the time of power supply start in FIG. 6 is Each time it is executed, the session key shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 20 is generated from the main authentication key and random numbers), and the repetitive generation process is performed at the time of the previous generation of the communication key and at the time of generation of the current communication key. A communication key is generated using changeable data that can be changed by (the random number is used to generate).

  According to such a configuration, repeated generation processing for newly generating a communication key is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the repeated generation processing is performed between generation of the previous communication key and generation of the current communication key. Since the communication key is generated using changeable change data, even if the communication key is leaked once, new changeable change data different from the time of generation of the leaked communication key is used to newly generate the communication key. Can be decrypted even if an attempt is made to decrypt the communication with the new communication key with the leaked key, and the security can be improved. it can.

(4-3) Another aspect of the present invention is a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) installed in a game arcade,
A first control unit (main control unit 323) and a second control unit (CU communication control unit 80) which are communicably connected to each other;
Mutual authentication means (CU communication control unit authentication sequence in FIGS. 83 and 84) performing mutual authentication with the first control means and the second control means;
A communication key generation unit (FIG. 7) that generates a communication key used for encryption communication between the first control unit and the second control unit on condition that the authentication result by the mutual authentication unit is proper. Generating the session key of FIG. 20 from the main authentication key and a random number),
The first control means and the second control means perform cryptographic communication using the communication key generated by the communication key generation means (communicate using the session key in FIGS. 7 and 20) .

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means perform authentication by the mutual authentication means, and the first control means and the second control means on condition that the authentication result is appropriate. The communication key used for the encryption communication between is generated and the encryption communication is performed, so that the mutual authentication result to the effect that the communication key used for the encryption communication is appropriate is obtained, even if the encryption communication is performed. Even if the communication key is leaked at the same time, the key can be abused to prevent the fraudulent act of monitoring the mutual authentication as much as possible, and security vulnerability can be overcome as much as possible.

  (4-4) In the gaming apparatus of (4-3), the communication key generating unit executes repetitive generation processing for newly generating the communication key at predetermined intervals (during power supply startup in FIG. 6). The session key shown in FIGS. 7 and 20 is generated from the authentication key and the random number each time the sequence is executed), and the repetitive generation processing is performed between the previous generation of the communication key and the generation of the current communication key. A communication key is generated using changeable change data (generated using a random number or the like).

  According to such a configuration, repeated generation processing for newly generating a communication key is executed at predetermined time intervals, and the repeated generation processing changes between when the previous communication key was generated and when the current communication key was generated. Since the communication key is generated using possible change data, even if the communication key is leaked once, new changeable change data different from the time of generation of the leaked communication key is used to newly generate the communication key. Since a communication key is generated and encryption communication is performed by the new communication key, even if an attempt is made to decrypt the communication by the new communication key with the leaked key, it can not be deciphered and security can be improved. .

  (4-5) In the gaming apparatus of the above (4-3) or (4-4), the gaming apparatus is an apparatus (card (card) that enables gaming by a gaming machine using a valuable value owned by a player Unit 3).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to overcome the security vulnerability in the device that enables the gaming machine to play using the valuable value owned by the player.

(5-1) The present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) capable of playing a game with points and having points added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a player-owned value (prepaid) The gaming machine (card unit 3) connected with the gaming machine and communicablely connected with the points using the balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls, and the point management server (upper rank) that manages the points A gaming system comprising a server 801),
The gaming machine includes point storage means (game ball counter, point counter) for storing points that are updated according to the progress of the game.
The gaming device is
Recording medium receiving means (card reader / writer) for receiving a recording medium in which information capable of specifying the game value owned by the player is recorded;
Forced ejection means (manual ejection mechanism, S702) for forcibly ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium reception means at the time of failure of the game apparatus;
At the start of communication with the gaming machine, the point information (P-unit recovery data including C-ID and point storage information) transmitted from the gaming machine is transmitted to the point management server. Point transmission means (S704 in FIG. 88A);
The point management server performs processing capable of specifying which enables the point transmitted from the point transmission means to be identifiable by the recording information of the forcibly ejected recording medium (S804 in FIG. 88). ~ S811).

  According to such a configuration, the recording medium received by the gaming device is forcibly discharged by the forced discharging means when the gaming device fails, and is replaced with a new gaming device to communicate with the gaming machine. When starting the game, the information on the points transmitted from the gaming machine is transmitted to the point management server via the gaming device, and the point management server transmits the transmitted points, In order to perform a process to make the state identifiable by the record information of the forcibly ejected recording medium, the recording of the recording medium wherein the points of the player who played the game at the stage before the failure of the gaming device was forcibly ejected The information becomes identifiable, and the player can continue the game without being disadvantaged.

(5-2) Another aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) capable of playing a game with points and having points added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a player's possession A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) connected to the gaming machine in communication with the gaming machine while adding points using a valuable value, a point management server (upper server 801) that manages points, and the points A gaming system comprising: a recording medium reception processing device (POS 810) which is communicably connected to a management server and receives and processes a recording medium on which information capable of specifying gaming value owned by a player is recorded,
The gaming machine includes point storage means (game ball counter, point counter) for storing points that are updated according to the progress of the game.
The gaming device is
Recording medium receiving means (card reader / writer) for receiving a recording medium on which information capable of specifying the game value owned by the player is recorded;
Forced ejection means (manual ejection mechanism, S702) for forcibly ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium reception means at the time of failure of the game apparatus;
A point for transmitting, to the point management server, a P-unit recovery data including point information C-ID and point storage information transmitted from the game machine at the start of communication with the game machine Transmission means (S704 in FIG. 88A);
The recording medium reception processing device receives the recording medium discharged by the forced discharge means, and the point information transmitted from the point transmission means to the point management server is recorded by the recording information of the recording medium received It includes recording medium processing means (S901 to S904 in FIG. 88C) for processing in a identifiable state.

  According to such a configuration, the recording medium received by the gaming device is forcibly discharged by the forced discharging means when the gaming device fails, and is replaced with a new gaming device to communicate with the gaming machine. When starting a game, the information on the points transmitted from the gaming machine is transmitted to the point management server via the gaming device, and the recording medium reception processing device is transmitted to the point management server In order to perform processing to make the points identifiable by the record information of the forcibly ejected recording medium, the points of the player who played the game at the stage before the failure of the gaming apparatus were forcibly ejected The information can be identified by the recording information of the recording medium, and the player can continue the game without being disadvantaged.

(5-3) In the gaming system according to the above (5-1), the point management server holds points based on point information transmitted from the gaming machine in operation via the gaming device. Include point update storage means (S 806 in FIG. 88B) for updating and storing points;
The processing means is configured to perform the identifiable processing on condition that a difference between the points transmitted by the point transmission means and the points stored in the point update storage means is within a predetermined number. The process is performed (when YES in S805 in FIG. 88B, the processes in S806 to S811 are performed).

  According to such a configuration, the point management server includes point update storage means for updating and storing points based on the point information transmitted from the operating gaming machine via the gaming device. The difference between the points transmitted from the gaming machine at the start of communication with the gaming machine and the points stored in the point updating storage means should fall within a predetermined number if normal. If the difference is equal to or more than a predetermined number, some abnormality has occurred. Then, under the condition that the above difference is within the predetermined number, the identifiable processing is performed, and the abnormal point is recorded on the recording medium even though the abnormal state occurs. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the state identifiable.

  (5-4) In the gaming system according to (5-2), the storage medium reception processing device performs a prize exchange device (POS 810) which performs a prize exchange process based on the points specified by the recording information of the received recording medium. ).

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to process the holding points transmitted from the point transmission means to the point management server by the prize exchange device in a state that can be specified by the recording information of the recording medium.

(6-1) In the present invention, the first control means (main control unit 323 or CU3, P stand 2, Z counter, POS terminal, etc.) and the second control means (CU communication control unit) that perform encrypted communication with each other 80, or CU3, a P unit 2, a Z counter, a POS terminal, etc.)
Both the first control means and the second control means are:
Key updating means (key updating means) for uniquely updating an encryption key (counter in FIG. 67 (a)) used for encryption communication with the first control means and the second control means according to the same updating method 67 (b) to 73 of FIG. 73),
Cryptographic means (Fig. 67 (b), Fig. 74 (a) S105) for generating a ciphertext using the key updated by the key updating means;
Decryption means (FIG. 68) for receiving the ciphertext generated by the encryption means and using the key updated by the key updating means (S133 in FIG. 74B);
The key update means performs the key update processing according to transmission and reception of the ciphertext (FIGS. 67 (b) to 73; one transmission or reception (data length of ciphertext 96 bytes) / (key length 16 bytes) ) = 6 only added update),
When the decryption means is unable to decrypt the received ciphertext because a key update process has occurred between the key update means of the first control means and the key update means of the second control means In addition, the key update decryption process which tries decryption within a predetermined number of times by updating the key included in the control means of the one that could not be decrypted (S150 of FIG. 70, FIG. 71, FIG. 75 (a) To S162).

  According to such a configuration, there is a problem of key update processing between the key update unit of the first control unit and the key update unit of the second control unit, and the received ciphertext can not be decrypted. In order to try within the predetermined number of times of decryption by updating the key included in the control means of the one that could not be decrypted, the decryption is performed while updating the key after the mutual keys once disagree. An attempt is made to repair key discrepancies, which makes it possible to recover and recover key discrepancies.

  (6-2) In the gaming system according to (6-1), the first control means and the second control means both perform the key update decryption process a predetermined number of times, and the decryption means It further includes error processing means (S 162 in FIG. 75 (a)) that executes error processing when decryption to an appropriate plaintext can not be performed.

  According to such a configuration, the key update decryption process is performed a predetermined number of times in order to perform an error process when decryption can not be performed properly even if the key update decryption process is performed a predetermined number of times. Nevertheless, it becomes possible to cope with the abnormal situation that decryption to proper plaintext can not be performed.

(6-3) In the gaming system according to (6-1) or (6-2), the encrypted communication between the first control means and the second control means is an encrypted communication text When it is not possible, re-transmission of the encrypted message is performed within a predetermined number of times (two times),
The decryption means executes the key update decryption process (S155 and S161 in FIG. 75 (a)) within the range of the number of times of execution according to the prescribed number of times.

  According to such a configuration, since the key updating process by the key updating unit is performed in response to the transmission and reception of the ciphertext, the key updating process is performed again when the ciphertext can not be received. It will be caused by the transmission. Therefore, if the key update decryption process is performed within the range of the number of times of execution according to the specified number of times of retransmission of the ciphertext, the problem should be solved. Therefore, it is possible to execute the key update decryption process within the number of times of execution according to the specified number of times, and to prevent the deterioration of security by performing the key update decryption process many times in many cases.

(6-4) Another aspect of the present invention is a gaming apparatus including a first control unit (main control unit 323) and a second control unit (CU communication control unit 80) that perform encryption communication with each other. Card unit 3)
Both the first control means and the second control means are:
Key updating means (key updating means) for uniquely updating an encryption key (counter in FIG. 67 (a)) used for encryption communication with the first control means and the second control means according to the same updating method 67 (b) to 73 of FIG. 73),
Cryptographic means (Fig. 67 (b), Fig. 74 (a) S105) for generating a ciphertext using the key updated by the key updating means;
Decryption means (FIG. 68) for receiving the ciphertext generated by the encryption means and using the key updated by the key updating means (S133 in FIG. 74B);
The key update means performs the key update processing according to transmission and reception of the ciphertext (FIGS. 67 (b) to 73; one transmission or reception (data length of ciphertext 96 bytes) / (key length 16 bytes) ) = 6 only added update),
When the decryption means is unable to decrypt the received ciphertext because a key update process has occurred between the key update means of the first control means and the key update means of the second control means In addition, the key update decryption process which tries decryption within a predetermined number of times by updating the key included in the control means of the one that could not be decrypted (S150 of FIG. 70, FIG. 71, FIG. 75 (a) To S162).

  According to such a configuration, there is a problem of key update processing between the key update unit of the first control unit and the key update unit of the second control unit, and the received ciphertext can not be decrypted. In order to try within the predetermined number of times of decryption by updating the key included in the control means of the one that could not be decrypted, the decryption is performed while updating the key after the mutual keys once disagree. An attempt is made to repair key discrepancies, which makes it possible to recover and recover key discrepancies.

  (6-5) In the gaming apparatus of (6-4), the first control means and the second control means both perform the key update decryption process a predetermined number of times, and the decryption means It further includes error processing means (S 162 in FIG. 75 (a)) that executes error processing when decryption to an appropriate plaintext can not be performed.

  According to such a configuration, the key update decryption process is performed a predetermined number of times in order to perform an error process when decryption can not be performed properly even if the key update decryption process is performed a predetermined number of times. Nevertheless, it becomes possible to cope with the abnormal situation that decryption to proper plaintext can not be performed.

(6-6) In the gaming apparatus according to (6-4) or (6-5), the encrypted communication between the first control means and the second control means is an encrypted communication text When it is not possible, re-transmission of the encrypted message is performed within a predetermined number of times (two times),
The decryption means executes the key update decryption process (S155 and S161 in FIG. 75 (a)) within the range of the number of times of execution according to the prescribed number of times.

  According to such a configuration, since the key updating process by the key updating unit is performed in response to the transmission and reception of the ciphertext, the key updating process is performed again when the ciphertext can not be received. It will be caused by the transmission. Therefore, if the key update decryption process is performed within the range of the number of times of execution according to the specified number of times of retransmission of the ciphertext, the problem should be solved. Therefore, it is possible to execute the key update decryption process within the number of times of execution according to the specified number of times, and to prevent the deterioration of security by performing the key update decryption process many times in many cases.

(7-1) The present invention relates to a first control unit (main control unit 323 or CU3, a P unit 2, a Z counter, a POS terminal, etc.) and a second control unit (CU communication control unit) that perform encrypted communication with each other. 80, or CU3, a P unit 2, a Z counter, a POS terminal, etc.)
Both the first control means and the second control means are:
Key updating means (key updating means) for uniquely updating an encryption key (counter in FIG. 67 (a)) used for encryption communication with the first control means and the second control means according to the same updating method 67 (b) to 73 of FIG. 73),
Cryptographic means (Fig. 67 (b), Fig. 74 (a) S105) for generating a ciphertext using the key updated by the key updating means;
Decryption means (FIG. 68) for receiving the ciphertext generated by the encryption means and using the key updated by the key updating means (S133 in FIG. 74B);
The key updating means
The key update process is performed according to transmission and reception of the ciphertext (FIG. 67 (b) to FIG. 73; only one transmission or reception (data length of ciphertext 96 bytes) / (key length 16 bytes) = 6 is added Update), and more
When a key update process is not performed between the key update unit of the first control unit and the key update unit of the second control unit, the ciphertext can not be decrypted by the decryption unit. Initialization processing means (FIG. 72, FIG. 73, FIG. 74 (a), FIG. 75 (b)) for initializing the key of FIG.

  According to such a configuration, there is a problem of key update processing between the key update unit of the first control unit and the key update unit of the second control unit, and the received ciphertext can not be decrypted. Then, the process of initializing each other's key is performed, which makes it possible to recover and recover the key discrepancy.

  (7-2) In the gaming system according to (7-1), the initialization processing means generates a random number and generates an initial key using the random number (S101 in FIG. 74A). A process of sharing the key between the first control means and the second control means is performed (S103 in FIG. 74 (a) and S130 and S131 in FIG. 74 (b)).

  According to such a configuration, a random number is generated by the initialization process, an initial key is generated using the random number, and the key is shared between the first control means and the second control means. Therefore, the initial key itself generates random numbers to generate a random key, which makes it possible to maintain security during initialization processing as much as possible.

  (7-3) In the gaming system according to (7-2), the processing to be shared by the initialization processing means is a predetermined key different from the encryption method using the key updated by the key updating means. This is a process of encrypting the initial key using (the main authentication key) and transmitting the encrypted initial key to the control means of the other party to share the key (step S103 in FIG. 74A). R is encrypted using the main authentication key in the mode, R is decrypted using the main authentication key in the SE1 mode in S130 of FIG. 74 (b), and R in plaintext is stored in S131).

  According to such a configuration, the process of sharing the key by the initialization processing means encrypts the key of the initialization using a predetermined key different from the encryption method using the key updated by the key update means. In order to transmit to the control means of the other party, security against leakage of the key at the time of transmission of the key of its initialization can be maintained.

(7-4) Another aspect of the present invention is a gaming apparatus (card) including a first control unit (main control unit 323) and a second control unit (CU communication control unit 80) which perform encrypted communication with each other. Unit 3),
Both the first control means and the second control means are:
Key updating means (key updating means) for uniquely updating an encryption key (counter in FIG. 67 (a)) used for encryption communication with the first control means and the second control means according to the same updating method 67 (b) to 73 of FIG. 73),
Cryptographic means (Fig. 67 (b), Fig. 74 (a) S105) for generating a ciphertext using the key updated by the key updating means;
Decryption means (FIG. 68) for receiving the ciphertext generated by the encryption means and using the key updated by the key updating means (S133 in FIG. 74B);
The key updating means
The key update process is performed according to transmission and reception of the ciphertext (FIG. 67 (b) to FIG. 73; only one transmission or reception (data length of ciphertext 96 bytes) / (key length 16 bytes) = 6 is added Update), and more
When a key update process is not performed between the key update unit of the first control unit and the key update unit of the second control unit, the ciphertext can not be decrypted by the decryption unit. Initialization processing means (FIG. 72, FIG. 73, FIG. 74 (a), FIG. 75 (b)) for initializing the key of FIG.

  According to such a configuration, there is a problem of key update processing between the key update unit of the first control unit and the key update unit of the second control unit, and the received ciphertext can not be decrypted. Then, the process of initializing each other's key is performed, which makes it possible to recover and recover the key discrepancy.

  (7-5) In the gaming apparatus of (7-4), the initialization processing means generates a random number and generates an initial key using the random number (S101 in FIG. 74A). A process of sharing the key between the first control means and the second control means is performed (S103 in FIG. 74 (a) and S130 and S131 in FIG. 74 (b)).

  According to such a configuration, a random number is generated by the initialization process, an initial key is generated using the random number, and the key is shared between the first control means and the second control means. Therefore, the initial key itself generates random numbers to generate a random key, which makes it possible to maintain security during initialization processing as much as possible.

  (7-6) In the gaming apparatus according to (7-5), the processing to be shared by the initialization processing means is a predetermined key different from an encryption method using a key updated by the key updating means. This is a process of encrypting the initial key using (the main authentication key) and transmitting the encrypted initial key to the control means of the other party to share the key (step S103 in FIG. 74A). R is encrypted using the main authentication key in the mode, R is decrypted using the main authentication key in the SE1 mode in S130 of FIG. 74 (b), and R in plaintext is stored in S131).

  According to such a configuration, the process of sharing the key by the initialization processing means encrypts the key of the initialization using a predetermined key different from the encryption method using the key updated by the key update means. In order to transmit to the control means of the other party, security against leakage of the key at the time of transmission of the key of its initialization can be maintained.

(8-1) In the present invention, the first control means (main control unit 323 or CU3, P stand 2, Z counter, POS terminal, etc.) and the second control means (CU communication control unit) that perform encrypted communication with each other 80, or CU3, a P unit 2, a Z counter, a POS terminal, etc.)
Both the first control means and the second control means are:
Mutual authentication processing means (CU communication control unit authentication sequence of FIG. 7A) for performing a plurality of types of mutual authentication processes with different authentication methods between the first control means and the second control means;
When the authentication result of each mutual authentication by the mutual authentication processing means is improper, the control result of the authentication partner is not notified of the single authentication result, and the result of executing all of the plurality of types of mutual authentication The general notification means (the process of general notification of the abnormality in FIGS. 9, 12 and 14) for notifying the control means of the authentication party of the abnormality in a total is included.

  According to such a configuration, security of mutual authentication by a single authentication method is performed because a plurality of types of mutual authentication processes with different authentication methods are performed between the first control means and the second control means. Even if is broken, mutual authentication with other different authentication schemes can maintain mutual authentication security.

  In addition, for example, when the authentication result of each of the plurality of types of mutual authentication processes is inadequate and the authentication result of the single authentication is notified to the control means of the authentication counterpart, which type of mutual authentication It is not preferable for security, but it is not preferable for security, but when the result of individual authentication of each mutual authentication is inadequate due to the function of general notification means, the result of authentication of the individual authentication is the player of the authentication partner In order to notify the control means of the authentication partner, it is not possible to overlook in which type of mutual authentication an abnormality has occurred in order to summarize the abnormalities resulting from the execution of all types of mutual authentication without notifying , Can improve security.

(8-2) In the gaming system according to (8-1), the mutual authentication processing means
A challenge code (challenge code A in FIG. 17) is generated in the second control means and transmitted to the first control means (CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 1), and stored in the first control means A response code (response code A in FIG. 17) is generated from the received challenge code using the identified information (SID of the CU communication control unit) and sent back to the second control means, the second control First challenge / response authentication processing (in the CU communication control unit 80, the suitability of the received response code is determined using the stored identification information (SID of the CU communication control unit) to determine whether the received response code is appropriate or not Is determined using the SID of the CU communication control unit),
A challenge code is generated in the first control means and transmitted to the second control means (challenge code in FIG. 16), and identification information (SID of main control unit) stored in the second control means 16 generates a response code (response code in FIG. 16) from the received challenge code and sends it back to the first control means (BB serial ID authentication response 2), and the first control means stores it. The second challenge response authentication process (the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the received response code using the SID of the main control unit) to determine the suitability of the received response code using the identification information .

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means transmit the challenge code from one control means to the other control means and use the identification information stored in the other control means. Challenge code and response code transmitted and received between the two game means are leaked because authentication of the challenge response system is performed in which a response code is generated from the received challenge code and sent back to one of the control means. Even in this case, it is difficult to specify the stored identification information, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the game means caused by the leakage of the identification information as much as possible.

(8-3) In the gaming system of (8-1) or (8-2), the first control means and the second control means are pair authentication information (common to each other). Store the authentication key)
The mutual authentication processing means further includes
The first control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the second control means (the main control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM) The encrypted random number B generated by the random number B is generated and transmitted together with the MAC as the device authentication request 2 to the CU communication control unit 2), the second control means performs an operation on the result data using the authentication information Processing is performed and the result data of the arithmetic processing is returned to the first control means, and the first authentication means checks the consistency between the result data returned in response and the transmitted result data Processing (the CU communication control unit determines the consistency with the MAC as the random number B of the plaintext obtained by combining the received random number B),
The second control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the first control means (the CU communication control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM) To generate the encrypted random number A and transmit it to the main control unit as the device authentication response 1 together with the MAC), the first control means performs an operation on the result data using the authentication information A second authentication process is performed to check the consistency with the result data by performing a process (in the main communication control unit, the consistency with the MAC is judged as the random number A of the plaintext composited with the received random number A) .

  According to such a configuration, the authentication process using the pair of authentication information used for the mutual authentication stored in the first control means and the second control means is also executed. Secure mutual authentication is possible and security is improved. Moreover, since this authentication process also transmits and receives data as a result of execution of arithmetic processing using stored authentication information, even if the result data to be transmitted and received leaks, authentication information from it Can be difficult to identify, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against gaming means caused by information leakage as much as possible.

(8-4) Another aspect of the present invention is a gaming apparatus including a first control unit (main control unit 323) and a second control unit (CU communication control unit 80) which perform encryption communication with each other. Card unit 3)
Both the first control means and the second control means are:
Mutual authentication processing means (CU communication control unit authentication sequence of FIG. 7A) for performing a plurality of types of mutual authentication processes with different authentication methods between the first control means and the second control means;
When the authentication result of each mutual authentication by the mutual authentication processing means is improper, the control result of the authentication partner is not notified of the single authentication result, and the result of executing all of the plurality of types of mutual authentication The general notification means (the process of general notification of the abnormality in FIGS. 9, 12 and 14) for notifying the control means of the authentication party of the abnormality in a total is included.

  According to such a configuration, security of mutual authentication by a single authentication method is performed because a plurality of types of mutual authentication processes with different authentication methods are performed between the first control means and the second control means. Even if is broken, mutual authentication with other different authentication schemes can maintain mutual authentication security.

  In addition, for example, when the authentication result of each of the plurality of types of mutual authentication processes is inadequate and the authentication result of the single authentication is notified to the control means of the authentication counterpart, which type of mutual authentication Is not suitable for security, but it is not preferable for security, but it works as a general notification means, and when the authentication result of each mutual authentication is inappropriate, the authentication result of the single authentication is used as the control means of the authentication partner In order to notify the control means of the authentication partner, it is not possible to overlook in which type of mutual authentication an abnormality has occurred in order to summarize the abnormalities resulting from the execution of all types of mutual authentication without notifying , Can improve security.

(8-5) In the gaming machine according to (8-4), the mutual authentication processing means
A challenge code (challenge code A in FIG. 17) is generated in the second control means and transmitted to the first control means (CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 1), and stored in the first control means A response code (response code A in FIG. 17) is generated from the received challenge code using the identified information (SID of the CU communication control unit) and sent back to the second control means, the second control First challenge / response authentication processing (in the CU communication control unit 80, the suitability of the received response code is determined using the stored identification information (SID of the CU communication control unit) to determine whether the received response code is appropriate or not Is determined using the SID of the CU communication control unit),
A challenge code is generated in the first control means and transmitted to the second control means (challenge code in FIG. 16), and identification information (SID of the main control unit) stored in the second control means 16 generates a response code (response code in FIG. 16) from the received challenge code and sends it back to the first control means (BB serial ID authentication response 2), and the first control means stores it. The second challenge response authentication process (the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the received response code using the SID of the main control unit) to determine the suitability of the received response code using the identification information .

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means transmit the challenge code from one control means to the other control means and use the identification information stored in the other control means. And challenge code and response code transmitted and received between the two control means are leaked because authentication of the challenge response method is performed in which a response code is generated from the received challenge code and sent back to one of the control means. Even in this case, it is difficult to specify the stored identification information, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the control means caused by leakage of the identification information as much as possible.

(8-6) In the gaming apparatus of (8-4) or (8-5), the first control means and the second control means are pair authentication information used for mutual authentication ( Store the authentication key (the common key),
The mutual authentication processing means further includes
The first control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the second control means (the main control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM) The encrypted random number B generated by the random number B is generated and transmitted together with the MAC as the device authentication request 2 to the CU communication control unit 2), the second control means performs an operation on the result data using the authentication information Processing is performed and the result data of the arithmetic processing is returned to the first control means, and the first authentication means checks the consistency between the result data returned in response and the transmitted result data Processing (the CU communication control unit determines the consistency with the MAC as the random number B of the plaintext obtained by combining the received random number B),
The second control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the first control means (the CU communication control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM) To generate the encrypted random number A and transmit it to the main control unit as the device authentication response 1 together with the MAC), the first control means performs an operation on the result data using the authentication information A second authentication process is performed to check the consistency with the result data by performing a process (in the main communication control unit, the consistency with the MAC is judged as the random number A of the plaintext composited with the received random number A) .

  According to such a configuration, the authentication process using the pair of authentication information used for the mutual authentication stored in the first control means and the second control means is also executed. Secure mutual authentication is possible and security is improved. Moreover, since this authentication process also transmits and receives data as a result of execution of arithmetic processing using stored authentication information, even if the result data to be transmitted and received leaks, authentication information from it Is difficult to identify, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible tampering with the control means caused by information leakage.

(9-1) In the present invention, the management server (upper-level server 801), a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player plays a game, and the management server and the game machine A gaming system (card unit 3) for enabling the gaming machine to play a game using a valuable value owned by a player,
The management server includes identification information registration means (authentication information storage unit) for registering identification information (main chip ID, payout chip ID) for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine.
The gaming device is
Registration confirmation means (game machine chip information inquiry in FIGS. 83 and 84) for performing a confirmation process for confirming whether or not the identification information of the gaming machine has been registered in the management server;
Game permission means (card insertion / payment enable process in FIG. 83) for permitting a game by the gaming machine when the result of confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is already registered,
Identification information storage means (processing for storing gaming machine chip information in FIGS. 83 and 84) for storing identification information to be checked when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed.
After the identification information which is the object of confirmation is stored in the identification information storage unit, it is stored in the identification information storage unit when it is in an offline state with the management server when performing the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation unit. Off-line verification means (verification process information stored in the EEPROM of the main control section 323 at the time of off-line authentication information) for performing verification processing by collating the identification information that is the object of verification with the identification information of the gaming machine And collating with gaming machine chip information stored in the storage unit.

  According to such a configuration, when it is registered as a result of confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the identification information of the gaming machine is registered in the management server, while the game by the gaming machine is permitted, the management server As a result, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the inconvenience that the gaming machine can not be operated when the gaming machine based on the identification information can not obtain authentication to the effect that the gaming machine is authentic.

  Furthermore, the identification information that is the object of the confirmation when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed is stored in the gaming device, and thereafter, when the registration confirmation processing is performed, the management server and the management server are offline. Sometimes, the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus and the identification information of the gaming machine are collated to enable off-line confirmation processing, and security deterioration can be prevented as much as possible.

(9-2) In the gaming system according to (9-1), when the identification information storage unit stores the identification information to be confirmed, the identification information is registered identification information by the management server or is not registered. (Also store the communication control IC information in the authentication information storage unit of the main control unit 323 in association with the registered information),
When it is determined that the gaming machine corresponds to unregistered identification information as a result of confirmation processing by the off-line confirmation unit, the gaming apparatus may play the game within a predetermined limited period. Limited permission means to allow the game by the game machine (If the communication control IC information of the verification target is stored in the authentication information storage unit and it is not registered information, it is judged that there is no communication control IC information, CU Execution of the communication control IC authentication sequence is permitted within the range of operation permission days at the time of authentication NG).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming apparatus stores the identification information to be confirmed, the identification information as registered or unregistered identification information by the management server is also stored and stored. When it is determined that it corresponds to the unregistered identification information as a result of the confirmation processing in the gaming device in, in order to allow the game within the limited period, it is limited within the limited period even when offline The game can be realized, and a drop in security when off-line can be prevented as much as possible.

(9-3) Another aspect of the present invention is a management server (upper server 801) for registering identification information (main chip ID, payout chip ID) for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine and the above-mentioned gaming machine (pachinko machine) 2. A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that includes a communication unit capable of communicating with the slot machine 2S), and enables gaming by the gaming machine using a valuable value owned by the player,
Registration confirmation means (game machine chip information inquiry in FIGS. 83 and 84) for performing a confirmation process for confirming whether or not the identification information of the gaming machine has been registered in the management server;
Game permission means (card insertion / payment enable process in FIG. 83) for permitting a game by the gaming machine when the result of confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is already registered,
Identification information storage means (processing for storing gaming machine chip information in FIGS. 83 and 84) for storing identification information to be checked when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed.
After the identification information which is the object of confirmation is stored in the identification information storage unit, it is stored in the identification information storage unit when it is in an offline state with the management server when performing the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation unit. Off-line verification means (verification process information stored in the EEPROM of the main control section 323 at the time of off-line authentication information) for performing verification processing by collating the identification information that is the object of verification with the identification information of the gaming machine (Verify with gaming machine chip information stored in the storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, when the result of confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the identification information of the gaming machine is registered in the management server is registered, while the game by the gaming machine is permitted, the confirmation processing is performed. Even if the result of registration has not been confirmed, the gaming server based on the identification information is genuine by the management server, because the gaming machine is permitted to play the game within the predetermined limited period. It is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the inconvenience that the gaming machine can not be operated when it is not possible to obtain the certification.

  Furthermore, the identification information that is the object of the confirmation when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed is stored in the gaming device, and thereafter, when the registration confirmation processing is performed, the management server and the management server are offline. Sometimes, the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus and the identification information of the gaming machine are collated to enable off-line confirmation processing, and security deterioration can be prevented as much as possible.

(9-4) In the gaming apparatus according to (9-3), when the identification information storage unit stores the identification information to be confirmed, the identification information is registered identification information by the management server or is not registered. (Also store the communication control IC information in the authentication information storage unit of the main control unit 323 in association with the registered information),
When it is determined that the gaming machine corresponds to unregistered identification information as a result of confirmation processing by the off-line confirmation unit, the restriction allowance unit is configured to play the game within a predetermined limited period. Limiting permission means that allows the player to play a game is included. (If the communication control IC information to be collated is stored in the authentication information storage unit and there is no registration information, it is judged that the communication control IC information is absent. , Execution of the communication control IC authentication sequence is permitted within the range of operation permission days at the time of CU authentication NG).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming apparatus stores the identification information to be confirmed, the identification information as registered or unregistered identification information by the management server is also stored and stored. When it is determined that it corresponds to the unregistered identification information as a result of the confirmation processing in the gaming device in, in order to allow the game within the limited period, it is limited within the limited period even when offline The game can be realized, and a drop in security when off-line can be prevented as much as possible.

(10-1) In the present invention, the first control means (main control unit 323 or CU3, P stand 2, Z counter, POS terminal, etc.) and the second control means (CU communication control unit) that perform encrypted communication with each other 80, or CU3, a P unit 2, a Z counter, a POS terminal, etc.)
Both the first control means and the second control means are:
First encrypted communication processing means (encrypted communication in SE1 mode in FIGS. 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14 and 19) which perform encrypted communication with each other;
Second encrypted communication processing means (encryption according to SE2 mode in FIGS. 7 and 15) which performs encrypted communication with a higher security level than encrypted communication by the first encrypted communication processing means after encrypted communication by the first encrypted communication processing means Communication).

  According to such a configuration, the cryptographic communication is performed by the first cryptographic communication processing means, and after the cryptographic communication, the cryptographic communication having a higher security level than the cryptographic communication by the first cryptographic communication processing means is performed. Even if the security of the encryption communication by the first encryption communication processing means is broken because the encryption communication is performed by the encryption communication processing means, a second encryption communication process which is an encryption communication with a higher security level performed thereafter. Cryptographic communication by means is possible, and security can be maintained by cryptographic communication of high security level by the second cryptographic communication processing means.

(10-2) In the gaming system according to (10-1), the second encryption communication processing unit is
Key updating means (key updating means) for uniquely updating an encryption key (counter in FIG. 69 (a)) used for encryption communication with the first control means and the second control means by the same updating method 67 (b) to 73 of FIG. 73),
Cryptographic means (Fig. 67 (b), Fig. 74 (a) S105) for generating a ciphertext using the key updated by the key updating means;
Decryption means (FIG. 68) for receiving the ciphertext generated by the encryption means and using the key updated by the key updating means (S133 in FIG. 74B);
The key update means performs the key update processing according to transmission and reception of the ciphertext (FIGS. 67 (b) to 73; one transmission or reception (data length of ciphertext 96 bytes) / (key length 16 bytes) ) = 6 only added update),
Both the first control means and the second control means are:
The key sharing unit (S103 in FIG. 74 (a) and 74 in FIG. 74 (a) distributes the initial key before being updated by the key updating unit by the first cryptographic communication processing unit and distributes it to the other control unit). (B) S130 and S131) are provided.

  According to such a configuration, since the encryption key used for the encryption communication is uniquely updated by the first control means and the second control means by the same updating method, the encryption communication using a fixed key which does not change is made. Compared with the security is improved.

(10-3) In the gaming system according to the above (10-2), the encryption key is an initial vector portion (also an initial vector portion R shown in FIG. 67 (a)) which is handed over without updating data of the initial key. , Updated unit (telegram counter unit N and cipher block counter unit I) to be updated,
The key update unit updates the update unit without updating the initial vector unit (S107, S108, and S109 in FIG. 74A).
The key sharing unit distributes and shares the initial vector part as the initial key (S103 in FIG. 74 (a), S130 in FIG. 74 (b), and S131).

  According to such a configuration, since the initial vector part which is not updated is distributed and shared as the initial key, it is updated by the key update unit as a cause when the decryption unit can not perform decryption. It is possible to find out the cause of whether the update part is misaligned or the initial vector part is misunderstood for some reason.

(10-4) Another aspect of the present invention is a gaming apparatus including a first control unit (main control unit 323) and a second control unit (CU communication control unit 80) that perform encryption communication with each other. Card unit 3)
Both the first control means and the second control means are:
First encrypted communication processing means (encrypted communication in SE1 mode in FIGS. 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14 and 19) which perform encrypted communication with each other;
And a second encrypted communication processing unit (encrypted communication in SE2 mode in FIGS. 7 and 15) performing encrypted communication with a security level higher than that of encrypted communication by the first encrypted communication processing unit.

  According to such a configuration, the cryptographic communication is performed by the first cryptographic communication processing means, and after the cryptographic communication, the cryptographic communication having a higher security level than the cryptographic communication by the first cryptographic communication processing means is performed. Even if the security of the encryption communication by the first encryption communication processing means is broken because the encryption communication is performed by the encryption communication processing means, a second encryption communication process which is an encryption communication with a higher security level performed thereafter. Cryptographic communication by means is possible, and security can be maintained by cryptographic communication of high security level by the second cryptographic communication processing means.

(10-5) In the gaming apparatus according to (10-4), the second encrypted communication processing unit is
Key updating means (key updating means) for uniquely updating an encryption key (counter in FIG. 67 (a)) used for encryption communication with the first control means and the second control means according to the same updating method 67 (b) to FIG. 75 (counter updating process),
Cryptographic means for generating a ciphertext using the key updated by the key updating means;
Decryption means (FIG. 67 (b), FIG. 74 (a) S105) for receiving the ciphertext generated by the encryption means and decrypting it using the key updated by the key update means;
The key update means performs the key update processing according to transmission and reception of the ciphertext (FIGS. 67 (b) to 73; one transmission or reception (data length of ciphertext 96 bytes) / (key length 16 bytes) ) = 6 only added update),
Both the first control means and the second control means are:
The key sharing unit (S103 in FIG. 74 (a) and 74 in FIG. 74 (a) distributes the initial key before being updated by the key updating unit by the first cryptographic communication processing unit and distributes it to the other control unit). (B) S130 and S131) are provided.

  According to such a configuration, since the encryption key used for the encryption communication is uniquely updated by the first control means and the second control means by the same updating method, the encryption communication using a fixed key which does not change is made. Compared with the security is improved.

(10-6) In the gaming apparatus of (10-4) or (10-5), the encryption key is also transferred to the initial vector portion (FIG. 67 (a)) without updating the data of the initial key. Includes an initial vector unit R) and an update unit (a message counter unit N and an encrypted block counter unit I) to be updated;
The key update unit updates the update unit without updating the initial vector unit (S107, S108, and S109 in FIG. 74A).
The key sharing unit distributes and shares the initial vector part as the initial key (S103 in FIG. 74 (a), S130 in FIG. 74 (b), and S131).

  According to such a configuration, since the initial vector part which is not updated is distributed and shared as the initial key, it is updated by the key update unit as a cause when the decryption unit can not perform decryption. It is possible to find out the cause of whether the update part is misaligned or the initial vector part is misunderstood for some reason.

(11-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) capable of playing a game by holding points and having points added according to the occurrence of a prize, and gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls held, etc.) owned by the player Alternatively, it is a gaming system including a gaming apparatus (card unit 3) connected to the gaming machine communicably connected while adding points by using the number of balls).
And a mode switching unit (requesting to change the trial mode shown in FIG. 49) for switching between a commercial mode and a non-business mode in which the player can play a game;
The gaming machine is
Specification means (microcomputer for game machine control, number-of-additions ball counter, number-of-balls counter) for specifying the amount of change of points (number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) according to use for games and occurrence of winnings;
Information transmitting means (ball number control unit) for transmitting update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) capable of specifying the amount of change to the game apparatus;
The gaming device is
Main point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing the number of game balls);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A point update means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the main point storage means based on the update information;
The point updating means does not update the points in the non-business mode (the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls and the number of game balls are not transmitted from the P-base 2 during the trial mode) Do not update the number).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  In addition, since the points are not renewed in the non-operating mode, when the player shifts to the operating mode and the non-operating mode in which the player can play a game, and then returns to the operating mode, the non-operating mode is set. The score is the same as the score just before the transition, and it is possible to prevent the score from becoming out of place.

(11-2) In the gaming system according to (11-1), the gaming device is
Holding point storage means for storing point data in the business mode when changing from the business mode to the non-business mode (a RAM for storing the number of total added balls, the total number of subtracted balls and the number of gaming balls in FIG. 2) 90, a RAM for storing the total addition number, the total subtraction number, and the number of holding points of FIG.
When the operation to cancel the non-business mode is performed, the game state is restored by returning to the points in the business mode based on the data of the points stored in the point storage means Means (when the non-business mode is restored, the game is resumed based on the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls, the number of game balls, or the total number of additions, the total number of subtractions, and the number of points).

  According to such a configuration, when the business mode is shifted to the non-business mode and then returned to the business mode, the game can be resumed from the points immediately before the transition to the non-business mode.

(11-3) In the gaming system according to (11-1) or (11-2), the gaming machine is
A game area (game area 27) in which game media are launched;
Non-operating mode releasing means for releasing the non-operating mode on condition that the presence or absence of the winning of the launched game medium is determined when the operation for releasing the non-operating mode is performed (FIG. 61; game When the operation is completed, the card unit is notified of the completion of the mode switching preparation in the "operation response".

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the non-business mode is canceled even though the presence or absence of the winning of the launched game medium is not determined.

(11-4) In the gaming system according to any one of (11-1) to (11-3), the gaming machine is
It includes a variable display device (variable display device) whose display state can be changed, and when the display result of the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display mode, it becomes a specific gaming state (big hit) which is advantageous for the player. ,further,
When a command to shift to the non-business mode is received during variable display of the variable display device or during the specific gaming state, the variable display device is not variably displayed and the normal gaming is not in the specific gaming state Non-business mode transition control means for performing control to shift to the non-business mode after entering the state (FIG. 62; after confirming that the symbol is not changing and not big hit, the operation control mode of the main control board is switched Send ready)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being shifted to the non-business mode despite the variable display of the variable display device or in the middle of the specific gaming state.

(11-5) Another aspect of the present invention is provided with a connection portion for communicably connecting to a gaming machine that can play a game by means of points and can add points according to the occurrence of a prize, A gaming apparatus (card unit 3) that adds points by using owned gaming value,
Point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing "the number of game balls");
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving from the gaming machine update information capable of specifying the amount of change in points according to use for a game and occurrence of a prize;
A point update means (main control unit 323) for updating the points stored in the point storage means based on the update information;
The point update means does not update the points when the gaming machine is transitioning from the business mode in which the player can play a game to the non-business mode (P in the trial mode) The number of addition balls, the number of subtraction balls, and the number of game balls are not transmitted from the stand 2, and the number of game balls is not updated in CU3).

  According to such a configuration, since point management is performed on the gaming machine side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine can be minimized as much. .

  In particular, in the gaming machine, the replacement cycle in the game arcade tends to be shorter than that of the gaming machine in order to be able to provide a more enjoyable game quickly. In relation to that, the advantage of being able to reduce the running cost of the game arcade where the gaming machine is introduced by reducing the cost of the gaming machine by having the point management function on the gaming machine side instead of the gaming machine side. is there.

  In addition, since the points are not renewed in the non-operating mode, when the player shifts to the operating mode and the non-operating mode in which the player can play a game, and then returns to the operating mode, the non-operating mode is set. The score is the same as the score just before the transition, and it is possible to prevent the score from becoming out of place.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

2 pachinko machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card unit, 4 wooden frame, 5 front frame, 6 glass door, 12 glass door closing detector, 16, 116 main control board, 17, 117 payout control unit, 26 game board, 309 Card insertion / ejection slot, 312 indicator, 319 replay button, 321 lending button, 322 return button, 323 main control unit, 54
display.

Claims (1)

A gaming system comprising: a management server; a gaming machine in which a player plays a game; and a gaming apparatus communicably connected to the management server and the gaming machine to enable predetermined processing,
The management server includes identification information registration means for registering management server side identification information for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine,
The gaming device is
Registration confirmation means for performing confirmation processing for confirming whether or not the management server side identification information corresponding to the identification information of the gaming machine has been registered in the management server;
Game permission means for permitting a game by the gaming machine when the result of confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is already registered;
The identification information of the gaming machine when the confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means is executed is stored as the gaming apparatus side identification information regardless of the result of the confirmation processing, and the identification information already registered by the management server or Identification information storage means which also stores information of unregistered identification information as well;
After the gaming apparatus side identification information is stored in the identification information storage means, the identification information storage means can not communicate with the management server when performing confirmation processing by the registration confirmation means. Off-line storage to determine whether the gaming apparatus side identification information stored in the storage device matches the identification information of the gaming machine and whether the identification information has been registered or not registered by the management server Including determination means,
The game allowance means is
When the off-line storage determination unit determines that the identification information matches and the identification information is registered by the management server, the game is permitted,
When the off-line storage determination means determines that the identification information matches and the identification information is not registered by the management server, the game by the gaming machine is permitted within a predetermined limited period, System.